Loading...
Menu
Ebooks   ➡  Fiction  ➡  Science fiction  ➡  Hard sci-fi  ➡  Supernatural

From Beyond Space and Time 2016

 

 

 

From Beyond Space and Time 2016

 

V Bertolaccini

 

 

 

This edition published 2016 by CB

This is a Shakespir edition 2016

 

Copyright Victor Bertolaccini

 

ISBN: 978-1-3114-6585-6

 

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopy, recording or otherwise, without prior written permission of the copyright owner. Nor can it be circulated in any form of binding or cover other than that in which it is published and without similar condition including this condition being imposed on a subsequent purchaser.

 

All characters in this publication are fictitious and any resemblance to real persons, living or dead, is coincidental

 

From The Alien Artifact 9, The Alien Artifact 3, The Alien Artifact 4.

 

Part I

 

Prologue

 

The Ancient Visitation

 

McMurdo’s pale complexion and shaken appearance showed he had encountered something beyond his comprehension, of an immensely deadly diabolical nature, and he shook in terror, barely able to speak, and looked gravely ill.

I strained my eyes to see him in the dimness of the underground train tunnel, near London Bridge, beside the underground Roman cavity they had just uncovered in the side of the tunnel, which he had just climbed out!

“What did you see down there?” I gasped, in horror, at what he had suggested existed.

“I saw its face!” he muttered. “It’s hideous! Its existence goes back far further than humans, and far beyond! It’s trapped down there somewhere!”

I stood frigid and staggered at the danger, and started to comprehend what we were up against, and had been missing!

I wondered what could be powerful enough to trap it, and if there was even anything in existence to free it!

“Its origins go beyond humans, and the Romans who settled here, and has been dormant, waiting to be revived, and uncovered, and has remained undetected by our technology!”

He continued, biting his lower lip hard, “Our detection methods are far inferior and are mainly created and function to discover normal objects, and even normal unidentified objects, and our investigations of it are futile!”

I sat frigid, realizing the mistake we had made and what the outcome of what was occurring could be, and by trying to handle something of its nature, which could categorically kill us all!

“Some scientists found traces of it though, which were kept confidential – while they tried to locate and investigate it!”

“It must be incredible!” I answered firmly. “It must have been tremendous! What made it come to this place, in the first place?”

“Nobody knows! Perhaps there’s something here, which it came to investigate! If it was far less dormant it might have been located by some means! It is powerful!”

I was amazed that he thought it could have some form of powerful presence, and I believed it was supposed to be entirely supernatural, and was sure I was destined to discover its existence, and full potential, and believed it could be buried away below us, below the cavity, unearthed by them, working there, and I detected he had been up to something when he discovered its existence.

Deep down I thought McMurdo had barely survived, and seemed to believe he could be killed in some hideous way!

It was lucky Marple had not been able to get hold of the archaeologists to investigate his accounts of the lost treasure, and Roman map he had found, as they were working on another project, but I knew they soon would, and that we could not do anything about it, and I thanked him for warning me.

In the ground below my feet I was surprised to see an object, which I saw was a Roman coin, and I grabbed it and cleaned dirt away from it, in the dim light, and I entered further into the massive cavity in the side of the tunnel wall, and looked down into the large hole there, going deep below, and into the hideous cavity, and wondered why in the hell it was there, and why the railway company had not filled it in, but I knew they would once they had completed the rest of the railway line, and it could be buried away for future explorers to uncover.

I recalled the other incident we had investigated, at Battlefield Road, and after all the observations, research, and by leading scientists, scientists admitted that the thing found in the woman’s house we investigated had unknown origins, mainly by its appearance and tremendous unrecognized powers! Although they still had a lot of work and investigations to carry out, and had found little, and they were trying to keep it confidential!

“We have to investigate it!” McMurdo warned. “The future of the world could be at stake? If the wrong people get hold of it …”

“We should investigate it!” I agreed, recalling a newspaper article. “There may soon be many more constructions being built around here! They’re building far more constructions now … We have to get anything we can on it – and as much information on it and its origins …”

“There’s little! That’s been found! It’s mainly in ancient lost legends, which show its hideous features – and that of the devil!”

I was left confused at what information he had discovered, and stated, “If it has a physical presence we could discover something new about it – and it would be worthwhile to investigate!”

McMurdo gasped, in horror, still badly shaken from his confrontation with it, and replied, “I never thought I would live to see it and survive!”

 

 

 

 

The Thing from Beyond Reality

 

 

Chapter 1

 

The Investigators

 

Just before Christmas, at the end of the Second World War, I was moved to the new headquarters of Reality Investigations detective agency, at a new site on the river Thames, in London, where I was surprised to find it was virtually identical to the other.

John Marple, the founder, owner, and chief investigator, was there, and I was still his assistant investigator.

The whole account of what occurred was now astounding and I could barely believe what had happened, and what happened later.

I was staggered at the Battlefield Road discovery, and walking in and discovering the sphere formation, and its powerful energy pulsations blasting through sold rock, and witnessing some form of life existing there, which we have not seen since, which nobody grasped the true identity of!

The formation altered back to its original dormant formation later, after the paranormal scientists arrived, and I had to describe things that happened and that I seen invisible things surrounding it, which had become visible, and their strange glowing and swirling ghostly formations, forces, and some like spirits with shrouds over them.

The central formation resembled a magical living sphere, altering its formation, and its energy and powers, and I knew it had no real physical form, and it normally had a colossal size and powers somewhere else.

In the end, after intense investigations, nobody, other than the two paranormal scientists, Oswald and Higgins, who witnessed some of it, believed what I told them existed.

All the occurrences sounded so astounding afterwards I could hardly believe it myself at times, and what the outcome scenario of the incredible events had been, and it being entirely different from what I expected.

Though the treasure we found in the cavity was confirmed to belong to Mary Queen of Scots it was not confirmed officially, and it was currently being kept in a museum cellar, as they attempted to prove what it was, and it actually existed.

The dormant alien formation, even when shown, was not enough to prove anything, and it was a rare phenomenon to them, and something else entirely, and all the scientists, who had been unable to make mental or normal communications with it, were unable to prove it or prove it was not, and it basically left me the only one that had seen it and communicated with it.

I was unable to allow it to make contact with the human race, as they were unable to communicate, and it seemed to change its mind about doing it, as it had done before, but I realized it wanted to do something else, which I was unable to realize, and from my last communications with it.

In the end it was left in the museum cellar, with the treasure, where the paranormal scientists and scientists occasionally visited when they had new ideas and technology, to investigate it further.

To my surprise I once realized nobody in the museum realized what had even taken place, and was there, buried away in the depths of their building, and the scientists and paranormal scientists who investigated it no longer mentioned anything of it.

At the time I never even suspected in my wildest fantasies that what we had found was not the conclusion to the whole affair, and what we would find later, and more historical treasure.

Marple had investigators in all major worldwide cities and he was one of the most advanced and knowledgeable investigators I had met, who was known to me for many years before I joined him as assistant chief investigator, and his experience was vast, in all sorts of ways, in science and technology, in extraordinary occurrences, and he handled cases and activities beyond any other agencies I had encountered.

Upon my first entrance of the building he had me rushed up the stairs to his office, and introduced as Mike Malone, previously a news reporter, to the new investigators, and I was given a seat.

Marple held a meeting with the investigators there discussing the end of the war, and at the end of the meeting introduced me to a new distinctive/strange case, which baffled me, as I had been sure I had done everything, after the past affairs, and the alien discovery, and what must surely be the greatest scientific discovery mankind ever encountered.

He bestowed the case at the end of the meeting with little knowledge of what it was fully about, other than it was of interest to him to see how I handled it, as my first case in London, and to see if I was doing what he wanted, and to see what I would come up with, and left me in confusion, as he gave me little.

After examining the few facts I became convinced it was just someone playing a festive season drink induced prank, dressed as a department store Santa Claus, and all that was mentioned was a woman had phoned claiming a department store Santa had scared her at her home.

Although what happened reminded me of what had happened on my first case and a woman had phoned claiming to have seen ghosts, and I sensed something, and saw Marple had reacted in the same way, but I did not know why.

Furthermore, before I undertook it, something else emerged, and a new client, McMurdo, phoned Marple, with another strange case, to Marple’s surprise, and they arranged a meeting, and I stayed to see what he was so desperate to do, and I wondered what was going to happen, and what the outcome would be, and slowly detected Marple had excitedly become interested, and that money was surely involved, and I wondered if it was because it Christmas or the company opening its new headquarters.

I sat at the fireplace and watched Marple put up his Christmas tree in the corner of the room, introducing the festive season, and he poured us full glasses of his best whisky, and jumped into his seat, and I saw the last of the sunlight vanishing.

I studied buildings looking for bomb damage from the war.

As I shifted my seat closer to the fire his new secretary shoved open the door and rushed in and introduced McMurdo, and I was surprised to see him enter in his dirty dusty work clothes, from the top of the stairs, weary and exhausted, looking nervous.

He looked as if he had just finished working at a building site, and I could not grasp why he was so nervous, and what he wanted.

I considered if there was money in the building trade, now that the war was over, with all the damaged buildings, and them rebuilding the city.

I was slightly disappointed, as I expected more, and expected he would be wealthy, and I considered why Marple thought there was money involved, and spotted Marple looked disappointed for a few seconds, and he gave McMurdo a seat at the fireplace, which he gladly took and rested in, and excepted a glass of whisky.

After a while Marple asked him what he wanted, and he shoved his hand into his inner pocket, and apprehensively removed what looked like the remains of a folded up crumpled rag, which I identified as some form of ancient paper, and he nervously sat holding it while looking at it and his drink, and I suddenly spotted he had encountered something of immense danger, and I wondered what could do such a thing to such a man, and I considered the events that had occurred due to the war.

“This is a very ancient document!” he announced, and Marple looked up as he opened it up, and looked startled.

He stared at it, and Marple continued, “I’ve some experience of dating documents! Even though it looks far too old and unique for me to recognize …”

He took the ancient piece of paper and marched over and handed it over to Marple, and backed away to his seat.

Marple had a look of surprise and confusion, and asked him, “Perhaps you should tell us what happened, and why you need us – including what you told me on the phone, in more detail, and we perhaps may help you!”

“Alright I shall!” he replied, and relaxed more. “I work on the underground line … We’re extending the underground train line … We drill out the muck and rocks! With all the bomb damage and extra work we’ve been running behind schedule … So they’ve employed more workers, and we work later hours …”

“Where are you working?” I asked, curiously.

“Near London Bridge!” he replied, looking out at where the river was. “We were digging the rubble out the tunnel and increasing the size of part of the tunnel when the tunnel wall collapsed in … Revealing a large hidden cavity in the side of the tunnel … The ground inside the cavity collapsed and fell into a deep cavity below …”

He held his head, and quickly pulled himself together, and straightened up, and continued, “It was not just a cavity though … It was part of some buried away ancient construction, and we found a large cavity deep below. We were sure it had tunnels and ancient artifacts …”

“Of great value?” I replied.

He nodded his head, and I wondered what he was talking about, as why the hell would ancient underground artifacts, tunnels, and cavities be so significant, and to such a guy, at the most archeologists would be called in to explore it.

Again I wondered what he was so frightened of, and I was more confused than I had been.

I recalled underground tunnels and hideouts being in other cities, and realized that there could be some there!

To my surprise he replied, “The origins of that piece of paper was told to me to be nearly two thousand years old …”

Marple looked at it, clearly still wondering what he was after, and why he was so frightened.

McMurdo continued, “According to accounts and legends I found! Valuable treasure was concealed near where something was concealed!”

“Near where what was concealed?” I gasped, looking startled.

Marple looked at him calmly, and I looked deep into the fire, and listened.

“I found that ancient map hidden on a skeleton in the cavity! It will not be long before the cavity will be buried away, as we have to finish the repairs and railway line …”

“What do you want us to do?” I replied, cautiously.

“I’ve just come into new information that could allow you to locate it!”

I could not grasp if it actually existed, and sat considering it, and everything he said.

“According to myths,” he continued, “many people have been found dead searching for it down there! There could be something of great danger, where it’s been concealed!”

“What’ll we do then?” I asked, curiously, looking over at Marple, waiting to see if Marple said anything.

“You’ll have to wait until I’m ready!” McMurdo replied first, and stood up. “I could have a major clue to its location, and I’m sure I can discover something of significant importance! I will need your help to recover it!”

“We’ll do that!” Marple replied firmly.

When he had left the building, and returned home, I started to doubt what he was after was of value other than to archaeology and museums, for historical value, and I was sure he was just trying to get us to go out our way to get it for him, and I wondered if it was also because it was of great danger.

 

Chapter 2

 

The Santa Investigation

 

My first investigation in London seemed strange, which I could not identify, and the elderly widow client left me confused, as she claimed she had seen Santa Claus in her house in the middle of the night, and she claimed he had a strange ghostly appearance, and I could not identify why.

So I questioned her over again, and took it she had witnessed something unusual in the night, while leaving her bed, upon hearing noises below, and there seemed to me to be no case to investigate as no crime had been committed, and she said she was not bothered about him being there to my surprise, and nothing seemed to suggest he had done anything, and I wondered why she was not bothered about him being there, in her house at night, and why she had reported it, and she never replied why.

I had gone to the client confused and repeatedly going over the document I was given, which consisted of nothing but a few paragraphs with a few lines she had given the agency, and I came to the conclusion that she might have stopped an attempted burglary and wanted us to secretively handle the case.

What could she have confronted at night in her living room of her house that could have caused her to seek such dramatic action?

The location was near our headquarters, next to the Thames, and when I entered I expected little. It was my first case!

After talking with her more I established that she had recently become a widow, and was left there on her own, and I suddenly realized that she believed she had encountered something she believed was of a paranormal nature, of a strange nature, and that she must want me to identify what it was and perhaps find a way of getting rid of it.

Though what had she seen, and how was I going to get rid of it, and what if it was some form of paranormal?

After the ghost occurrences I had witnessed before I gasped at what it could be! But they were entirely different and surely could not exist there. And if she had fantasized something, half asleep, in the middle of the night, she could have hallucinated, or she could have believed it had occurred afterwards, but there was more to it, and I had to try to deduce what she meant by what she said, and I had her give me accurate descriptions of the visitation, or whatever she thought it was, but she gave me little and it left me confused, and I wondered if she was playing with me, as she might have heard of the case of the ghost sightings.

Though she insisted something had appeared there, in her living room, and that it had never appeared there before, and she claimed the Santa Claus floated inches over her floor, as though it thought it was on the floor, and its movement suggested it was doing something, with an intension, which she never identified.

The case seized my attention and I became engrossed in discovering what would happen, and in the unusual case, and I had to solve it. But it was not a matter of remaining there this time and watching for its reappearance, as it had only shown itself once, and I even wondered if it could have been from my appearance there, and the powers that I had gained from the last occurrence, but they had been different and had vanished, and I decided to check nearby and locals there, and if they had seen anything, or had heard of anything that had supposedly haunted the region.

 

Chapter 3

 

The Visitations

 

After thinking it over for too long I started wondering if it was me that was attracting such strange occurrences to materialize, as since the last one I still had not heard any other proper occurrences anywhere, and from everyone and everywhere I checked, and could not grasp how the paranormal scientists could even work, as there was nothing and they admitted it!

I sensed that it existed in this case, and started to realize it more and more as I questioned locals, but I could not identify what, as they only explained so far, and little, and none had actually seen any occurrences, and I could not grasp if they were tricking me, or hiding something, but eventually I got more information from them, and I realized there had been other sightings of the Santa Claus, and that they were passing on information from the victims.

I began to believe it could be a serial killer, who had hidden away the remains of his victims, and the people I had met only had heard rumors, and I decided to search further and discovered there had been other sightings of the Santa Claus on the same street as the elderly widow who had witnessed him.

My first investigation of another elderly widow on the same street seemed as strange as the first, and left me more confused, and gave little information on what she had witnessed, and nothing indicating it was a serial killer, and she claimed she had seen Santa Claus actually emerge in her house in the middle of the night, and she claimed it had somehow had the appearance of something ghostly, and I started to wonder if she was just copying the other woman, and wondered what they were up to.

By the way she later described it I wondered if it had been a burglar using the festive season and a Santa Claus costume to disguise him breaking in, while hiding his identity, and after talking it over she admitted others in the street had encountered it too, to my surprise, and I decided to investigate it further.

Back at Reality Investigations I met Marple and he handed me letters involved with the case, which I opened, and I sat surprised and shocked at the fireplace reading them, and even though I thought the sudden appearance of the letters had to be someone reacting to my investigations, and perhaps covering up what they were doing, I realized how authentic the letters were and how dangerous the case could be, and I was left staggered when I read one from a school boy who claimed Santa’s reindeer had eaten his brother, and left his bones under their Christmas tree, and I was left baffled, and wondered why the police had not been called, and I decided that I had better investigate it before doing anything, and had to check the bones existed, and identify a killing occurring!

I was left unsure by the way it was written, and it was strange that the young boy claimed that his brother should not have gone downstairs to see Santa, and that he had not known any better, and I wondered if he had been kidnapped or something, and had left the bones to cover it up.

He claimed his parents were away and I realized that his parents had not returned yet and that the occurrence had occurred on a previous night, and the letter finished with him asking for our help, and I realized people I had met had told him and the other letter writers of my investigations.

What the hell was there? Was it a case for paranormal investigators? I considered calling them up, but realized I would have to prove something of that nature existed, or there was something unexplained occurring.

Suddenly I discovered one letter was from a neighbor of the first elderly lady client, who started the investigation, and I began reading other letters, and it became more and more curious, and I read letters from women at the surrounding houses, and that it was not burglaries as nothing was being taken from the houses.

One claimed the Santa had used large vicious reindeers! Or had used a dangerous animal disguised as a reindeer! Which could have attacked and killed the boy, and I had to investigate it.

While going through the dates of the occurrences in the letters I discovered that he was working his way down the street ever night, and had probably done all the houses there, one every night, and that the boy’s house had been recent, and I worked out what house he would surely visit that night.

 

Chapter 4

 

The Christmas Visitation

 

I thought of telling Marple but I left it as I wanted to solve the case myself, and could not believe such a thing could happen, and on my first case, and it never occurred to the other investigators of it being anything, and how could anything happen with such a case!

It was absurd! I realized then that they could be missing major cases, and serial killers!

I wanted to know what the clients were actually talking about!

The woman in the house the Santa Claus was to arrive at welcomed me in, and told me about the things her neighbors had witnessed, and had told her, and late that night she gave me a room on the ground floor, and I placed a seat at the door of the bedroom and left the door partly opened, just enough to see into the living room and entire area where he would enter, and I sat reading a book I brought with me, and I started to see sense and wonder if they were all up something else, which I never grasped.

What surprised me was she arrived near the time the occurrences had taken place at the other houses and apologized to me for something, and before she left gave me a book to read, to which I believed she had given me as she felt sorry for me, leaving me there doing nothing, in the dark, with whatever it was, and I considered if she intended to use the story of it for somewhere for some reason.

Though when I started to read the book I sat back staggered, as the book was full of paranormal and ghost stories, which were claimed to be real accounts, which were written like they actually occurred, and I realized it could be part of their plan to persuade me something was there.

Though after reading through it, trying to see what was there, I was left staggered as there were accounts of occurrences actually taking place in the same region.

There were ancient inhabitants of the region claiming to have seen alarming evil spirits and the devil itself, dwelling there.

I realized that the place had not always been a city region as it was, many centuries ago, and it sent a chill through me as I thought what could be buried there.

There were ancient newspaper accounts of reported unexplained ancient occurrences, and one of the worst told of travelers that had come upon the remains of people left in pieces in the region by some hideous occurrence, with their remains being found scattered throughout the area, and others of people being attacked and chased by things.

I was mesmerized and my eyes for no reason fell upon something in the woman’s living room, and I recalled seeing it a few seconds earlier but had not noticed it, as I was engrossed with the accounts, and I stared at it for almost a minute trying to figure it out but was unable to form a mental image of what was there, and what I was looking at, as it had no real form, from what I saw, and in the darkness my tired unfocused eyes never allowed me to grasp what.

It was the appearance of the house that brought me to, and I stood behind the door, and I could say little, and I wondered what could happen if I revealed myself, or even turned on the light.

After going through all the things that had happened I realized that there had to be something actually there, and I realized with all the stuff I had learned I did not positively know what to do, as even with all the knowledge I had heard I did not know what it was, and I did not believe it all, and I realized my mission was to discover what was there, and proceed from there.

Going by everything that I had heard I knew it would do what it did and vanish, and I quickly glanced out, and stood staggered as it was the Santa Claus, and how I imagined him as a child, and it was startling, and also gasped in horror, as it seemed real.

I spotted a faint glowing energy around its shape, and twinkles of light, like miniature starlight, and realized it looked magical, with fantasy powers.

I was sure that I could solve the case by examining it up close!

I was sure it might be affected by things, and I could find a way of getting rid of it, and stopping it haunting the region.

I became even more fascinated, wondering what it was, as it was so realistic, and unlike any normal human I had ever seen, and as I moved closer to it I realized it detected me, and at that point I collapsed over the floor.

 

Chapter 5

 

The Deadly Encounter

 

Things seemed somehow different when I awakened, on the floor, and I studied everything about me everywhere trying to grasp what, and I watched the woman studying me sprawled across her living room floor, surprised, and she apologized, and took the blame for what had happened, and I had a bad time recalling what had happened, and strange meaningless dreams I had.

Later I recalled the moments before I collapsed repeatedly, wondering what the hell happened.

I was badly depressed all evening after it, still trying to grasp it, and not believing I had blown the end, and had not found out what it had been doing there! If only I had stayed where I had been I could have found out and have remained undiscovered, and the woman had not been able to tell me anything either.

Back at the detective agency I read through the letters again and gasped at the occurrences that had been mentioned, and still could not understand how the Santa could be mentioned as being deadly, but realized that I could have been killed if it had been.

I thought of telling Marple but I left it as I wanted to solve the case myself, and could not believe such a thing could happen on a case, as I was trapped trying to solve it and stuck with one of the strangest menaces I had heard of, and it had not occurred to any of the other investigators of it being anything, and that anything could happen with such a case! It was absurd!

I had only one thing left I could do and that was to contact the next house, next to the house, and arrange to do it over again, and this time use cameras to record it and watch it as well, and find out what the hell it did, and if it did exist to use it to contact the paranormal scientists!

I needed to give them evidence of something, as they would have to travel all the way there from Scotland.

The man in the house the Santa Claus was to arrive at welcomed me in, and told me his neighbors had told him everything, and he would allow me to set up a camera and other equipment to check it out.

Once again when it turned night I got a room on the ground floor, next to the living room, and I quickly placed a seat at the door of the bedroom and left the door partly opened, just enough to see into the living room, and entire area where I knew it would arrive, and I sat reading a book I brought with me, and I started to see sense and I wondered what it really was.

Again I realized the place had not always been a proper city region, many centuries ago, and it sent a chill through me as I thought of what could be buried away, and my eyes for no reason fell upon something in the living room, and realized it was there and I suddenly jumped back startled, and my heart leapt, and I saw its red figure shifting into the room, shifting out from nothing and the darkness of the corridor, and I activated the camera and equipment I had set up.

Even though it was dark it was identical to a Santa and I watched its strange figure move in making Santa sounds, and I realized how similar it was to a department store Santa, and I tried to grasp what it was doing!

There was something strange that I just could not grasp, and it moved and did things far differently than anyone I had seen, and I was shocked as it suddenly had a lethal appearance.

I suddenly spotted the man who owned the house on the stairs in the darkness, watching it in horror, unable to decide what to do, and I realized he could actually do something stupid and confront it, and I did not know what to do and sat stunned.

I studied its strange Santa features and tried to see if it had detected the man, and what it might do.

I watched the man realize the danger of it and become aware of its deadliness and I saw the Santa react to something, and march up to the man’s Christmas tree and remove something from its sack and place what looked like a Christmas present down.

I sensed the man would do something stupid, and he did, and he walked right up to it, and nervously stood in front of it, and gasped at what he saw there, and stood staggered with his mouth wide open, and in the darkness of the corridor what looked like two of Santa’s reindeers rushed out and attacked the man, like lions, and devoured the man and in seconds, and all that remained of him were his bones on the carpet, and the creatures rushed away, back into the darkness of the corridor and vanished, and the Santa followed, not reacting to anything, as if it was somewhere else!

 

Chapter 6

 

Paranormal Investigators

 

Outside the London hotel room, the paranormal investigators were staying in, I watched the high street below stretch out in bright sunlight into the distance, like it was in the Victorian era, and I rested against the window frame dreamily watching soldiers below looking like they were still celebrating the end of the war, and away in the distance I saw a mysterious mist shift over buildings, and saw the sun was going down.

The bedroom seemed alright. Their psychic research equipment was all over it, everywhere, and they speedily had porters bring the rest up, while they unpacked it, and examined it for breakages and other damage.

Their equipment was new and I had never seen anything like it, and new technology, and I gasped again at what their profession was, and what they could uncover if it was all authentic!

It was the occurrence at Craigmillar Road, with the metal detector, which persuaded me to have them investigate the case further, and the police had not found anything, and in all their investigations of the Santa and the killings he had committed, and nobody had been able to explain what had happened, and they were searching for a serial killer dressed as a department store Santa, which attacked people in their homes at night.

What surprised me was the Santa had not appeared after the killing and the police investigation.

It appeared all over the news, and I had to persuade Marple to keep to me on the case, but I was sure that he would change that once he had more evidence of what was happening, as the case was full of missing information, and lack of evidence, and nobody had seen the Santa enter the buildings, or had seen him outside, and there was virtually nothing on him, other than my film footage of the Santa, which had been far too dark to see properly, and had left them even more confused, and they could not work out what had happened and what had devoured the man so quickly and left only his bones.

The paranormal investigators only seemed confused about why it was a Santa, and believed it was of paranormal origins, by my description of the creatures appearance, which even Marple was left stumped, especially after he had examined the bones, as nothing on the Earth could have devoured him so fast and completely, leaving nothing but bones.

I had no idea what it was or what we were getting ourselves involved in, and what it was leading to, and in the end I started to leave the case to the paranormal scientists and the police to solve.

I had continuously read through the documents on the case, and what the police had found, and found little, and I could barely make anything out.

The documents were virtual missing everything that said anything about anything!

It suggested to the paranormal scientists that it could be something new, and they agreed that it could be, or some lost ancient thing, and I was left confused by why the paranormal investigators were so interested in it in the end, as they said little, and I still consistently tried to fully grasp what they normally did.

Again I wondered if we were actually there to search for it or something else and again I never believed it was what they claimed, and supernatural.

Everything I had encountered seemed to have been proven to have something not supernatural behind it, and I kept on going on the side of Marple, and his views, as there was nothing to back up the claim, accept something unknown, which could even have been deliberately put there to do something, and trick people and the police.

In the end I became far more interested in the case, and wanted the answer to what had happened.

The sky darkened outside and I wondered what the hell the conclusion to it would be this time.

I shivered, and I looked at the night sky approaching and snowflakes started floating down, and I watched Higgins react to it and ignore it.

I was sure if it remained the way it was it might ruin the case and investigation, as whatever it was might not turn up, and my thirst for knowledge grew and I knew I had to find something.

 

Chapter 7

 

The Scientists Convention

 

Media from all over the globe arrived at the annual conference of the exploration association in London, as we watched on, and I realized immediately the paranormal scientists, who had taken me there, had given them information of an occurrence, which left me confused, as all we had was the killer Santa investigation, which added up to little, and I wondered what they had told them.

Even though the occurrences that had already taken place had become well known and documented, and was on all the newspapers, and many other media sources, with a major police investigation.

Most of the scientists and explorers of the exploration association were packed together in the large hall.

The scientists knew me from our passed investigations of the Loch Ness monster and of the discovery under Craigmillar Road, which were surely the largest uncovered, in decades at least, and I wondered what they thought of the Santa investigation, and I found they were mainly giving updates on it and us and what we had found out.

I recalled everything that had happened and our explorations of the cavity we found, where the object was under the area of land beside the loch, and our use of divers to investigate the loch about the cavity and the entrance, and their filming of its interior, which was startling, and had many signs of the monster having been living there, and the remains of food it had eaten, including fish, sharks, and skeletons of cattle.

I soon realized they were not interested in the Loch Ness discover and were interested in what many of them had witnessed us uncovering in the cavity under Craigmillar Road, and were still waiting for the conclusion to the investigations by their scientists.

It was surprising that the exploration association was primarily unknown and the media still gave little about the group, and its accomplishments. Even though many of their scientists and explorers had their explorations and adventures in the media over decades, including many famous and foremost scientists from about the globe!

I recalled how their scientists had helped us out in our investigations, and that they had many scientists, leading scientists, and the latest and foremost in technology, and vast amounts of information, including unknown findings, and documentation, from about the globe.

 

Chapter 8

 

The Manifestation

 

I could not grasp what would happen, as everything needed to solve the case was missing, and Marple forced me into going further, and ordered me to solve it as quickly as possible.

I realized he had read my report on what had happened and had entirely missed what had occurred and what I meant, and I could not explain any further anything of what had happened and he now never seemed to think anything strange had happened, and I realized again that even though he had a great interest in investigating the paranormal he never believed it, and consistently explained it away, with logical solutions!

Though we identified another Santa appearance at a nearby street, which was in an identical street to the other street, in a line of the houses behind the houses, and it was in the same house in the street it would have visited in the other street, and I identified the house next to it as the next house it would visit.

The woman owner let the paranormal investigators set up their paranormal equipment there, with scientists and equipment from scientists from the exploration association.

The elderly woman was delighted to see so many scientists and important people, and cameras documenting it, in her house.

Paranormal scientists and technicians rushed back and forward setting up their new equipment all over the woman’s living room, and outer hall where it had emerged in the other houses, while Oswald and Higgins checked everything.

I watched on, and watched the woman leave to go to bed smiling, joyously listening to the scientists at work.

They gave me the impression that they might be going to do something tremendous or come to a conclusion, and that they might well have found the right location to do it.

I later started to realize the implications, and recalled what had happened to me the last time, and how deadly it was, and I realized that they might find something of immense deadly supernatural origins, of great danger to everyone there!

Yet I realized the scientists did realize it and intended to carry out their research safely, and they started hiding all their equipment away, so it would not be seen!

I regularly examined the equipment they now had and was surprised at how advanced it had become, and at its capabilities, and I wondered how they could make a profit to pay for it, and realized it had to be funded.

Their visit there was clearly giving them far more of an insight and knowledge of things than I realized, and they had gained a great deal of information from their earlier questioning of witnesses of the occurrences in the other houses.

I was becoming positive that they had found far more than they indicated, and were keeping secrets.

I wanted to grasp what they all knew that I should know, and I regularly strolled about examining the equipment for clues, and recalled something that I had forgotten, which I had read, about some of the work that the paranormal scientists had done years ago, after they had given facts on their paranormal investigations.

I recalled their stuff had been surprising, and even alarming, which had drawn my attention at the time, and I recalled that I had dismissed it later as them using it to advertise their work!

At times I thought they had been deliberately putting the psychic research there to cover their real work and discoveries! Whatever that was!

The scientists informed me that they were checking for virtually all known forms of disturbance, energy and matter disturbances, in and around the emergence region and they were sure that they could find something!

There was something strange, and I felt as though there was something going to happen, but I could not grasp what, and I was sure I might not have encountered it before, even though I had seen the Santa and what it did, and I listened to all the scientists at work and their low level conversations.

Suddenly, in the darkness, in their hidden away positions in an outer room, at the side of the living room, they detected a reaction and that something was making an appearance, and they all went silent, and I checked my watch and realized it was around about the same time as the last visitations, and I realized how late it was, and how sleepy I was, and watched the scientists at work, silently checking stuff on their equipment about the zone, and building, and one whispered something in Higgins’s ear, making him look slightly surprised.

Higgins’s face turned dramatic, making me wonder what the hell was going to happen, and if I had put my foot in it again, and I stood staggered waiting for something to happen, and I even regretted bringing them there, and I saw he was desperate to do something, and he rushed over to two scientists.

I decided to remain with Oswald near the door, as I had to know what was there – and if something was going to happen – and we could not get anything from the equipment.

I was surprised to see someone look out the curtains and see drifting currents of snowflakes blow about outside, and it starting to deepen, with gusts blowing about the building, and I wondered if it affected the Santa appearance or if it had affected it, and realized it surely was the timing of the appearance, and that the weather occasionally reacted at specific times, and positions of the sun, and temperature.

It had been a long day, and the next day could very well be far longer, and I watched Higgins rush about doing something and I wondered what I was missing, and if we should slow down and observe it at a greater distance first, as the occurrence would surely take place at another house, and it was surely not our last chance to get hold of something.

The bright snowing sky seemed to darken and the temperature dropped, and I pointed it out to Oswald, as heavy snow came down all about the area.

I checked a thermometer and realized that there had been accounts of drops in temperature before and during manifestations and I wondered if it had been so powerful that it had affected the weather about us.

While the others were at work I placed a seat at the door of the room and left the door slightly opened, just enough to see into the living room, and entire area where I knew it would arrive, and I wondered why it was late, and if something else could appear, of great danger to us, and I sat looking out, startled.

I slowly started to sense something was there, and it sent a chill through me as I thought of what it could do, and my eyes for no reason fell upon something in the living room and I realized it was there all along and I suddenly jumped back startled, and my heart leapt, and I saw its dark red figure shifting about in the room, and I watched a scientist activate a special camera, and equipment, which I had seen him set up earlier!

Even though it was dark it looked identical to Santa, and I watched its strange figure move making Santa sounds, and I realized it was similar to a department store Santa, and I thought I saw it had bright red eyes, and I tried to grasp what it was and was doing there!

There was something strange that I just could not grasp, and it moved and did things far differently than anyone or anything I had seen, and I was shocked at its now lethal appearance. It was like there was something there that should not be there!

Suddenly I spotted the woman who owned the house on the stairs in the darkness, glancing into the darkness of the living room, watching it in horror, unable to decide what to do, and I realized she might actually do something foolish, and confront it, and I did not know what to do and sat stunned, and thought of the death of the man the last time.

I studied its strange Santa features, and saw nothing, and tried to see if it had detected her, and what it might do.

I had to do something so I did and rushed out the door silently, and closed the door shut behind me, seeing nobody in the room had seen me leave, and entered a dark hidden area at the side of the living room, out of its view, and showed myself to her, and used gestures, and pointed, to get to her to go back up the stairs.

I watched her realize its deadliest and start to move back up the stairs, and saw the Santa react to something, and it march up to the her Christmas tree and remove something from its sack and place something there, which in the other houses we had discovered identical objects to things that were at Christmas trees, with cards with people’s names on them from the other houses, which proved it had not detected what it was copying or had bothered altering it.

For a second I visualized being out in a starless expanse of space, and wondered what it was, and if I had actually seen it, and if I was falling asleep, and its hideous Santa shape shifted, ready to do something, and a dull red radiance gleamed about it, illuminating its hideous devilish face, which I was positive was the devil itself, using it to cover its identity.

I glared at its unmoving silhouette in shock, studying it, wondering what was there, and if all the ghost stories I had heard through my life were false, and they were something else entirely.

The deep blackness about me was so vivid and things so real and unreal, and alive, I felt deep horror, and thought of what I had so far encountered and my original thoughts of it.

For an instant the thing in front of me altered in form, and I saw a demon energy formation, and stood staggered, wondering what it was, and what it intended to do, and how I should handle it!

What strange place had it come from? Did reality actually exist there? Was it actually something entirely different from anything we had encountered?

The being/entity seemed to do nothing, other than transforming itself, and I saw strange ghostly images of what could have been life forms flash through my mind.

When I examined its dark almost invisible Santa costume I saw it was not actually solid but translucent, and had only a faint shadow from it over the carpet, while its interior seemed composed of swirling currents of energy mist, and its shape was not touching the floor, and was floating over it, and I realized it was as if it was not there but somewhere else, and reacting to the surroundings somewhere else.

I was sure that I could solve the case by examining it and finding something! I was sure it might be affected by things, and I could find a way of getting rid of it, and stopping it haunting the region, and I became even more fascinated, and I moved up close to it, behind it, and examined its ghostly demon features.

I tried to grasp everything about it, which I could recognize, and wondered what all the scientists of the world would think of the thing, and would do to see and examine it.

What would the paranormal scientists consider it? I could not get anything, and up close it mainly looked like a mass of strange red energy being generated by something, from somewhere, and to my amazement it exploded into a frenzy of activity, and I realized it had detected me, and at that point I fell over unconscious.

 

Chapter 9

 

The Breakthrough

 

I could not grasp what happened, as my head was spinning, and everything I needed to solve the case was missing, and the scientists were all rushing around doing things I could not grasp, but I recognized by their reactions that they were happy with many of the results, but disappointed with some.

After the disappearance of the Santa and occurrences Oswald had gone and searched for me and had found me sprawled across the floor under the Christmas tree, and I grasped at how lucky I had been to survive what had happened, and it was incredible that they barely even realized what had happened and what I had seen.

The woman gave me cups of coffee and apologized for what had happened, and she was glad to hear from one of the scientists that it would not appear there again, and she was surprised that it had left her a Christmas gift, which confused me, as I recalled what I had seen, and the killings that had occurred.

I realized I had to report what had happened and had entirely missed what had occurred afterwards, and I realized I could say little that Marple would believe, and he would be left disappointed, and I realized that I better get facts from the scientists to give him, and so he would know what I meant, and I realized again that even though he had no beliefs in the existence of ghosts and the supernatural he had a great interest in investigating the paranormal, and liked consistently explaining it away with logical solutions!

After I finished getting what I could I was glad to finally leave the place and return to the headquarters of Reality Investigations, where Marple rushed in and got me a drink and placed it in front of me and stood at the fireplace.

It was incredible! Marple looked more baffled than I had seen him, in a long time, and I then realized we could have problems!

The serial killer Santa was still on the rampage, and all over the media, and the police wanted the culprit, and they still never had any clues to who he was, or anything about him, and they wanted Marple to solve the case, and not only was the sum of money for solving it incredible he would get the fame and prestige he wanted, in London, and at his new headquarters, and he could become a major investigator, and solve the unsolvable case, and its insolvability was a major factor that kept teasing him, and he seemed partly obsessed with it now, and all his investigators and connections were virtually on the case, checking for anything, and any remote clues.

It amazed him what had happened, when I finally told him some things, and that we had predicted its appearance and had not had the police there to capture him, and I was left staggered, and wondered what would have happened, and was at a loss of what to say, as he clearly never believed it was anything other than the serial killer, and I realized it could be a future massacre.

Eventually Marple grew tired of the lack of evidence, and eventually asked me, “What did their research uncover?”

“Not much!” I moaned.

“Even with all the scientists and all their equipment?”

“They are still accumulating their findings …”

The phone rang out and I answered it as I was the closest to it and was surprised it was the scientists still at work back at the house, who had finished their work there, and had packed away their equipment and were getting ready to leave, and the scientist on the phone put Oswald on the phone.

It staggered me what he then said, and I was surprised that they had collected large amounts of strange readings, which they were at the moment unable to grasp, and had detected a lot of energy and things that they had never heard of, and were also left baffled as paranormal scientists, and they had traced the Santa’s appearance, and emergence out of nowhere, but had found little on how it had appeared there, and its disappearance was just as strange, and was as though it had vanished off the face of the world, and they had detected strange things on its encounter with me, and it seemed to have done something, and had done some form of analyze of me, and its behavior had altered, and it had stopped what it had been doing and had left there, just after I had collapsed, and some of the scientists thought it had detected presence of their equipment at the same time.

I had been unable to explain what he had said to Marple, and asked him to explain everything to Marple instead, as his interest in what was occurring was increasing, and I handed the phone over to him, looking confused about it.

After ten minutes of listening to him and Oswald talking, and other scientists there being put on the line, he stood looking confused and put the phone down.

After sitting at the fireplace silently for a long time I finally asked what he had told him, and to see if I had missed anything.

“There seems to be far more to this case than meets the eye!” he finally moaned, and also seemed to like it, and the challenge of dealing with something new, and deadly, with such a challenge.

“What do you make of it?” I replied, curiously.

“They still seem to believe it’s of a supernatural nature!” he replied calmly, and sat back into his seat. “Well, they backed up their findings with a great deal of readings, findings, and have gone to a great deal of trouble exploring what they believe is there! And the most fascinating findings are their photographs and film footage taken of it, which they are sending someone over here with, which if I am not mistaken will give us a great deal of information on the Santa killer, and what we might be able to give to the police and media!”

I was surprised, and I sensed he was holding something back from me and asked if they had found anything else, and I recalled I had heard them give him something at the end of the conversation, which they had just discovered.

“They seem to have discovered how he entered and left the building! They detected that he left there by going under the building! By some new method, which they have not yet been able to discover …”

I was left confused, staggered, and wished I had remained on the phone, and wondered what he meant! Or they meant! And I could not grasp how it emerged and left going below the ground, and what he thought it was, as I had seen its appearance, and the reindeer creatures emergence the last time, and was positive that it had not just went under the floor, and wondered what the scientists had discovered, and in the end decided to wait and question Oswald.

 

Chapter 10

 

The Ancient Visitation

 

McMurdo’s pale complexion and shaken appearance showed he had encountered something beyond his comprehension, of an immensely deadly diabolical nature, and he shook in terror, barely able to speak, and looked gravely ill.

I strained my eyes to see him in the dimness of the underground train tunnel, near London Bridge, beside the underground Roman cavity they had just uncovered in the side of the tunnel, which he had just climbed out!

“What did you see down there?” I gasped, in horror, at what he had suggested existed.

“I saw its face!” he muttered. “It’s hideous! Its existence goes back far further than humans, and far beyond! It’s trapped down there somewhere!”

I stood frigid and staggered at the danger, and started to comprehend what we were up against, and had been missing!

I wondered what could be powerful enough to trap it, and if there was even anything in existence to free it!

“Its origins go beyond humans, and the Romans who settled here, and has been dormant, waiting to be revived, and uncovered, and has remained undetected by our technology!”

He continued, biting his lower lip hard, “Our detection methods are far inferior and are mainly created and function to discover normal objects, and even normal unidentified objects, and our investigations of it are futile!”

I sat frigid, realizing the mistake we had made and what the outcome of what was occurring could be, and by trying to handle something of its nature, which could categorically kill us all!

“Some scientists found traces of it though, which were kept confidential – while they tried to locate and investigate it!”

“It must be incredible!” I answered firmly. “It must have been tremendous! What made it come to this place, in the first place?”

“Nobody knows! Perhaps there’s something here, which it came to investigate! If it was far less dormant it might have been located by some means! It is powerful!”

I was amazed that he thought it could have some form of powerful presence, and I believed it was supposed to be entirely supernatural, and was sure I was destined to discover its existence, and full potential, and believed it could be buried away below us, below the cavity, unearthed by them, working there, and I detected he had been up to something when he discovered its existence.

Deep down I thought McMurdo had barely survived, and seemed to believe he could be killed in some hideous way!

It was lucky Marple had not been able to get hold of the archaeologists to investigate his accounts of the lost treasure, and Roman map he had found, as they were working on another project, but I knew they soon would, and that we could not do anything about it, and I thanked him for warning me.

In the ground below my feet I was surprised to see an object, which I saw was a Roman coin, and I grabbed it and cleaned dirt away from it, in the dim light, and I entered further into the massive cavity in the side of the tunnel wall, and looked down into the large hole there, going deep below, and into the hideous cavity, and wondered why in the hell it was there, and why the railway company had not filled it in, but I knew they would once they had completed the rest of the railway line, and it could be buried away for future explorers to uncover.

I recalled the other incident we had investigated, at Battlefield Road, and after all the observations, research, and by leading scientists, scientists admitted that the thing found in the woman’s house we investigated had unknown origins, mainly by its appearance and tremendous unrecognized powers! Although they still had a lot of work and investigations to carry out, and had found little, and they were trying to keep it confidential!

“We have to investigate it!” McMurdo warned. “The future of the world could be at stake? If the wrong people get hold of it …”

“We should investigate it!” I agreed, recalling a newspaper article. “There may soon be many more constructions being built around here! They’re building far more constructions now … We have to get anything we can on it – and as much information on it and its origins …”

“There’s little! That’s been found! It’s mainly in ancient lost legends, which show its hideous features – and that of the devil!”

I was left confused at what information he had discovered, and stated, “If it has a physical presence we could discover something new about it – and it would be worthwhile to investigate!”

McMurdo gasped, in horror, still badly shaken from his confrontation with it, and replied, “I never thought I would live to see it and survive!”

 

Chapter 11

 

The Lost Cavity

 

After a week the descriptions McMurdo gave were unbelievable and I could not believe I was exploring the cavity, on my own, with the scientists and archeologists above, with me on the end of a rope, daggling in hideous deep blackness.

It was too unacceptable for me to fully believe McMurdo’s accounts, and I left it at that, and believed I could survive, if I watched what I did, and believed there were great dangers lurking in the cavity below, and I recalled being surprised by him showing me an ancient almost incomprehensive account that specified that the location was the resting place of something hideously wicked, buried away there.

I conjured up vague visions of a spooky medieval haunted torture chamber and ancient dungeon below.

A distant rumble shook the surrounding area, from a distant train, releasing small debris and dust from overhead, and vibrated through the rope.

Marple arrived above and appeared over the edge of the hole, with his face examining what he could see of me, over the abyss below, and I knew he would be considering a different method of getting the archeologists, scientists, and equipment down.

In seconds the rope wildly jerked and I went downwards, and the faces above vanished into the swirling dark, as I spun uncontrollably around, and a surge of blackness engulfed me, like falling into a black hole.

When it slowed I was left in nothingness, and the hole above became a spot of light, which gave little light down to me, and I realized how deep it was, with confusion, and I gasped at what McMurdo had been through, and that he had arrived there on his own, with little knowledge of anything.

A white radiance blasted down from Marple’s torch and it shifted to specific calculated positions, illuminating a dreamy sight above me, showing the hidden cavity walls, and I gasped at its immensity and the danger of it collapsing down, and wondered how dangerous it was, and realized that at least the railway line was not over it, and it was over solid ground.

As my eyes adjusted to the dim light above I watched it probing its way about, scattering beams through clouds of silky dust; and it occasionally blew near me, and I continued on down, inhaling in enough air.

At the bottom of the shaft I was again left in darkness, and released the rope from me and dropped down onto the ground, and tried seeing about me in the dim light, and sensed something buried deep in its depths.

There seemed to be rubble everywhere, and boulders, some firmly fitted together in the ground, and I stood saying nothing, and watched Marple above checking what he had.

What the hell was the cavity? It never looked like an artificial structure, and I wondered how it was formed, and examined rocks at my feet, and I knew it had to have been something as McMurdo would not have been wrong, and I shivered seeing its deep dark regions, where anything could exist.

I wondered if McMurdo had fully reported it to the train company, as if the whole surrounding area collapsed down, and other areas like it there, they should think of filling them in.

By Marple’s frantic reactions, as he attached the rope and got ready to come down, I sensed that he might have found something, and I knew we might find something, and realized that we must be under streets I knew above the railway tunnel and I tried to work out the exact location.

It was strange as there had to be something deadly there and I could not grasp what and where, and tried going over what McMurdo had said, and I realized he had hardly said anything, and I wondered how I would get back up to the top, and I watched Marple come down and knew he had something, and was not saying anything at the moment, but I could not quite grasp what.

I wondered why someone would want to go to such lengths to build the cavity, and realized it had to be a natural cavity, and I started exploring an area nearby.

Water dripped down from somewhere overhead and I cleaned it from my face, and whished I had taken down the torch they had, but it would have left them all in darkness, but in my pocket I had matches if I needed them, and lit one to see if I could see anything, but it was too faint, and I saw a cloud of dust spraying down, and I covered my eyes.

While I walked away I listened to vague hollow surges come down from above, and I caught glimpses of people watching me in the hole above, while Marple came down below them.

At the front of me I saw the cavity wall and mechanically tried to place my hand against an area of it, trying to feel what I could not see.

I expected to find stone but all I found were thicker webs, covering something, where an area of stone had crumbled down and collapsed over the ground.

As I shifted forward a flicker of dim light overhead grabbed my attention and I felt thick cobwebs crawling over my face and hands, and I heard murmurs of archaeologists, excited about coming down, and I wondered what we were doing there.

I felt about, still unable to grasp anything, desperate to get answers, and find something, before the others got down, and I felt jagged rocks under my shoes, and further along felt rocks pile up across my front; and I blindly touched shapes, embedded in others, and felt something strange directly ahead, and jerked my hand away, realizing it was some form of deadly life form.

 

Chapter 12

 

The Hidden Chamber

 

The visitations by the Santa formation stopped after the encounter and I returned to the cavity to check how the archeologists were getting on, and what they had discovered.

While climbing down their rope ladder to the bottom I was surprised at the difference there, and the amount of archaeologists and scientists now below, and the place with so many powerful lights, and I examined the size of the cables going down below, and watched them all over the cavity animatedly working, not just doing normal work, but digging out ancient things, and examining small discoveries.

They had dug away massive chunks of the ground, deep into the ground, with powerful drills and other equipment, and I was fascinated by the dead creature and its remains I found there, which nobody had yet recognized, and I knew it was too ancient and decomposed, with little to identify it, but I knew it was something different, of unknown origins.

I knew they had to be onto something big, and tried to see what, and I then examined them for people I knew, and to see what they were doing.

Near the bottom I realized how big the cavity actually was, with some surprise, and wondered why it was not in danger of collapsing, and examined it for anything they might have used to reinforce it to prevent it occurring.

There were many scientists, of especially from the exploration association, and they were everywhere examining and setting up equipment, with archeologists excitedly excavating large and small regions, and I climbed onto the ground and examined equipment nearby for clues to what was generally happening, and I recalled reading about some of their work in a science magazine, and I watched Oswald and Higgins at work, and sensed they had recently had a discovery or major discovery.

Their determination was roaring and unbelievable and they had proven there were occurrences centered there, and they had brought in all the scientists, paranormal scientists, and members of the exploration association, and I realized it was their biggest discovery, and that it was perhaps their greatest chance to prove the existence of theories to the world, and science world.

It was incredible as when they realized they never had all the evidence they needed they withdrew telling me anything, which was a major factor of why they never told much.

What was there confused me, and when I thought of McMurdo I was left astounded, and it sent a deep chill through me, as I thought of what it could do.

I recalled our investigating the killer Santa in the woman’s living room, when they were monitoring it with their equipment, and I recalled seeing it in the living room, and realized it was there, and jumped back startled, and my heart leapt, and saw its dark red figure shifting into the room, which shifted out of nothing and the darkness of the corridor, and I watched a scientist activate cameras and equipment, he had been adjusting.

I suddenly recalled all the data they had collected, and wondered if they had found anything from it since, and asked Oswald about it and he nodded that they had.

“Did you get a proper photo of it?” I quickly asked, wondering why they had not sent a photo, for us to use to identify it, and give the police to identify it.

“Okay!” he replied, and searched through his case and looked through a group of photos, and eventually handed me one, to my surprise, and I stood with my mouth open.

The photo was unbelievable as in my recollections of it I only saw energy formations, and I wondered if I had imagined it now.

“When was this one taken?” I asked, curiously.

“Just before it left!”

“Have you any earlier ones?”

“Not any longer! I eventually threw them away! They showed little, and no face or anything could be seen! Including on all the stuff we got!”

I studied the photo again, and tried to realize what it looked like again, and held it away from me, and again realized it looked like an ancient drawing I had once seen of the devil, and gasped when I recalled what McMurdo had said.

What confused me was if it was evil, or doing something else, and why it had killed people it had visited, including the boy, and had left his bones.

Even though it was dark it looked like Santa when I had seen it, and I had watched its strange figure move and make sounds like Santa, and I realized again how similar it was to a department store Santa, and I tried to grasp what it was doing there!

There was something strange I just could not grasp, from everything it did, and how it had moved and did things far differently than anyone or anything I had seen, and I was shocked at how lethal its appearance was. It was like there was something there that should not be there!

I stared at where the scientists were at work, as a distant train rumbled away in the distance, and shook the roof slightly, and dust blew about from it.

“Did you get anything else about it?” I asked, curiously.

“Yes! As we told Marple! We discovered it was transmitted there!”

“What?” I gasped, wondering what he meant.

“We discovered something else later!” he continued, walking away. “It was transmitted there from somewhere underground!”

I was left confused, wondering what he had meant, and if they had proven what they had found.

 

Chapter 13

 

The Press Conference

 

When I arrived back there a few days later I was surprised to see reporters from a major newspaper in the train tunnel, and entering the cavity, and I saw the entrance into the cavity had been increased in size, and had been fitted with a cable elevator.

From above I saw people from the media, from all over the globe, and they were holding a press conference, and members of the exploration association and other scientists were giving them details of an important discovery, and I gasped and wondered what had happened to the deadly occurrences there, and looked about to see any signs of it, and was surprised to see Oswald looking worried about something, and knew it had to be something new!

For some reason I hesitated about going down, and wanted to see what happened from there, where I could see everything.

I realized the scientists had given them information of an occurrence, which left me moderately confused, as all we had was their investigation, and the remains of human sacrifices discovered there, and skeletons embedded in the ground all over it, and small amount of discoveries the archaeologists and scientists had made.

Even though I was sure they had been hiding stuff, and from one another, which I was sure was only temporary, until they fully uncovered all of what they discovered, which added up to little the last time I had been there.

I sat back and listened below, while I examined the elevator they had cleverly constructed, and was amazed to hear someone shouting, and I immediately looked below and saw someone grab a microphone off one of them and start shouting into it.

I examined him and realized it was McMurdo, and he was slightly disguised, and had a large jacket with a hood covering him, and removed it and showed them his identity, and they all looked at him strangely, wondering who he was, and I wondered what he believed he was doing or if he was genuinely hiding from someone, and I wondered why.

Then I realized his face still had a pale complexion and he was still badly shaken by his encounter, showing he had encountered something beyond his comprehension of an immensely deadly diabolical nature, and he shook and shuddered in terror, and was barely able to speak at times, and looking seriously ill, and the audience surrounding him was silenced by him, and stood staggered, waiting for something to happen.

It was incredible! It was building up to something, and I never had a clue what!

Suddenly I realized the lighting had dimmed, and I realized it had to be the power supply, and the dimness.

Was he now crazy? Was he doing something else now?

“Down there is something so deadly it could destroy mankind!” he shouted, and shuddered. “It’s been there from the dawn of time, waiting to be revived …”

“What did you see down there?” a reporter gasped, in horror, at what he was suggesting existed, and the deadliness of the place.

“I saw its face!” he muttered. “It’s hideous! Its existence goes back far further than the human race, and far beyond it! It’s trapped down there …!”

They stood frigid and staggered at the danger, and started to comprehend what they might have been missing, and some of them had been suggesting!

A woman screamed and shouted something, silencing everyone completely, and pointed at something, in an area of darkness.

I wondered what the hell it was, and stood staring there, and was staggered had how powerful it could be, and if they had freed it from its imprisonment!

McMurdo screamed out, “The Romans who settled here worshipped it as a god down here! It was dormant, waiting to be revived, and has remained undetected by our modern sources …”

I knelt down, realizing the mistake we could have been making, and what the outcome of what was occurring could be, and by trying to handle something of its nature, which could categorically destroy everything!

What if such things as gods and demon gods had existed, and were dormant, and could be revived!

Suddenly the ground shook violently, and boulders fell from the cavity wall, and everyone started trying to escape, and I sat watching on amazed, and was amazed it had a form of powerful presence, and I believed something was buried away below, and I detected that McMurdo had found something, which they had not, and I thought they were getting close to discovering it!

 

Chapter 14

 

The Roman Remains

 

When I arrived back there with Marple a few days later I was surprised all the archeologists were at work down in the cavity, working away as though nothing had happened, and I recalled what had happened and the whole of the media had come out with, and the story had changed to it being an earthquake.

It amused me to see a few reporters with startled appearances appear behind us, in the train tunnel, and check down in the cavity, confirming what had happened no longer existed, and leave, and we entered the elevator and went down into the cavity.

Below I saw archeologists and scientists energetically working away, and that the media had gone, and I wondered if they would dare hold a press conference there again.

Members of the exploration association and other scientists were discussing something important, directly below, and I followed Marple’s staring eyes and realized what they were up to, and I gasped and thought of the deadly occurrences there and looked about to see any signs of it and was surprised to see Oswald at the site, instructing archeologists digging out objects, and I knew it had to be something new and big!

For some reason I hesitated about it when I got out the elevator, and sensed danger, and saw damaged done by the earthquake, but I really wanted to see what would happen, and what was there, and a conclusion to everything.

McMurdo’s words went through my mind as I approached Oswald, and left Marple, who went to investigate something else.

Could the future of this world be at stake from something, and was there such things that could destroy mankind?

I realized the train company would now extend how long they could work there, when they finished the train line, as the publicity it was getting was incredible, and the archeologist dig was important.

It was fascinating as the archeologists were digging up Roman graves, and some were as perfectly preserved as they could be, and I saw all the fascinated onlookers about them, and not just because what was occurring there but because they were far better than virtually anything I had seen being discovered in London.

It was incredible when I arrived at where Oswald was I sensed I had timed it perfectly for something, and I also realized that all their communications to the outer world had vanished, as the archeologists dug deep into the central point of the cavity, and scientists moved expensive and fragile equipment into the area.

What was incredible was even with all the technology and experience of the scientists, and all their discussions, nobody knew what they had found, and the theories gave too little or were too fantastic, and too far from the truth to believe and be true, but the main discover was there was something else below, beneath the graves, and the archeologists were close to finding it, and I for one thought someone had for some reason never wanted it to be found, and it was hidden away under the graves.

It was incredible someone had put the graves over something, and I wondered why people of that era would do it, and I started seeing carved drawings of a Roman god in most of the graves.

 

Chapter 15

 

The Monster

 

We all stood staring in disbelief as an archeologist dug away the muck from what we believed was a Roman statue, and another began washing away the muck from its massive head, embedded in the ground below a grave, and the amazing lifelike features of something strange became visible.

It was the head of some strange life form, which features seemed in perfectly preserved condition, and I actually checked if it moved, as it was so lifelike, and the more muck they removed the more confused the scientists and archeologists became, and nobody had seen the likes of it before.

In the hollow silence, from the now silenced surrounding cavity, they dug it out, with archeologists trying not to damage it, and I wondered if they could, as my close examinations of its surface showed it had a far harder surface than normal, and I listened to two scientists behind me breathing gently and giving small details about it, occasionally glaring at the giant creature’s head shocked, especially after what occurred there days before.

It never seemed to have any form of mouth or eyes, and its strange blood red color shined as though it were wet.

“Is this prehistoric?” an archeologist finally asked a scientist, confused, as he finished cleaning a region, and the scientists stood staggered, and shrugged his shoulders.

“It cannot be prehistoric …?” he continued, looking about, waiting for someone to reply.

I watched everyone, and they refused to reply, and insisted in staying silent, and perhaps waiting for more evidence.

It was strange as we were expecting something like a statue, which they would have given information about, as they had with the above Roman graves, and we were standing looking down into a pit at what we would not even expect the strangest sea creature to look like, and could not identify anything, as it became more and more uncovered, and I watched the archaeologists, and them studying it, and take photographs of it at various angles, and close ups, and one removed his glove and touched it, and jumped back grasping his hand in pain.

 

Chapter 16

 

The Underground Scan

 

As I watched the scientists setting up their scanning equipment, I asked Oswald, “Is this the new surveying equipment?”

“Correct!” he moaned, at being disturbed. “We persuaded them to remove it from the airplane and bring it here! It’s the most powerful version we have available …”

“You may be able to answer many unanswered questions if it works!” I replied, assumingly.

“We can check what’s under here! Perhaps work out what caused the earthquake! It can scan more accurately, deeper and faster, and more powerfully than anything we have, and has been vastly improved since its use at Loch Ness! The detection components are still confidential, and used by the military …”

“Top secret!” I replied, wondering how confidential it was.

“It will give us the most detailed scan of beneath the ground ever seen, and to a far greater depth, making it possible to observe small and large objects just below us – of the dimensions we are interested in, and going further! As we do not know what is directly below!”

I realized again what an airplane with it could discover, and wondered if they actually had many underground military bases and weapons, and if they could detect what was in the places, and even in normal bases, and if they could search below mountains and deep under the sea, and I realized the other scientists avoided saying anything, and the majority of people with them never even knew what it was or was happening, and that some of the scientists there had been military scientists.

The equipment system was tested and functioning and ready to monitor everything below the cavity, after all the time getting the stuff down from above and all their rigorous setting up of it, and its electric cables, and all their preparations.

I considered if they were exaggerating its powers, as the times I had seen it working it had given short distant scans, and I wondered if it was actually to hide its true incredible powers as much as possible, and it being highly confidential equipment!

I realized the dangers of it being activated and what was there detecting it, and what had occurred there, and wondered if it could kill us!

The whole exploration was daunting and I wondered what we would actually gain from it at the end of the day, and most of the people there surely would not profit, and would perhaps only get the chance to witness some historic occurrence, and I wondered what we would be marked in history for.

I regularly checked the archeologists and scientists about the cavity looking for any new discoveries, and new life forms.

What surprised me was the life forms we found, and thing that had stunned one of the archeologists when he touched it with his bare hands.

All the life forms were still partially uncovered, and still remained totally unidentified, and looked like mutants of some unknown life forms, which lived in some strange environment, which nobody could identify, and I started to wonder if they were original forms of life from the original Earth or something similar.

We still had little information on them, and nobody had come up with anything, or explanation of where they had come from, and why they were below the Roman graves.

What surprised me was their firm belief that there was something there! The others barely believed it though! They had had not found anything though!

Were they keeping something secret? Had they detected something? Had they known of something before the occurrence there, and were investigating it for the first time? They had hardly come up with anything, and I believed from what I had seen that they could not remove some of the life forms for some reason, and they seemed attached to something, covering an immense area below, and all their attempts were useless, and the scan was to show what was below.

I started to wonder what was happening, and if I would survive!

Oswald and Higgins sat along from the other scientists at a large table, in center of the cavity, sitting opposite each other, with an accurate map of the surrounding region above stretched out across it sideways, and one of the cavity, and they discussed searching the cavity, and it was strange as there never looked as though there was anything there, especially under such a public and populated place, and going by recent information they got from questioning locals above, for paranormal occurrences.

I felt I was missing something and believed they did too, but could not grasp it!

Marple surprised me and refused to give any information on what he thought the life forms were, and fascinated in them, like the other scientists, especially in their perfectly preserved state, which seemed due to the energy running through them, and its source still had not been found, and they were starting to find they could dig through certain areas of the ground below them near them, and the life forms themselves seemed to be in the same state, and most believed it had preserved them, whatever it was.

When something did occur it was when they started activating the scanning equipment in stages, and the reactions they gave were unbelievable, and I realized how late in the evening it had become, and realized it was dark outside, and it would be soon night!

Their screens started showing strange reactions that they could not comprehend, as though there was something not working properly, and they could not grasp what it was, and what they received was too vague, with insignificant reactions, which could be anything being detected, and something nearby could be creating disturbances.

They had not fully checked the equipment’s reactions to everything, even though the original version had been tested out for years, and they were sure that things could create reactions. The equipment was far more sensitive at detection than ever before, and had been modified just before its arrival, especially for working there.

Suddenly one of the screens on the equipment reacted, and the scientists all went around it, and they all started excitedly discussing what they thought of it, and what could cause such a disturbance, and I saw that many were disappointed, but thought there was definitely something there, and I waited to find out what they had and if it would be a disappointment!

Yet they realized what they were receiving was scrambled images, from some interference, and the images were badly blurred, and they argued over what it could be.

They adjusted the equipment and image they got and they started getting a better image of the region below, and they no longer checked for equipment problems, and they gradually perceived there was nothing visible below, and they began their search of everything, in a greater degree than every before, as they knew something was there!

 

Chapter 17

 

The Roman Treasure

 

Marple arrived and I watched him again wondering what he was doing, and I sensed he was up to something, and when I attempted to leave with the archeologists and scientists he kept me doing things for him, and when there were only a few archeologists left, at the other side of the cavity we sat at a central table, where he removed a folder out his case.

Marple looked more confident than I had seen him in a long time and I wondered why as all our scans had showed nothing, and many of the others lost confidence in finding anything, and I sensed he wanted me there to tell me of his search for the treasure, and I confirmed it a few minutes later.

Marple studied me for a few seconds, and asked, “I am investigating McMurdo’s treasure map!”

“Where is he now?” I asked.

“He’s still working for the train company, but they have put him at another location!”

I looked up startled wondering why he suddenly wanted to search for the treasure, and I could not imagine anything like it there, and I considered if he was closing the investigation for it.

I had investigated everything I could, and had checked all the information and history of the region, trying to grasp something, and some clue, and any lost treasure.

“What’s that?” I asked, seeing Marple play happily with a document, inside his folder.

“I think we have not started the actual search for what McMurdo was looking for …”

“That’s perfect!” I replied, wondering why he was so confident.

“From my recent questioning of McMurdo he eventually told me he heard of its existence many years ago from his father, who heard it from his ancestors … He agreed that we could have equal shares of it if we find it …”

I was astounded, by the fact there was a treasure now, and he had been looking for it there all along, and that he was so confident in finding it, and that he had got me an equal share in it, and I was also happy to have a new case to investigate.

Marple continued, “I have had a few sources search for it, and from an accumulation of sources, to which led here …”

I gasped at what we might confront, and I could not grasp where, and I realized it could be in the Roman graves, of which only a few had been searched properly.

“Where was McMurdo searching before he went crazy from what we thinks is here …” I asked, curiously.

“He’s obsessed with witchcraft and demons …” he moaned. “That don’t exist … He gave me the map …”

He removed the map from his folder and showed it to me, and I realized McMurdo had been searching for something authentic!

“I have where he was searching … But I believe he chose the wrong spot! I examined there and there is nothing there! He was probably affected by this place and being here himself in the dark, and by the hideous occurrences …”

I left it, as I thought of what had happened and what the earthquake had been like.

“I investigated it further and managed to reveal faded shapes on the map. Which was what I was searching for …”

“The treasure was marked there …?” I asked, surprised.

“I knew it was here and I needed to investigate here … I believe the person that drew the map might have been chased – which might explain why it was left where it was – and hidden away …”

He grabbed his pipe off the table and began smoking.

“Who could have chased him?” I asked, confused.

“I do not know! It was too long ago! There is little history of the era! I believe it was valuable, and far too heavy to carry. Perhaps jewels of some form of ancient king!”

“So there are incredible valuable and historical jewels hidden somewhere here …”

“I think the person, in fear of his life, escaped to safety and marked it on the map, with different writing, in a different style, which faded, and that is where our investigation shall be.”

“As the place is marked in here?”

“Correct! Which is what we shall do, as the last of the archeologists and people here have left …”

 

Chapter 18

 

The Lost Treasure Tunnel

 

What was unbelievable was Marple took me to an insignificant area of the cavity wall, which I not recall, where there were small rocks and boulders piled up, and he slowly started taking away rocks, and I joined in.

Also while we did so I felt fluctuations occasionally shudder through the stone ground from something, which sounded deep below it, directly going through the rock there, from some form of power surge, as though threatening to do something, and I imagined my remains being found days later scattered everywhere as investigators tried to fit together what happened.

It surprised me Marple was the only one that seemed to not consider there was anything unearthly there, and I did not know what to believe.

When I rested I started examining the cavity further, in more detail, from there, with nobody there, and I saw it was far more perfectly shaped, and I tried to work out how it was formed.

I examined it further, and the heap of rocks, and area above where part of the cavity had collapsed, and realized it looked deliberately done by someone, and I gasped, and wondered why, and if it was to hide something valuable, or stop something escaping, and I returned to removing rocks and throwing them away to our side, with Marple, and we eventually speeded up throwing small rocks and dirt away, and Marple uncovered a hole, and we increased the size of it until it was large enough to allow us to safely enter its dark confines.

Marple grabbed his torch and shone it in and scanned its depths, and sat down and rested, and we sat getting ready to enter it, and when we entered it, and climbed through the dirt and rocks, I was surprised to see the tunnel continued in a form of straight line, doing downwards, and I wondered if it was a natural tunnel and if it was how it was formed, as I had not seen anything like it, and if it was not why had the builders gone to such lengths to build it, and as we marched into it I realized it had to have been built by the Romans, and I wondered what they had been up to.

It must go somewhere, where someone wanted to go, and I tiredly thought it over, and wondered what Marple thought was there, and I followed him into its black hole with his light and I started to see marks of humans having been there, and I kept wondering what we were going to find.

Though, after all we had been through, I had no idea what we were going after, dealing with, and I realized what we had found could be nothing compared to what was ahead!

 

Chapter 19

 

The Collapsed Tunnel

 

The torch slowly shifted to specific calculated positions, probing its way into the deep blackness ahead, and our feet threw up clouds of dust through beams of light; and some entered my lungs, causing me to give short convulsions, while inhaling stale air.

Echoes of our movements were about us and in the deep silence of the thick underground cave, and I felt the coldness of the walls, and depth below the ground, and felt it penetrate my limbs; as I marched along into obscurity, with expectations of plunging into something deadly.

When the tunnel stopped going downwards and went in a straight line I thought we never had far to go until we reached our final destination.

Glimpses of Marple’s darkened marching figure in the dim light with shadows over the walls wavered rhythmically as he calculatedly investigated the tunnel, and when it fluctuated I expected something, and I occasionally heard noises from behind us and reacted, as I wondered what could cause it, and I followed Marple’s eyes once, because he reacted differently suddenly, and I gasped, and I heard him gasp, as it was the end of our adventure and exploration, and I was left disappointed as I really thought we were going to discover something.

The complete tunnel collapsed across our front, firmly preventing us continuing, and we could go no further on, and we had reached our final destination and had not found out what had been there, and I realized the mystery of the treasure could be left there forever without us knowing what was there.

The rubble blocking the tunnel was deeply embedded giant boulders that were too immense to move, and we stood saying nothing, and I watched Marple make some calculations.

By his reactions I sensed that he was not entirely disappointed, and I knew he might have a way to shift the rocks, and I was sure it was to bring in the archeologists with their equipment, and I closely examined the tunnel wondering how it was made as there were no chisel or any tool marks, and I wondered why they had gone to such lengths to create it, and where it had led to.

On the way back I kept sensing Marple had another plan, and way to get to where he wanted, and was not saying anything.

 

Chapter 20

 

The Deep Depth Scan

 

The next day I returned to the cavity and saw something was on the brink of occurring, and saw the scientists working hard and away at their equipment and I swiftly moved there, and realized I had nearly missed something, and had luckily arrived when I had, and I watched the paranormal scientists and technicians rushing excitedly back and forward checking equipment all over the place, and tried questioning them but got little, and wondered what was going on, and I soon realized that they were about to activate their equipment to scan below the ground again, and braced myself, and watched Marple come down on the elevator.

I never knew what they were doing, as they had carried out all their scans, and they had not shown anything.

I tried to spot any differences there, and I jumped when I noticed some of the life forms the archeologists had uncovered, and had washed down with water and brushes, and stood with my mouth open trying grasp what the hell they were, and doing there, and why they were so preserved, in immaculate condition, and after examining them closely I saw nothing I recognized anywhere, and I was sure they could return to life if they did something to them.

I watched all the scientists eagerly standing around waiting for something, viewing things differently now, and I wondered what, and as I approached them I realized they might have been waiting for me, to continue, and to activate the equipment, and the experiment, and I wondered why.

When they activated it nobody reacted and barely noticed anything. My mind wandered through all the occurrences that had led up to its discovery.

Suddenly a vast unstable energy shockwave, from deep below, and somewhere else, like another dimension, emerged all about the place, with so much force it threatened to smash the cavity, and I recalled the earthquake and McMurdo’s warnings and I went back to wondering what it really was and what damage it could do, and I watched parts of the equipment explode into flames, and the scientists quickly turning it all off and putting it out.

When it was over I was glad to be alive, and that nobody had been killed, and the cavity and roof overhead had not come crashing down on top of us, and I was happy they could not use the equipment again.

Yet I noticed Orwell and Higgins and some other scientists were unconcerned, and I saw them at the equipment, searching through the recorded data, and a scientist had removed a sheet of paper, and they went around him, and I moved over to them.

From what they said I gathered that they believed something was stopping them from seeing what was really below and that their swift instantaneous scan of below had been so fast they had been able to get an unaltered view, and that they had used an instantaneous rough scan, before the equipment was damaged, and they showed us the sheet of paper with the rough scan, and in the blurred image I spotted strange images and forms of tunnels that had not been there before.

 

Chapter 21

 

The Mist Visitation

 

On our way back to Reality Investigations’s headquarters Marple surprised me by telling me that the scan had been his idea and he had asked the paranormal scientists to do it, and had done it to search for the rest of the tunnel, and if they should uncover it, and he left it there, and I realized he had a certain happiness and I knew he had something.

Later while I walked home I saw a strange look to the streets, which at first I thought was my tiredness, but I then noticed the place looked far emptier than I had seen them about that time and I wondered if something had happened, or if it was some event, and tried to recall the date and anything happening.

It was incredible I felt like I was the last person to set foot on the Earth, and watched a thin fog engulf the area, and realized it was the famous London fog, and I watched it thicken around me, and I just thought of it as part of my hazy tired vision and felt like going to sleep early that night.

It was like seeing another time in the past, and I expected to see ancient people in their ancient clothing.

Fog rapidly engulfed me and thickened up until I had barely any sight of anything left.

It was shocking how easily I lost my way there, and realized I could be stuck there for hours.

I was sure that I was somewhere else at times, and I occasionally saw through gaps in the thick fog and saw distant regions of strange places. Yet I stuck to the same route and never altered direction, and I wondered if I could get out of it by going back and remaining there until it went away, but I realized it was now everywhere.

Out of nowhere I saw a powerful light’s emergence through thinner mist and watched its radiance pulsating like an entity, magically illuminating the fog around it everywhere, and I stopped and studied it, wondering what the hell it was, and watched strange shadow formations around it, which I could not see what they were from, from things I could not see, and I just took it that it was an optical illusion and tried to work out what they were from the shadow shapes, and watched their mind-bending shapes shifting and weaving, and probed their way around.

In the distance I heard sounds like some form of animal was there, causing them, buried away deep in the fog, and I wondered if it was a real animal reacting to the sudden blinding mist.

For a short time I moved away, blindly through the fog, and stopped when I heard humans and thought I saw them shifting through thin areas of mist, and was surprised to see them, but as dark ghostly figures, and stood wondering what they were doing, as they looked strange, and like ancient people.

For one moment they looked as if they spotted me, and observing me, wondering what I was doing, and I just ignored them and moved on, and later they reappeared and their sounds were angry, and that there were people having a confrontation with someone or something, and they grew silent.

Later out of nowhere I saw people with their limbs missing or hanging from them, and wondered what had happened, and the mist seemed to separate at the same time, and I saw their features clearly and stood staggered as I realized they were zombies, and I also saw strange unearthly creatures.

The zombies turned barely human looking, and looked like something else altered to look like them, and were barely human looking, and I rushed over to one and was about to throw it on the ground to examine it closely and realized it was like the Santa that had been emerging in the houses, and scaring and killing people, and I rushed away, wondering how we could handle them.

While I moved away from them and thought more clearly about what was happening the fog thinned more and more and I recognized the route home, and moved away, and realized something deadly had been occurring there.

It was like being in someone else’s dream and I started to spot an immense shadow spread right through an area of the fog, where sounds exploded out!

I was tired and sleepy and stared blankly, at the dark shape shifting about through the mist, and I realized I still had not found any conclusions to what was occurring or was there, or back at the cavity, and was sure I was missing something, which was there but I just had not grasped, and I saw a colossal ghost demon shape float through the last of the mist, before it vanished.

 

Chapter 22

 

The Natural History Museum

 

The Natural History Museum captivated me as I made my way through the exhibitions eating a meal, and I thought of staying longer, and was surprised when I spotted the exhibition of one of the life forms from the cavity and its glowing shape under the bright lights, and people standing around it speechless.

While I had been returning to the cavity that morning I saw all the newspapers and headlines with amazement and were of ghost and zombie formations appearing all over London out of a mysterious fog cloud.

I was staggered to read of deaths occurring, and people having been found mutilated, and there was a major police and army investigation presence, and I was amazed to see the army on the streets in armed military vehicles, and wondered what the connection of the incidences were, and in one newspaper I had seen the exploration association scientists and archeologists had one of the life forms in the cavity put in the Natural History Museum, and I had rushed over to see it.

It was incredible, as it looked nothing like the prehistoric creature it was described as, and I stood glaring at it in amazement, and laughed at it, and studied it over and over trying to grasp some vague unseen detail to it, and I realized it was the only time I had properly seen it up close in proper light, and without the muck covering it, and I realized this one was of the early Earth as it did have some characteristics and features of it, but it seemed like some form of mutant, and looked like a hideous monster when viewed at angles.

How the thing even survived left me confounded, as I never seen any form of mouth or anything, and I wondered what the museum had made of it, and why they had put it there, and I recalled the influence of the members of the exploration association, and I realized that the newspaper had suggested it might only be a temporary exhibition, and I continued to march around it, before tourists and other visitors arrived, as I had to grasp something about it, and I even thought lives could be at stake as it be could of great danger, or what was in the cavity could be, and there might be a connection between them, and where they originated from, and what their origins were.

I stood, staggered, wondering what the hell it was! And what strange place had it come from!

What wonders of the universe could exist out there in space? Where had it come from?

I imagined space and mind-bending visions of worlds, and of a turquoise ocean of a world with a wild crazy rotation, and a long mass stretching out, and imagined the life form’s greenish shape darting about through the sea of chemicals.

Yet there was no proof it was from anywhere else, and there could easily have been similar strange conditions on this world very early on, when the surface of the world was turning solid.

I stood fixed there, and finally moved away from it, and watched crowds of tourists, from all across the world, approach it with astonishment. Unable to recognize what it was. Where it came from. If it was real or put there by the museum.

The atmosphere was breathtaking! Its visitors almost always tried in vain to bestow logical explanations to explain its incredible lifelike features, and I realized there that I had to solve the case, and investigate what was there.

 

Chapter 23

 

The Tunnels

 

While I was returning to the cavity I watched the army at work on the streets and tried to see what they were doing, and searching for, and in military vehicles, and wondered what they expected to discover, and if they believed the things were humans.

I strolled down the underground railway line and saw army personnel leaving there, and at the top of the cavity I entered the elevator wondering what was happening.

I was surprised to see the military below, and armed, and I wondered what happened, and I saw Marple talking to the head of the military, and wondered if they went there or they had called them in for something, and I realized it was probably both.

The whole cavity was full of activity, and things had clearly been occurring, with something new, and I realized I had nearly missed something, and had luckily arrived when I had.

At the bottom I watched the paranormal scientists and technicians rushing excitedly back and forward checking equipment all over the place, and I tried questioning them but got little, and wondered what was going on, and I soon realized that they were about to activate new equipment they had brought in to scan precise areas below the ground, and I braced myself, and watched Marple, and wondered what he thought the zombie and ghost formations were, and knew he had an explanation, and I was amazed from what the soldiers said and that there were sightings of ghost, zombie, and creatures formations there, and I realized that the Santa formations had been connected to there all along, and I realized that they had detected them appearing from there.

The military head officer talking to Marple amazed me, and his accounts of the occurrences were astonishing, and surprised Marple, and he occasionally laughed at them, and I overheard his conversation with another officer over attacks at highly confidential military bases, and the theft of large amounts of a highly confidential deadly high explosive material, and that the whole of the military was searching for its whereabouts.

It was incredible as the scientists at their laboratories at the military bases claimed the ghostly formations had been sighted and something had taken it from them, and the military officers insisted it was someone who had used it to take it.

They wished to investigate things further there, and if they had found something, and had heard of the occurrences with McMurdo and the earthquake, and wanted to solve what had happened.

Yet nobody seemed to know what was behind it, and it seemed to be the source of the occurrences, and it was getting dangerous!

I tried to detect any differences in the surrounding environment, and I silently gasped when I noticed some of the life forms the archeologists had uncovered had moved to new positions again, and looked as if they had at one point attempted to do something.

I stood with my mouth partly open trying grasp what the hell they were and if they had come alive, and how the hell they would handle it there, and it felt as if some incredible event was going to occur, or was starting to occur.

I watched all the scientists standing around waiting for something to happen, viewing things differently now, and I realized many were standing near particular places and watching some archeologists actively digging deep into the ground.

Suddenly Marple approached me and showed me the cleaned up scan they got beneath the cavity, and showed me what looked like tunnels below there.

Yet many were faint tunnels that had collapsed, and he showed where the archaeologists were digging and that there was a tunnel below, and I realized they were on to something, and trying to enter it.

I realized it went in the same direction as the tunnel we had followed, but the view of all the tunnels was muddled and I could not see where they were going, and why none of them seemed to lead anywhere, and it looked like something had been removed from it.

Suddenly a vast unstable energy shockwave, from deep below, somewhere, blasted out and vanished, with such force it threatened to smash the cavity, and some rocks fell down across the ground in areas.

I recalled the earthquake and McMurdo’s warnings and I wondered what the hell it really was, and what really was going to happen, and I watched parts of the equipment explode and burst into flames nearby, and scientists quickly turning everything that was undamaged off, while gasping at the power of it.

When it was over many looked glad to be still alive and that nobody had been killed, and that the cavity and roof overhead had not come crashing down on top of them, and most were happy that they could not use the equipment again.

The major scientists were only concerned in what they had found, and I saw them searching through the recorded data, and I moved over to see it.

From what I gathered was that they believed something was stopping them from seeing what was really below and that the new instantaneous scan still showed little that they had not previously seen, and that they had to search below themselves to find it, and I spotted strange reactions from the archaeologists who were digging down to the tunnel, and I saw them starting to break through into what was below.

 

Chapter 24

 

The Lost Ancient Tunnels

 

White radiance streaked through clouds of dust in the cave from Marple’s bright torch as I shifted down, and Oswald climbed down, and we shifted away into the tunnel, startled at what we were doing, and how far we were going.

Nobody else wanted to join us, and the people who never thought it was too dangerous had no reason to enter it, and only the three of us had firm enough objectives to check it.

It was incredible! I was glad to even see spiders and webs hanging from the rocks, and going over me, as we strolled on through, entering its dark confines, as it seemed so deadly and hideous, with demons lurking in its dark regions.

Once I thought I saw something watching us, from behind us, in the darkness, and carefully listened behind me, for anything, and the slightest clue of it being real.

It surprise me when the tunnel changed direction, and took us in the opposite directions, and I wondered why, as the people who had built surely would have built it straight lines, and we found another cave below, where its roof and our floor had caved in, and we entered the cave below.

When we entered it I sensed something strange, as though there was something else there, and that we were getting closer to where we wanted to go, and I was surprised at the new cave as it was made far better, and had clearly been made by someone else.

It was in a long straight tunnel going downwards and my dreamy sight probed into its confines, and into an abyss going deep into the ground, and I watched silky dust fall down from the roof and blow about in light beams, and the unmarked dust on the ground as we rushed on.

Faint echoes of our noises and breathing could be heard in its extraordinary silence, and I wondered where it led to, and what we were doing, and what the outcome would be.

It was incredible at one point I felt like we were the only people alive, and I was surprised to see a thin fog in an area ahead, and I watched it hover there, and could not grasp why it was there, and wondered if it was gas, and was surprised that Marple just ignored it and marched straight through it, and I realized there was no smell from it, and saw it was little.

It was like entering another time in the past, and expected to see ancient tunnel builders, in their ancient clothing!

I was confused by its length and wondered why it went so deep, and why the builders had gone there for whatever it was.

Out of nowhere I saw a powerful light appear and vanish ahead, and we stopped and studied there, and Marple wondered what it was, and we eventually ignored it.

Later I started to realize the dangers, and if what was there was the same as the killer Santa, and I realized we should not do anything, and ignore it, and I realized whatever it was it had been attempting to copy things, and it was as though it could not properly grasp what it was copying, and I recalled McMurdo’s warning, and his belief it was the devil!

 

Chapter 25

 

The End of the Tunnel

 

In dimness at the front of us, just in the light’s range, I watched dim gleams from things in the stone reflect dim light, playing with my hazy tired sight.

Faint echoes of breathing and occasional murmurs could be heard in its extraordinary silence, and by Marple’s sudden frantic reactions I sensed that he believed that something was actually ahead, and I wondered what.

I watched the light probe what was there, and it beamed out over a circular cavity ahead, which had been created using the same method as the tunnel.

The cavity was strange, when I entered it, and never seemed to fit in with what we had already seen!

The roof was at a height of twenty feet, and I caught glimpses of where things had once been, and I listened to surreal echoes of our movements, and as I entered its central region I conjured up vague visions of spooky ancient Roman ghosts in its confines.

I shifted into its fringes, treating it as an archeological find, as I rested from our journey there, and long day, and I curiously watched Marple searching, and wondered what he expected to find there anyway.

At the front an object came into my sight and I saw that a massive black boulder had fallen down behind the tunnel entrance, across the front, where the tunnel would have continued, and I wondered if it had stopped us reaching our real destination, as I and Oswald could not see anything there, and all there was there was the cavity, and yet Marple continued searching it, and looking at his treasure map.

He approached massive the black boulder blocking the entrance, and felt its smoothness with his fingertips, through thick webs and dirt, and looked up startled, and removed his hands, and started examining it, and placed his hands over its surface and traced its perfect shape, measuring it, and he stepped back, and saw something in the dirt below, and started brushing the dirt away from it.

To our surprise he gradually revealed an open-mouthed skeleton with a rusted knife embedded in its chest.

We went over to it and examined it, and discussed what age it could be, and Marple tried to get information about the person, and he searched the remains of the clothing of the man, but nothing was there except pieces of rope where he had been tied.

To me it looked like where devil worship or witchcraft could have taken place.

“Someone gave a human sacrifice here to something!” Marple stated, considering what had happened.

I moved back checking it all in more detail, and I saw its hideous agonized face more, covered in dirt – where the person had hideously died with his mouth open in pain, and had remained that way for centuries.

Marple continued brushing away thick dirt from it and about it, while some crumbling bits of gray rot fell off the skeleton.

I grasped its hideous outline, and I stepped back wondering what the place was, and why it was there, and why everything I expected now kept turning out differently.

We checked everything we could in the cavity and found little, and a large boulder against a side wall, which looked mysterious, and out of place.

Eventually we started resting, and I rested near the skeleton, after making some close examinations of it, and I realized that if the large black boulder in front of it had fallen down and blocked the tunnel ahead that something could be behind it, and I started wondering what the hell could be there, and why they had been making human sacrifices.

 

Epilogue

 

The Thing from Beyond Reality

 

Gigantic eruptions blasted out everywhere, wake us from our sleep, in unadulterated horror, with such force that with my eyes shut I thought I was in some form of early state of death.

When I opened my eyes I saw nothing but blinding light, and energy exploding out everywhere, threatening to do damage to the physical universe, and for some reason I imagined space and time going out for light years, going across vast reaches of space, and I wondered what the hell it was!

Echoes of our last conversations and occurrences, before we had gone to sleep, went through my mind as I tried to grasp what happened, and as I did my eyes altered to the unadulterated dazzling light, and I wondered where the hell the cave and cavity had gone, and I felt the ground beneath me with my feet, and I considered what could have happened, and looked about for my companion explorers, and saw their vague shapes further out.

The vast powers surrounding us were staggering and I wondered how we could escape alive, as surely we were still underground somewhere, and I started searching everywhere I could see, and saw that the cave and cavity had vanished, and all about me I realized I was surrounded by strange energy formations, energy formation, and I watched its energy in vast complex formations doing strange things, and some regions altering to other formations, as though reforming, and I watched Marple and Oswald examining it.

Away in the distance I incredibly saw a cavity wall, and I saw it going around us, which I measured it at around four miles away, going across our front, and the roof a few hundred feet above.

I realized if I was going to die that I was best being on my own, and having the others away at a distance, and I wondered if I would get what we were up against, and what we were actually investigating, and what had just happened.

After a long time I realized it had a definite state, and had been in another state, and it was close to completion, and I was surprised to see we were actually at its edge, with Marple and Oswald at two different positions at my side, and I tried to realize what it now was.

It had formed a perfect energy formation of some sort, clearly of transcendent origins, and pulsated in the center of it and the cavity, and I examined the rim of the cavity all round me and saw that it held, and never looked as though it would collapse.

I sensed something would happen and I saw it happen and an immense whirlpool of energy lines magically shifting around it, and I studied it for a long time fascinated and realized that it had no proper presence in this universe and was some form of force formation, perhaps going through many dimensions, and I saw signs of a vortex within it, and its energy patterns!

I suddenly realized the black boulder that had been blocking the cavity had been its edge, and subconscious region, in the dormant formation it had taken, and it had not actually been solid, and made of matter, and it had mixed rock atoms within it and over its edge to hide itself, and that it as the black boulder had actually stretched out for nearly four miles, under central London, and the cavity had been built in front of it, which I looked about behind me and saw, in the cavity wall there, and for some reason I realized I had actually activated it.

I was left staggered and recalled going to sleep beside it, and recalled touching it once and feeling a strange energy from it, and pulling away my hand, and I realized my touching it had done something and activated it.

I realized that I had seen it as the rock formation and a vague line in the last scan the scientists had taken in the cavity above, and that they had described it as something else.

I realized something in me had activated it, and revived it, and I sensed its communications with it, and I gasped at the vast complexity of it, and that it was exchanging information, and suddenly I realized it was in communication with the thing we had discovered under the building at Battlefield Road, which was in the basement in the museum, and I realized it had been part of it, and the lost section of it, which it had used for exploration, and it had been unable to leave the universe without it, and it had split itself into two, and the other half was far smaller than it in this universe, and it had put part of itself in me with the aim of locating it, and I realized that both parts of it had been trapped there, unable to do anything, and had been too far apart to detect each other in the state they had been in.

I also realized it had created a subconscious part of it, when it had gone dormant, and that it had created it to protect it and awaken it if it detected its other half, and it had been it that created the Santa and other formations, in its weakened state, from being activating and deactivating over vast amounts of time, and I realized it had been activated by McMurdo in the cavity at the underground railway line, and had been in its weakened state after being there for so long, and had been almost crazy, and had been protecting it, and was stopping people discovering it, and scaring them away.

In the past it attempted to discover what it needed and let people build tunnels, and it had created tunnels and cavities, and many had later been hidden or destroyed.

I realized that it had found a way to leave the universe to where it had come from, but it had never been able to go through with its plan, and I was left staggered at the sheer power and forces of it, and magnitude, and I realized it had even created humans to achieve its goal, from other species, and it had genetically altered them to advance.

It had originally been unable to even define what existed in this universe, and its first attempts at making and altering species were left in the cavity McMurdo uncovered, in suspended states, and many had been found on other worlds, in the depths of the universe, and it had determined humans would progress far enough to give it what it wanted, to complete its mission, and its subconscious state had helped humans progress.

It had detected humans creating plutonium atomic bombs and had realized they had enough power for it to leave the universe!

I recalled two of the scientists secretively talking about the atomic bombs, and the sheer power of them, and I recalled the army officer mention there had been a break in at their secret military bases, and that something had been taken, and I was sure they might have traced something to there, as its Santa entity had been detected being transmitted under the buildings, and it had later been traced to the cavity region.

I was left staggered by everything and at its real history, and that it had been trying to survive in this universe, and wanted to someday escape from its confines, and I was sure I sensed it react as it prepared itself to leave, as though it had thought of leaving, and escaping from its imprisonment and eventual destruction, and I thought of where it came from and I realized that I still never had a clue what was there and where it was.

Everything around me seemed to explode with energy and alter, reviving it, putting life back into it, and it pulsated furiously with more energy than it ever had since it arrived, and appeared on this desolate world, with its strange existence.

It was something out of a mind-bending dream, altering its formations, as it completed its mission, and I felt energy from it blast through my body, and everything transformed, and it vanished, leaving emptiness, blackness, and Marple and Oswald turned on their lights, and we stood mystified in the massive empty cavity.

I eventually looked for our exit and checked the tunnel, where we had been, where the small cavity we slept in had been, and saw something shine near it.

When I was about to enter the tunnel, with Marple and Oswald behind me, as we went silently back up to the surface, I spotted something strange hidden in the darkness there, and after careful and close examinations I realized it was large black wooden chests, heaped in a pile on top of one another, and I rushed over and crouched down in front of it, and held one, which was partly open, where I had seen the shine appear.

Again something shined in its dark interior, and I spotted Marple and Oswald approaching, and their torches shine from it, and I saw them looking startled, coming to a halt, and looking about their front, more astonished than I had seen them, with them trying to control themselves, and I knew this was the real treasure, and it belonged to us this time!

The treasure room had been buried away behind part of the cavity wall all along, and I recalled seeing a large boulder over where the entrance must have been, at the bottom of the wall.

Most of it once belonged to ancient kings, who bestowed the treasures to it, and I knew it when I threw open the chest lid, and found colossal royal crowns and jewelry, and where I had seen the shine there was an ancient gold Roman cup, embedded with large diamonds, and I watched the torches directly shine on it, and its gold radiance explode out, with bright white sparkles.

 

Part II

 

Prologue

 

The Time Alterations

 

At the edge of the energy bubble, altering wildly, gleams of light from bright stars were being held motionlessly, and were being filmed and studied by the scientists.

The entire top of the castle was now covered in equipment and scientists studying the alien in the energy bubble, and of the discovery made earlier in close examinations of the energy bubble.

A clock placed at the end of a cable was entered into its field, and the scientist reacted immediately when they received results, and concluded that its precision digital numbers were being frozen, and into multidimensional forms as the cable shifted, and they studied the suspended cluster of partially transparent layers, as they moved in with cameras.

The two paranormal scientists were controlling the experiments of the leading scientists, and had gained a great deal of status and authority with them, and aboard the GX1, where most of the filming of it was being shown on the media.

Both occasionally gave detailed explanations of what they were doing, and believed was occurring, and they had the cable released further, edging it into the confines of the energy bubble, creating more spectacular optical effects with the clock, making it distort in twisted forms, like shaping beams of light with matter.

All the numbers on clock shifted fast forward to their surprise, and all the scientists, technicians, and archeologists there crowded around it loudly discussing it, and applauding the find, as it was the first discover of time travel.

Kruger stood with them startled, though he had known it existed, he had not proven it, and believed Don had traveled back in time, and he had been waiting for it to appear somewhere, to prove it, and for the event to take place, and he watched it wondering what the hell it was, as it was far more different than he had thought, and he had not realized or heard anything that could explain anything to him, and he had deliberately stayed near the two paranormal scientists and main scientists in hope of picking something up.

It looked as though it were rupturing space in a way that played with time. It had properties of suspending it! It was creating alterations in it and the fabric of space, but could it allow some form of gateway into the depths of time to exist?

Many of the leading scientists were carrying out numerous basic and complex experiments all around it, using equipment, and others were recording various things about it, and great amounts of detailed information were being sent back to the GX1 for them to analyze in a far greater degree.

Nobody had been able to determine its origins or if it came from the galaxy. Yet they were in another universe, which they had not checked in any proper degree, and there were many occurrences there and in the black hole that were still unexplained, and their voyage through the galaxy had shown that many mysterious things existed there.

It would take the rest of their lives to explore the place properly and make proper findings, and they may never fully achieve their goal, and it could be found long after they existed.

He had shuddered as he had studied its shape hovering about, and its occasional appearance, like a lion eyeing up its prey.

The abnormal antics of some of the scientists at times captivated him, mystifying him with the depth of their nervousness and fear of something! Some still repetitively studied the readings from their equipment and with alarm – preparing themselves for something, which he saw the two paranormal scientists slowly become aware of!

What the hell was it? What was the thing? Was it really a supernatural entity? Could something go wrong?

A swift flash of light appeared and exploded at the edge of a region of the energy bubble, silencing all the scientists.

From it they got a proper view of what happened when the light entered its radius, and they were able to analyze slowed down views of the occurrence.

Kruger listened to a scientist explaining the occurrences to an audience on the GX1, stating, “It manipulated space and time within its outer radius! It can accelerate, decelerate, and suspend it … The clock is now suspending it …”

The cable emerged outwards pulling the clock backwards, with its numbers swiftly turning backwards until its numbers once again became motionless, and Kruger considered if they could use whatever it was to make some form of time machine.

He wondered if in reality time was something far different from what they perceived. But would he ever know? And he just accepted the philosophy! And he was still sure Don was an older version of him!

“What are they intending to do with it?” he asked Mitchel, curiously. “Are they going to construct something from it?”

Mitchel examined him, almost sensing something, wondering why he had an interest, and looked annoyed about something.

“They, of course, have investigated little so far, and if they do, you will be informed!”

“If they can reconstruct it, they can use it for many things, including uses in industry!” he continued. “Stopping time is an incredible tool … With incredible uses …!”

“They have made other findings you know! If you take an observation of its shifting movements, for one thing – which they have been studying closely – its constrained pattern of movements has dramatically altered in some regions in space …”

Kruger examined its lethal appearance, like a large bubble full of pure transparent energy – buzzing wildly and dangerously – ready to discharge somewhere.

“Do you think you have created and have something new here?” he asked, firmly. “Two unheard of inventions of great power combined … The incredible paranormal energy source, in the depths of a new and different universe, with a different makeup, in a galaxy never seen before, with hidden powers beyond our imagination from such a rare being, combined with your energy bubble that has been discovered for the first time from all the technology of worlds, over hundreds of years!

“The combinations of powerful energy sources have created many great discoveries!”

“There may be! It could very well be a one of a kind situation, and we have perhaps a long time to explore it! Perhaps we could find some form of time travel – which may not be found anywhere else – or something else!”

“We may not need to wait that long!” Bryan stated, moving over. “Most inventions allow people to get their best properties straight away. They will in a few days be giving out all the details from all the findings, and from all the experiments, which may be very interesting if I am not mistaken. They have barely even scratched the surface of it!”

 

 

 

II

 

Its Capture

 

The time being might have been thrown into the realms of hell, into another reality, with its magical being shape altering and whirling within hideous energy surges, threatening to obliterate it, but it consistently had stopped it and it falling out of space and time altogether, and it had consistently altered.

The center of it had glowed bright like a sun from the energy that it had been trapped in, altering and becoming more powerful and then dimming, with it whirling increasing and decreasing, shaking everything furiously about from the impact of powerful energy forces, from something strange from outside, and though it had reappeared at the correct location, it had been trapped there.

It had remained perplexed, and it had stopped making attempts at escaping, and tried to establish what had gone wrong.

On and on it had kept going, and it had seen the humans emerge on the tower stares, and confirm what it had started to suspect, and that they had set a trap and had caught it. It had underestimated them greatly! It would have been normally virtually impossible to do what they had done, and it would be lucky to survive the ordeal! It slowly had realized that they had methods of detection that it had never heard of, but it also had slowly realized that they never had time travel as it had originally known.

After the shock of the encounter, and it had adapted its energy and structure to handle the energy bubble that they had trapped it in, and it had probed the humans and realized it had been lucky, and that they could have killed it, and that they wanted it for something, and it had realized that it had technology that it could use to bargain with, if they ever allowed it to communicate.

Their technology had been strange and some of it primitive to it, and it had even learned how most of it worked, and had been surprised that its race had missed it, and it had realized why.

It had probed their computer records, and had found how powerful their race was, and then had discovered the great revelation that they had arrived there from another universe, after hurtling through the outer limits of space and time, and it had seen the great use that they could have been to its race.

The opportunity to do something had been great, and its determination had turned almost inconceivable.

For a long time it had watched them at work, and their experiments, while its energy surges intermittently had played with it, in hideous attacks, and it had planned what it should do.

 

 

 

III

 

The Alien/Entity Returns

 

The new alien entity had remained almost dormant within the human that it had created, with its automatic senses taking scans of its surroundings.

The human was perfect, and had been the perfect place to dwell undetected by the humans, who believed the human had been something else, and had failed to realize the truth.

It had collected all forms of information about everything, and had collected far more than it needed and had visualized, and it had analyzed everything in a greater degree than it had as the entity in the void.

It had been staggered by the outer universe and the world that they had explored, and had analyzed its surroundings and their information with amazement, and had repeatedly thanked the humans for giving it the chance to study such phenomena.

Everything at first had been beyond its knowledge, and it had been an exploration beyond its wildest thoughts, and it had even considered if there had been others like it there, and if they had created it all, with inconceivable dimensions and powers, far beyond its knowledge and powers, like itself had been compared to its original self billions of years in the past.

The void had been nothing compared to the outside universe, and universes! It had all the relevant information that the entity in the void had, and it had been built to handle what it possibly could, and had been a compressed miniaturized version of it, which had been created with the help of the knowledge it had discovered from the GX1.

It had observed the GX1 from its interior, and its technology had been incredible, and it had decided to recreate it and had changed its plan to capture it, and it had collected enough information to recreate it.

It now only needed to return to the entity in the void to complete its mission, which it was about to do, and it now not only knew how to allow it to recreate the incredible powers of the GX1, and travel hundreds of times the speed of light, and recreate the invincible energy screen, ultimate computers, and other technology, it could travel beyond the universe, and travel through time, and this was only the beginning as once the entity in the void received the information it would soon alter itself into an entirely new form capable of anything that was possible.

It soon sensed the entity outside in the void and altered itself, from being Don, and left the vehicle, as it had been programmed to do, and it became one with the entity.

 

 

 

 

I

 

Beyond the Universe

 

 

Chapter 1

 

The Mind-Bending Black Hole

 

A bright explosion of radiance exploded out stunning Kruger as he came to. An immense whirlpool of shifting outlines of globes magically shifted by, and he studied it for a long time and realized that he had no body or proper presence, and was some form of force formation, and he was swirling out into a vortex of reshaping energy patterns that replaced reality, in a surreal splendor of transforming elements and that the mind-bending display of displacements were altering to something that he could not recognize.

Why he was there mesmerized him! Was he even classified as being alive?

He gave a vague gasp as reality magically spun around him in different patterns while he wondered how worse the situation could become. He could be trapped there for all eternity!

So when he saw a white blur in a miniature central region of darkness emerge ahead, as he swirled around, he grew interested, and he started to recognize more and more detail as it grew, and shifted he into it, and within its depths he saw magnificent distant stars, within a haze, blending into his surrounding brilliant colors.

Spectacular white beams exploded out, and stars shot to him, and he realized the tremendous speed that he was traveling at.

Space was expanding all across his front, and he floated into it.

Gradually he felt feelings and saw a transparent view of his body emerge as it transformed and became solid again, and he saw the others appear as ghost images, in the swirling brightness.

The voyager appeared and grew solid about him in stages, as it entered space and time, and magnificent bright white and golden lights filled his entire vision everywhere, as if he were floating into a form of cartoon universe.

The stars became dazzling, which he could not recognize! Their density filled space everywhere, and he was staggered that they could even exist in their state, without being pulled together into an immense explosion.

He exploded with excitement as he looked back and saw the biggest black hole that he had ever seen stretching across space, and he wondered why he was being thrown out of it, and he realized the immense speed that he had been traveling at.

The size of it looked close to the size of a small galaxy, and the vision staggered him and stuck in his mind as he watched it vanish out of view and the spacecraft become solid around him.

 

Chapter 2

 

The Monster’s Death

 

The monster/entity had turned mad in the end, especially when it had attacked the control center of the GX1 spacecraft.

The last shreds of its plan had been instantly ruined when the scientists at the other side of the spacecraft had activated a field that had thrown the whole spacecraft out of space and time, to kill it and escape with their lives.

It had been crazy, but it was all that they could do!

It had been hideous beyond anything anyone had seen, and resembled the devil itself! Not only had it been an entity/monster, altering from one form to another again, the G1 explosions had damaged it and its mind beyond repair, and it continued with only the one goal to kill every life form aboard, and take down the energy shield around the whole voyager to give it to the outer entity, and have it to repair the damage done to it.

Its last moments had been a chaos of killing and destroying everywhere, to gain control of the outer energy shield, but it was unable to think properly and realize how to remove the energy shield, and near the end had even realized that it was close to death and would not survive if it never.

Its last thoughts had been screams of agony, and it watched its existence in all the dimensions become annihilated.

The outer entity had monitored what it could, and had detected its madness with some fascination, as it had never known it!

For a long time it had been studying everything and trying to find another way to get the spacecraft!

After careful examinations of the spacecraft’s outer energy shield it had begun to realize that around the energy bubble there were small amounts of weak energy that could be used to attach some of its energy forms, and it had made a shield of energy made from itself around the energy shield, which would remain hidden there, so when the spacecraft left it would travel with it, and when possible, and they removed the energy screen, it would form into another entity/life form, capable of far more than the entity/human that it had put aboard, and it would become a vastly improved version of it.

 

Chapter 3

 

The Mind-Bending World

 

For a moment Kruger was staggered as a dazzling radiance blinded him, and he thought he had been thrown out of space and time all over again, and he realized that the space vehicle that he was in had crashed.

The sky outside the front of the vehicle was a mass of intense light, from immense stars nearby almost covering the sky there in white and gold, and it was so strange that he was sure that it was not even in another universe anymore, or was at the outer limits of the big bang of a universe, at a distant point.

He switched on a light screen, which shaded the intense light flare blasting into his brain, which now looked like the sun on Earth covering his entire front, and he checked the other two passengers of the vehicle, Major Ripley and Don, which he could now properly see near him.

Even after traveling beyond space and time the world that they were exploring was so mind-bending all the crew were virtually staggered at it all of the time. There was at least a billion light years of what must be the most compact region of space possible, and the world had to have the weirdest landscapes and scan results possible, which was another reason why they were exploring it.

The world about them was so altered from the normal the others never said anything and occasionally gave muffled gasps!

“So it has happened again?” Major Ripley moaned, and sniggered, glancing out at the world through a side window, with his hands shading his eyes, searching the outer landscape, in wonderment – wondering what they had thrown at him this time. Yet he like new occurrences and such excitement, and getting out the spacecraft.

“But I’ve not lost any memories of anything!” Kruger stated, checking his memory of everything that he could.

While Don nodded in agreement, he replied, “I have not forgotten anything either!”

The vehicle had crashed again as it had done on the world in the void, when the alien had wiped away most of their memories of the people in the vehicles to cover it being there, to get aboard GX1 spacecraft, but this time it was different, and Kruger gasped at the thought of the thing still being alive, and up to something.

It made him shiver thinking of all the occurrences that had happened over the past weeks, and wondered what the consequences of it all would be.

“The alien may have changed itself and its tactics, realizing the situation is different …” Major Ridley announced.

“Yet if it was aboard, why did it come out here? And why would it make us crash? And why would it even risk it – as it would know that we would not fall for it again. It is pointless …”

“It could have been an accident this time? Perhaps we have hit something?”

“But why were we all unconscious! That is a rare occurrence!”

Kruger felt his head for bruising – which he confirmed never existed …

“I do not recall us actually hitting something,” Major Ripley finally announced, after some thought, looking about outside, and below the vehicle. “Look! We’ve only skidded to a standstill into a bog of yellow crawling slime – and the vehicle has stopped itself automatically! Kruger! You’re the scientist here! You work it out for us!”

“Perhaps this time it was gas …?”

“As I have told you before there’s none in this model! And if this gas exists, it has no smell, and must be concealed somewhere! And I’m sure it would be of interest to the military … And for them to investigate why it was used …”

“There could be some gas in the atmosphere outside, and we may be taking in the outer atmosphere …?”

Major Ripley glanced through all the shuttles instruments, and replied, “If I can remember rightly, the vehicle automatically takes in the atmosphere, which it has been doing, as it is perfectly breathable, and that it would have stopped anything getting in that was unwanted … And there does not seem to be anything in here, or has entered here …”

“This is another universe! It has a different framework, and could have different laws of nature … Unknown to us …”

“Meaning what? In other words anything could happen out here now! Perhaps the gas just materialized here – knocked us unconscious – and vanished afterwards …”

“We better keep things open that’s all …”

Suddenly, Major Riley jumped, with his eyes jerked wide open, when a human figure shifted out of thick mist outside, at their side, and he removed his weapon.

“What is the distance to the nearest shuttle?” Major Ripley whispered, to confirm what he knew.

“Well, there are hundred vehicles out, and the nearest has to be miles away …”

“We better contact the others! Check what is happening!”

Kruger watched the strange figure move in close, and bang his large heavy glove hard against the vehicle window near him, and thought he recognized him for a moment.

The problem of having such a vast spacecraft and crew, which he had not gotten used to, was there were too many strangers aboard, and that they were always coming into contact with people that they never recognized, and he now knew hardly any of the other people in the vehicles, and going by what he had seen of Major Ripley and Don that they were the same.

There was nothing strange about the man, who was wearing a spacesuit without a helmet, and only did two things differently, which was his silent and strange look and him being there in the first place, as nobody had wanted to leave the protection of the vehicles, because of the place they were in and the hidden dangers.

Kruger wondered if he would make it home alive, which was incredible, after all the years of helping and preparing for the great voyage to the final frontiers of the universe. They must have done just about everything to check that nothing went wrong, and had proven to them that if anything new was actually found that there would not be any danger. They believed that dangers in space had been virtually annihilated, and were now just small accidents. The dangers of the past were thought to have been left behind. Even in wars, humans were very rarely ever killed, and were mainly fought with machines, and mainly robots, and the people involved hardly ever actually encountered dangers.

He could not place the stranger and put it down to memory loss from the encounter with the alien, and the strange environment of the new universe.

“I cannot reach them!” Major Ripley shouted.

“There could be some damage to the communications …”

“You mean something is blocking transmissions …”

Major Ripley stuck his face against the side window and studied his face and figure outside, and the man ignored him, waiting for him to open the door.

Kruger did think he looked familiar and acted like one of the crew, but so had the alien when it had done a perfect impersonation of him, as Dan.

“You will have to let him in or something!” Don announced. “At least talk to him through an opened window!”

“He could get in here anyway,” Kruger stated, after thirty seconds of silence. “The vehicles have no real defense against direct attacks – or from that alien.”

“That’s a good one! But we did drive back with that alien aboard the last time, and we could be blamed for helping it get aboard!”

He pressed a switch, and a window partly opened up, and he called out, “Someone must be in trouble for you to have come all the way out here! Across this place!”

“Correct!” the stranger replied. “Our vehicle crashed, and something killed all the crew … I just escaped, with my life …”

Major Ripley gasped, and asked, “What’s your name, and vehicle number?”

“I am Larsen of vehicle sixty!”

Kruger remembered the name, and had a vague recollection of him, and showed his recognition of him.

“I vaguely remember you too! Did you wake up unconscious? And was your communicator working?”

“Yes, we all woke up unconscious, and the communicator was not working … I used a device to detect your vehicle, which I knew was here, from our equipment earlier on …”

He showed them a hand device that was in his suit.

Major Ripley moved away from the door where the stranger was, and allowed Kruger to unlock the door, and they watched the air slightly react to the outer atmosphere of the desolate world.

They watched the man enter and speedily close the door behind him, as though he had been waiting to get in for a long time, and to get away from something, and they remained silent as warm air warmed the vehicle again.

“Now what will we do?” Kruger muttered, looking about outside. “You said that there is something deadly over there that killed your entire crew?”

“Our vehicle was surrounded by that hideous mist that floats about this place, and something smashed it to pieces, killing them, and escaped, as I was near the back …”

Kruger studied the man, and saw his fear of the place, and that he had been running to escape from it at one point.

“So we better get out of here …” Larsen warned, after they sat doing nothing for a minute. “If that thing gets over here …”

Major Ripley immediately jumped over to an area with controls and activated controls, and the vehicle lifted into the air, and floated forwards.

“But where are we going to?” Don asked. “There is more of a chance of it being in front than behind us, if we travel on. As it could spot us at a lot of locations moving on, but if remained here, it will only be able to find us at this spot …“

“Correct!” Larsen replied first. “But this vehicle can swiftly fly upwards, at any speed, and can even travel in space, and that thing cannot leave the ground as far as I saw!”

Major Ripley continued on the course they had been on before the crash, ready to lift into the air when needed, and they all seemed more relaxed by it.

When they finally heard a noise from the communication device, Major Ripley jumped to attention and stopped the vehicle, and moved in beside it, and had Don take control of the vehicle, because he was the most alert and ready to handle anything coming at them

“Vehicle four here!” Major Ripley announced. “Any information on why the communications were down?”

“Ripley! This is Major Douglas in vehicle two. It seems to have happened again! All the communications were down! They only returned to normal a few minutes ago! We seem to have a different problem this time! All the vehicles crashed, but the vast majority are running again! They’re working on the problem back at the GX1. This time, all the vehicles have been ordered to continue with what they were doing!”

“What’s the distance to vehicle sixty from us?”

“It’s just over three miles from you! Why?”

“Do me a favor! Was Larsen there?”

“Yes! But we have not had any reply to our communications to it!”

“That’s because something has attacked and killed all the crew, except Larsen! Who is in here …”

“My God! So there is something out here! I will check for anything from the vehicle! We’ll have to warn everyone about it! I don’t think they will cancel this mission, especially if that alien is here, and impersonating someone, and is trying get aboard again. In fact, I think I would rather stay out here than be stuck aboard with that thing!”

 

Chapter 4

 

The New Alien/Entity

 

From nowhere, with an inconceivable speed, a concentrated sphere of energy had appeared, vaguely even being detected by its senses due its formation. Except its acceleration left it staggered!

The new alien had remained dormant and as the rest of the GX1 spacecraft as altered energy shifting through what was beyond space and time, taking a few scans and recordings of its surroundings by its automatic senses, but when it had entered the new universe its senses had detected what was there, and it had partially come to life to investigate what was there, while keeping itself as an energy coating around the spacecraft’s energy shield.

It had sensed that the humans inside the spacecraft had also been staggered by the outer universe, and analyzed its surrounds with amazement, and even thanked the humans for giving it a chance to study such phenomena.

Everything about it had been beyond its knowledge and incredible, and it considered if it was another like itself that had created it all, with inconceivable dimensions and powers, far beyond it, and its knowledge and powers, like it compared itself to its original self billions of years ago.

The void was nothing compared with it! It had all the relevant information that the entity had, and it had been built to handle what it possibly could, and was a compressed version of it, which it had created with the help of the knowledge that it had taken from the spacecraft, and its compressed size.

The black hole was incredible, and its voyage through it, and it had allowed it to travel a great distance, and it wondered if it could get information on how the spacecraft had entered it.

It had observed that the spacecraft had clearly come from such a place, and that its technology was surely greater in many ways to what existed in the new universe. Yet its size was so small that it had still confused it! Could it itself recreate such a thing in a larger size? Should it capture it if possible, or get enough information to recreate it?

Its mission was clearly defined, and it was only able to alter it to achieve its goal. But if it could not return it would have to remove its programming, and mission, and continue as a replacement of the entity.

Thus it soon set itself the task of exploring everything that it could, to gain all the knowledge that it could.

A surge of energy forces that it had never conceived existed had hit its probing forces from the stars, shocking it and fascinating it at the same time. It had been unbelievable and glorious, and it admired it greatly, but had sensed some danger from it, as with its encounter with destruction on its creation.

Through its thoughts a blur of radiation had swirled out of the blackness. Strange energies without any meanings had sent sensations through its structure.

Amidst its awesome powers it had detected the core of the GX1 spacecraft, and it supplying its propulsion forces and energy protection shield, and considered if there was a way to stop its powers reaching the propulsion forces and energy protection shield. At the speed that it was traveling at it should it how powerful it was, and that it could not affect it.

It had sensed that the humans could not use the spacecraft’s higher speeds, at hundreds of times the speed of light, because of the short distances between the stars there, with the immense amount of worlds, moons, asteroids – and that they had a problem.

The entity had always thought of things in size, and small had always been powerless and about useless, and it had realized that far greater powers could exist in it and it being concentrated.

It had visualized the appearance of the stars at a close range, and considered how it could use such forces, and it imagined using such forces, and using the technology of the spacecraft with them, and it hurtling through the universe to anywhere.

The entire energy surrounding it and exploding from stars blanketing out any darkness had overwhelmed it, and even worried it, and what could exist in its depths, and it had detected incredible things there, and considered if it could leave there if it had to, and if it could get back to the void to the entity, which surely could do something with the knowledge it would give it, and if it could get back there.

Its body had absorbed the power with enchantment, as it could not recall having taken in such forces since its creation.

After many probes, and unsuccessful probing of the spacecraft, including through multidimensional sensors, it had accumulated everything that it could and had started to examine what it had accumulated.

The unique energy shield of the spacecraft had stayed a great interest to it, and it had consistently considered if it could recreate it, as a defense.

All its knowledge of the spacecraft had been little, and from what it had gained would take it a long time to find what it wanted, if it actually had enough to find what it wanted – unless it got aboard, and it had realized again why its main mission was to get aboard, and study it, with the possible chance of capture.

If it let it go it would be a mistake, as it had realized that it could be the only time it would come across such a phenomenon.

The vastness and powers of what it had become so vivid, and it had realized that it would have transform into something new, and it had thought of its original thoughts of the object’s discovery, and of the finding of the things in it, and at the same time it had detected with amazement it was decelerating, and it had detected its surveillance of a world ahead, and it had been sure that it intended to make contact with it.

When it had gone into orbit around it, it had probed the world with fascination, and even lost interest in what was happening to study what it found. It had never seen anything like it before, and it had been fascinated at what could exist there, without it knowing that it could exist, even with it being outside its normal reaches. It marveled at what it had been missing while drifting and constructing itself in the void.

What strange things existed there? It was always interested in new discoveries, science, and inventions, and had it marveled at the years ahead of it! What other wonders would it find? Where would it end up?

It had left the voyager to carry out its mission, and explored the world the best that it could in its present state, as it had been still evolving itself into the entity/life form that it had been programmed to alter into.

It had been surrounded with mind-bending wonders and visions as it had explored what it could, seeking answers, and it had returned to surveying the GX1 when it had landed, and later on it had detected some of the humans leaving it, and going outside the energy screen again, and it had examined their free thinking states and realized that it could reproduce one of them easily, as it had been programmed to do, and it had made them all unconscious and had replaced one of them with an identical copy, which it could control and exist in, to enter the energy shield of the GX1.

 

Chapter 5

 

The Second Crash

 

The vehicle was racing along when there was a firm shudder, making them jerk up and down, and it when crashing down into a pool of water below, thumping into the edge of an area of mud, splashing mud and water everywhere, over the windows, blinding their view, and Kruger turned and hit the side of the vehicle, hurting his elbow.

Though Major Ripley seemed to be the only real one to get hit by the impact, and grasped his leg and held it for a few minutes, from the pain of it being bashed against the controls at his front.

“What the hell was that?” he moaned, trying to see out the vehicle, while checking the instruments confused, trying to get what was happening. “This place will be the end of me …”

“It seems to have happened over again!” Larsen stated, still believing they were doomed to death, as if they were only temporally avoiding death.

“But why are we not unconscious this time?” Major Ripley replied swiftly, trying to get what he had missed. “We’ve barely made an hour of our journey from the spacecraft, and have crashed again …”

“Perhaps this world is different from the other world in the void, and there is something else here that is causing it …”

“What something else …” he moaned, lifting his knee, examining it, and placing it back down. “I don’t know whether to be glad with that thought … If this thing is the original alien, then we have had it. But if it is something new, are we better off …?”

“The others were killed …!”

“Great! So now it is down to how bad a death we may receive!”

“Exactly!”

“So how quickly and painfully did that thing in the other vehicle kill them then …?”

“I would say they were about the same …”

“Great! Absolutely great!”

Kruger tried checking the instruments from where he was, and gave up, as they never showed anything.

“What condition is the vehicle in then?” he finally asked.

“It is not working, and it does not have anything on what the cause of it …”

“We’d better contact the others then!”

Major Ripley started using the communications equipment to contact his old friend Major Douglas, and told him, “Our vehicle is down! We have crashed into a pool …”

Major Ripley tried seeing through areas of the windows that had thinner mud over them.

“Your vehicle has crashed!” Major Douglas spluttered out, staggered at what he had told him. “You’d better get out of there now!”

“Why?”

“Just get the hell away from the vehicle …!”

“How will we get transport to move on …?”

“There have been reports of other crashes since all the vehicles crashed earlier, and the occupants have been killed …”

“What direction will we go in …”

“We have your location! Go to your right, and I’ll have a vehicle pick you up as soon as possible! But get as far away from there as possible!”

Major Ripley shuddered, and switched off the communications equipment, and yanked a switch and the vehicle doors all opened up, and water and muck came pouring in, flooding the vehicle, making it sink, and they looked around for an area to get out to.

Kruger pointed at an area near him that was the nearest to solid ground, and he rushed through the outside bog, of thick black chemical stinking muck, going up to his knees, and the others followed.

They were lucky they wore waterproof spacesuits or they would have been soaked in it, and they reached the land and rested their legs, and looked around them.

“We have to go right of the vehicle!” Major Ripley announced, and started leading them in that direction, marching firmly.

Kruger marched after him, and watched Don and Larsen walking together behind him, talking about the crashed vehicle, and examining the damage to the front of the vehicle where it had crashed, and they watched it until a strange vapor cloud shifted about it, like it had some form of intelligence, and the vehicle vanished out of sight.

 

Chapter 6

 

The Time Being

 

A miniature white explosion magically hovered inertly in mid-air, frozen in time, in front of the time being as it concluded its experiments on the newly acquired explosive.

It allowed the explosion to progress at a slow rate, as it walked up to it and studied in every detail, which it had planned to do.

The room was at the top of a high tower of a structure that was not an advanced structure but a building that resembled an ancient fairy-tale/horror film castle, made of square stones barely stuck together, centuries old, which had crumbled away in large regions, and rested high in the air, above any human structure, on a massive rock pinnacle, towering over the mind-bending world, surrounded by a sky that would have startled any alien in the universe with its stars and phenomena, covering almost every square inch, resting on the opposite side of the world from where the GX1 was positioned.

The time being came from an ancient race that had advanced science to incredible lengths, and had colonized an entire galaxy at one time, and after many genetic alterations had turned themselves into a master race, with abilities unheard of before, but had eventually altered themselves into a more warlike race, which had eventually killed itself off in wars, and which had been remembered throughout galaxies for thousands of years.

The few survivors of the race were condemned by other races all over space, as well as being condemned by their own race, and they never attempted to rebuild their empire, which had eventually turned into new types of entities/time beings, who were immortal, and used time travel.

The time being had made a mistake when it had been younger and had been captured and imprisoned on the world, and had made itself the ruler of the world, with its powers, which had grown progressively, over centuries.

Its powers were now colossal, especially in the central galaxy, and it did incredible things, and worked away in its mountain castle carrying out its experiments and explorations, separated from the outside universe.

It created bright flashes of light with its mind, and a loud whirling sounds appeared, similar to a whirlwind, growing from a whisper to a loud mechanical whirl, and it became mingled with a crackling, like a crackling fire, from within it.

The room vibrated around the being as it exploded with power that shuddered through the whole tower!

The room looked like a medieval laboratory, but was full of highly advanced scientific objects, with the being’s other things, which included pieces of strange creatures.

A diagram was sketched across the center of the floor, with symbols around it, and above it the being turned into a bright white light floating and spinning through the air.

It whirled fast, and sparks of colored light went around its fringes, and thousands emerged and spread out across the whole of the room, while the sparks of energy created flashes of light over the damp stone walls, and sounds from it became deafening.

The center of where the time being was turned bright like a sun, and it continued to become brighter, and the whirling increased louder, shaking everything furiously, including the whole stone tower, until it looked as though it would go crashing down and over the cliff, to the fantastic world below.

An explosion of light and sounds blasted out and it suddenly vanished, and the time being traveled away into the past.

Within seconds it made a reappearance, and reformed into what it had been before it had left, reforming into its original self.

The air from it blew everything light around, and a whispering came from somewhere, and its long shape formed, and sounds vanished and altered to a voice from it, chanting strange sounds.

The being screamed as it formed back into a being, and the tower blocks stopped shaking under it, and the energy turned to a whirling light buzzing around its shape!

Shapes and colors formed within it, and an upright almost human-like form appeared, and glowed within the light. The being was over eight feet tall and at least four feet wide at the top, and flickers of its unusual skeleton became visible inside it.

A blast of brightness exploded out with beams of colored light, and vanished away into a cloud of smoke, and the noises stopped, and its massive shape stepped out of the white smoke.

It wore a large black medieval-type cloak, covered in stars and strange symbols, sketched over it, and where its eyes once must have been there were glowing red lights.

The time being had traveled back in time and had carried out its mission, and had reappeared seconds after it had left, and it continued with its experiments on the miniature white explosion, and made it magically hover inertly in mid-air.

 

Chapter 7

 

The Lost World

 

A deep intensely cold haze edged its way over the wonderland world that surrounded them, as Kruger stood examining some vegetation near where they had stopped to rest. It was nothing like anything that he had seen on any of the other worlds that he had visited or seen elsewhere.

He could not get if it was the strange environment about him or all the strange stars blanketing the sky, or something strange existing there, or the universe that they were in, or a combination of them that created different reactions.

Strange vapor clouds shifted about their sides, always following, shadowing them, at a distance – probing them, and analyzing them for some purpose.

He had stopped wondering if they had intelligence a few miles back, when he had proved they had, he had seen Major Ripley realize it too, and he vaguely watched it linger over deep meteorite craters in the mind-bending landscape.

He watched it now to find out what form of life it was. What did it use to exist? What was it doing?

He felt like getting some samples from it, but decided to wait until he was with the others, and they could check if it was dangerous.

A peculiar whisper of something came from an unknown place far away, and he considered if it was from the clouds or something else, and what else it could be.

Major Ripley moved in close to him, with interest.

“How the hell did that happen? The sun rose just before we left the GX1!”

The sun was sinking deeper into the skyline, and areas of fog illuminated like the luminary rays of bright alien moonshine – from the rays beaming from powerful stars.

Gusts of air blew and withdrew in the opposite direction, blowing and sucking, giving Kruger the feeling that something invisible nearby was breathing over him, or something was there and the environment was reacting to its presence and its paranormal powers.

The two paranormal scientists would love it, he was sure. They were out there in another vehicle.

It had been them that had first found the world, and come out with the idea of the GX1 going to the world.

They had become great and famous celebrities aboard the GX1 since saving everyone from the alien, when it had been found out by all the media there, and were now adored by the military and the president, who had been at deaths door when they had saved them, and took them away out of the universe to where the alien could not go.

The media on the GX1 had given the story full coverage for weeks, and the president and military had given the two paranormal scientists full military protection around their laboratory and scientists and all the equipment to investigate everything that they could about what had been experienced by everyone when they had left the universe.

What everyone had experienced there and had said had been a mass of confusion, and many people thought that something else had happened!

Hundreds of scientists all over the ship were now working on finding a way to get them back to the normal universe.

Even though many did not want to leave, and wished to investigate everything there for the totality of the voyage – as they were sure they would not experience anything like it throughout the rest of the voyage, and perhaps their lives.

The surrounding space was incredible, and was packed with a density that was not thought possible, and had been for a long time, and such a state of density and such large suns would have caused the whole region to collapse into a huge black hole or at least an immense sun or suns, and scientists and everyone else aboard had been and were investigating it and thousands of other discovered phenomena.

Many scientists and others thought the whole place was a central galaxy where all the rest of the universe was imploding to, and that there were outer small galaxies being pulled into.

The two paranormal scientists had tried informing others of their investigations of paranormal disturbances there, and had soon withheld their research from them, as they had soon found out that they refused to accept anything of that nature, and they now avoided giving any details of anything of that nature, especially to the military.

They had given Kruger some of their findings and thoughts of paranormal activity and strange occurrences occurring there, and he had given them his thoughts about it, and that he was not fully sure what to make of it as they had only proven that large amounts of strange energy surges and energy reactions were coming from there, and it was then that they had informed him of the discovery of the world that they were on, and that they had detected it as one of the high energy spots being investigated by them.

Since the main point of investigation of the GX1 was worlds, and that nobody had else found any proper worlds, it was soon a major place to investigate, and the scientists all voted to go to the world, and the two paranormal scientist were congratulated with another major discovery when they found it not only inhabitable but full of advanced and unknown phenomena, and mind-bending wonders, which were detected from the GX1, and with there being so many scientists and others being on the voyage for such discoveries, a hundred vehicles were allowed out to map and investigate it.

They found the remains of some form of advanced civilization, at the opposite region of the world, from scans of the world from orbit, before it had landed, and many wanted to see the site.

Kruger had been amazed at the findings of the scientists on the day before they had left the ship. There were energy surges and strange occurrences all around the world, and sightings of life forms and what was thought to be entities all over the world.

Nobody, not even the two paranormal scientists, knew what was there, and many even withdrew from visiting there, especially after the encounter with the alien.

The other scientists ignored that and continued with their explorations.

Kruger had wished to join the two paranormal scientists at first, as he knew they wished to visit somewhere in particular and that they had found something there, but he had decided not to disappoint Major Ripley and to join him.

Kruger wondered where the two scientists were, and if they had crashed like they had, and he watched the pale sun vanish into the thickening gray mist, which started to surround them.

 

Chapter 8

 

The Fog

 

On the horizon a big moon brightly shone more light across their path, as it rose over the horizon, with its lunar radiance reflecting intense starlight, and Kruger studied it with surprise, watching swirled clouds shifting over its surface, as he had not seen a moon with an atmosphere and clouds, and he even saw areas of water and green shades of what had to be large vegetation.

The fog crept over the landscape and began covering most of the swamps, and thickened so much that the powerful beams of starlight could only penetrate thin areas of it.

As they marched on behind Major Ripley almost walking into it, while ignoring it, Larsen started getting nervous and began complaining to Major Ripley, who ignored him at first, with being so determined to get away from the region of the vehicle.

His legs became stuck in a deep bog of stinking vegetation, and Kruger saw he was getting tired, and watched the others and noticed that they were complaining too.

It was then that Major Ripley finally slowed, and Kruger looked about, and saw that the fog made a circle around them, at the same distance all the way round them, and was intensifying rapidly, and he knew that they were trapped in it.

“Where are we going …?” Larsen moaned heavily, tired, fighting for air, angry that he had been put into another situation.

Major Ripley stopped annoyed at the way things were going, and walked back towards them.

“What is the problem? We’ve hand held weapons that have been used on worlds all over our galaxy – which have beaten some of the most largest, deadliest, invincible, and advanced aliens and civilizations …”

He swiftly removed his weapon like an ancient gunfighter, and swiftly smashed an immense meteorite boulder into dust, and disintegrating the rest in seconds.

Kruger and Don got his point, and it amazed Kruger that the vehicles had seemed so defenseless against attacks. On normal worlds their hand weapons were enough, and as powerful as the largest bulky weapons on most aliens worlds, and were probably of actually great use here if their imaginations never kept throwing situations up of what could exist, which the alien in the void had done, since it declared war on them.

It was only thought that higher intelligent beings of big advanced civilizations had the means to match their defenses.

Just to create a weak version of the energy shield of the GX1 took far more energy than most of the largest alien spacecrafts could produce.

“You never saw that thing kill the rest of my crew!” Larsen moaned, slightly satisfied by the dramatic display and the deadliness of their weapons, reminding him of the power of the weapons, which they had not used.

Major Ripley seemed to recall some of his old training, and pointed at the weapons on their spacesuits, and ordered them to remove them, and they removed them, and he had them practice firing them at objects.

Kruger fired away at distant objects amazed their power, and continued firing into the distance, testing what range they could go to. It amazed him that they never got the chance to use them. He was even sure by the way people reacted to them that there was some rule and spacecraft rule preventing people using them, unless it was they had to, to save their lives.

He still thought that they should have more of the military on the vehicles though. He tried firing into a dense area of the thick fog, now going around them like wheel rim, and was amazed that it reacted and split open to avoid the energy blasts, and it quickly filled itself in afterwards.

The world about their sides was full of swamps, bogs, ditches, and bubbling pools of stinking chemicals and water. Chemicals in thick concentrated pools poured out gases through the cooling air giving it a sulfur stench, which they gave an occasional cough to, when it got deep and concentrated in their lungs.

The fog crept more rapidly towards them all around them, and Major Ripley gasped slightly, and smelt the air, and announced mainly to Larsen, “We’ll have to enter that! There is no other way! Besides we will be getting help here soon …”

“From your communications device – giving out our location?”

“Correct! There is not enough power in the thing for communications at the distance the others are, but it will give our location to them …”

“So we only need to handle this fog …” Don coolly replied, surprising Major Ripley again with his coolness, which always seemed to be there, as though he knew what would happen.

It gave Kruger a great deal of happiness thinking that he was not just a twin, but Don was him from the future, and that he would survive such situations.

Yet at times he doubted it, and knew time could be altered anyway. He wondered if he shot himself, and Don was a future version of him, if he would vanish upon his death.

 

Chapter 9

 

Trapped

 

The fog engulfed them, and swiftly thickened up about them, and blinded them, but in areas in thinned out and they caught glimpses of the ground beneath their feet as they plodded on, wondering if the others could actually find them there, and why they had not taken more drastic measures earlier on to avoid it, when it had started appearing.

Kruger studied the thick fog about him, seeing what it did, and saw that it reacted less now that they were in it and not at the fringes of it, and wondered if he was part of it or something now, or it just considered them part of it.

Suddenly, a light appeared deep in the fog to their side, and Major Ripley took them close to it, surely considering if it was the recovery vehicle. Yet Kruger watched it vibrating up and down, and brighten, and its beam pointed near them.

A sluggish gurgling of something wading deep in and out of bogs ahead moved their way, confusing them more, and Major Ripley stopped his rush forwards, and came to a halt in a thinner area of fog where the visibility was better, and his familiar rugged look shone out of the fog, listening and observing everything ahead, in confusion.

He then placed the light near his head, and stood with his light shining over his face.

“We better be prepared …” he muttered. “I never heard any vehicles sounds from there …”

“I never either …” Kruger agreed, looking concerned, considering what they were encountering.

“We better have our weapons ready then!” Major Kruger stated, removing his weapon, and waited for the others to remove their weapons and get the feel of them.

“Perhaps we should inform the others in the vehicles?” Larsen asked. “We could check if it is anything to do with them?”

Major removed his communicator, and silently started trying to contact the vehicle with Major Douglas, and when he could not pick it up he tried to contact any vehicle that he could, and stood surprised when he never.

“Could this fog stop the communicators working …?” he asked them, trying to grasp the situation.

“Not normally!” Kruger answered first. “But this fog, and it being on this world, in an alternative universe, changes the rules.”

“So once again it could be anything!”

Larsen moved in close, to show his worried features.

“Don’t forget that thing that attacked us …” he stated, and moved backwards, as Don moved in, and Kruger examined him, and his forced reactions.

“Will they be able to detect where we are with the communicators out?” Don asked them, with a glimpse of worry.

Kruger could not be certain if he was really reacting or not!

Yet it did seem as though he was experiencing new things now, and had not actually gone through the encounters, and he was sure that if he was from the future that things had changed as they were now in an alternative universe, and he was reacting to the fact that he would be experiencing new things, and he wondered again if he was there to prevent something from happening, without altering anything else.

Yet Kruger realized that there was no real proof, and that his reactions were really different, and he saw that he could not depend on such fantasies, and he recalled that he had not originally believed in time travel, and especially not in traveling backwards in time.

Why had nothing been discovered there? The technology and all the research into it would have at least proven its existence!

Major stood checking his communicator device, and put it away, and avoided replying to Don. Surely to avoid adding to their problems!

“There was a device on my spacesuit sending out footage of what happened!”

“So we better stay around here!” Larsen added. “As they will arrive there then …”

“Correct! But we better check what that light is as best as we can, without being seen.”

Kruger realized that he would properly never experience anything like this place and this universe again if he made it back alive to the normal universe and the Earth. He would remember it forever, and he was sure he would be remembered in the history books for taking part in it all.

He wondered if it would be proven that time travel existed, and he realized if it did and Don had traveled back in time that he would have to go through everything over again, and that he may alter things and do things differently from what Don had done, and that he might do something that alters things by accident, and that he could also be stuck in a scenario of travel back in time and living out the events for the rest of his life.

 

Chapter 10

 

The Beast

 

Strange multicolored streaks of starlight exploded through thin fog, and Kruger was reminded of the fast rotation of the world, and in the sky above him massive blinding stars were appearing.

The light from one star’s flickering streak hit his face like a desert sun being shaded by something. It was a truly unique world that saw no darkness, and probably would never know it.

He wondered again, from his normal scientific perspective, what the larger and more advanced life forms on the world would be like in such an environment. They had seen little so far, as the spacecraft had landed in one of the most barn regions of it, as there had been few regions for landing the immense spacecraft.

The lights above rapidly engulfed them, and they lost more of what little sight they had, as they had briskly sheltered their eyes, and still tried to examine everything.

If only the vehicle had not crashed and they were out there exploring where they were supposed to. He would be extremely annoyed if they found the things that he wanted to discover without him.

Thick volcanic soil shrouded everything, covering their boots with muck, and their lower spacesuit with dust, and Kruger imagined the mind-bending landscapes beyond, and he realized that he no longer felt tired.

It was shocking how easily they had got trapped and lost, and the worst part was he could not realize how they could have avoided it. They should have stuck to the exact place that they were to be, for the vehicle to find them. But in the dense fog with all its vast dangers they soon kept altering course, and everything turned indistinguishable.

At one point slight gaps leading through into distant areas showed outer empty fogless regions. But Major Ripley stuck to the same general direction, and he was too tired to alter his course.

A peculiar whistle still shadowed them from an unknown place, driving Kruger insane trying to identify it.

Their legs almost became stuck in some deep bogs of stinking rotting vegetation and chemicals, which resembled quicksand as it grew in depth, and he would wonder how such chemicals got there. Many smelt like they had been dumped there by some industrial site, and he considered if an intelligent species there could have built civilizations there. But his mind refused to accept anything without further evidence, and he continued on going.

Then, out of nowhere, a light emerged through some strange undergrowth, and its radiance pulsated like a living entity, magically illuminating the fog and strange tree forms, creating mind-bending shadows that weaved and probed though the mist.

While they silently and casually stopped and observed it, heavy pounds of something of incredible size and weight rushed out towards them, causing them to scurry away without being able to see anything behind them.

They furiously moved their legs in and out of bogs as it grew nearer and deadlier, causing their legs to become painful and tired, shifting away to hard ground, to be able to escape better.

It was like their last stand, and being on the edge of their destruction, and Kruger watched how each of them reacted, and noticed Don reacted the least again, and even looked as if he had no intention of trying to kill the thing with his weapon.

They ran almost blindly up and down over bogs and humps, rushing through to where they believed there was flat ground.

Heavy beast sounds furiously exploded out nearby, and clearly chased after them, and Kruger considered turning and firing his weapon. It was common for large animals to become frightened and withdraw from being fired on.

Loud explosions surely would scare it enough to avoid them!

It was like a strange nightmare, and finally annoyed enough at Major Ripley’s avoidance of doing anything at all to save them he swiftly turned and blasted away at what looked like an immense shadow on the fog, where the sounds exploded out!

They were breathless, and they all stared blankly at him, and he wondered what Major Ripley was thinking, and what his explanation for not using his weapon would be.

The thing, as far as he could see and hear, never even acknowledged his direct hit on it, and it left him confused. Firstly, the energy beam he blasted into there could have been weakened by the thick fog, and he tried to recall if it had been and anything that he had heard about it, and he decided to try again if it appeared visible to him, and he considered if this was why Major Ripley had not fired.

Their legs could not take them fast enough, and the thing soon started closing in on them, and Kruger cursed their stupid idea of running, as they could have entered a thin area of the fog and used all their weapons on it at the one time, and they would not have tired themselves and allowed the thing to think they were its prey.

The shape of a vehicle appearing through the vapor was blissful, and they all stared fascinated with it and in their luck, and Kruger spotted Don’s reactions and that he was surprised.

Its lights radiated its shape and them, and they forced their legs to go faster to avoid the thing behind them pulling a final surprise on them before they could be saved.

The vehicle and the appearance of two other vehicles at its side was ecstasy, and a glimpse of reality amidst their surrounding desolate hell.

It was like a phantom place out on the edge of realism, on the bounds of what lay beyond – with the beats charging out of the depths of hell, and they were reappearing into reality.

The place looked static, and supernaturally glowing, and Kruger considered if he could have the paranormal scientists check if there was any paranormal activity there.

Forms of plants broke to pieces as they ran through them, and large tree vegetation looked as if they were ready to fall to dust, as though it were suspended there on the edge of reality!

Behind him, within shifting lights of stars, shifting through the fog with the world’s fast rotation, he finally saw a ghost image of the thing chasing them, shifting out of the fog covering its hideous deadly features.

Yet all his looks back never showed him a proper view of the heavy monster thing rampaging towards them, and he wondered if the thing was playing with them – like a cat with a mouse, and waiting until it fully had them – before paralyzing them with fear by rushing out at them at full speed.

His mind conjured up monster creatures as they moved to where the vehicles were, and they rushed into one, exhausted and staggered, and at the doorway Kruger watched and listened as the door shut and the vehicle left, and he heard hungry grunts from it and its powerful movements rapidly taking it as close to them as it could, and he saw a giant ghost monster cat creature floating out of the mist, as it leaped through the air at them, snapping its massive jaws.

 

Chapter 11

 

The GX1 Discovery

 

The time being had sensed the landing of the incredible GX1 from its immense surges of energy blasting through time, at least a century before it had occurred, and further out in time than it could normally travel, especially with its limited power.

At first it had resembled a miniature black hole with its incomprehensible powers, which it had never seen before, or even heard of from its recollections of its mighty empire.

Its pure magnitude even made it avoid it for many years, for fear of destruction, but it then realized that it would confront it, and would have to discover what was there, which it considered was one of the main reasons for the fall of the empire of its race.

It soon started work on ways to conceal itself and avoid detection, and began to send probes that concealed its presence, and started to get information on what was there.

The colossal size of it left it staggered! Its race had never built anything like it! It had found ways to travel space at the speeds that it needed, and had not attempted to create such a space vehicle. It was sure it had come from a distance galaxy!

It soon proved that it had the ability to become undetected, and thought of the uses it could use its technology and knowledge for.

It was sure that it was the last of its species, and thought it had happened because of its location, dwelling far beyond the outer universe, and because it was more advanced than the rest of its species. It surely now was far superior to all its ancestors, and the greatest scientist, with one flaw, of it being imprisoned on the world, even with it being the ruler of the world, with its powers.

It had many times thought of reproducing its species, in an altered form, capable of surviving and being a master race, and creating a better and proper empire that was capable of surviving, but it never bothered, as it would have taken it years to create the right resources.

Its powers were immense though, and it could alter and do incredible things, and it worked away in its castle carrying out its experiments and explorations, and considered where it could go with the space vehicle.

 

Chapter 12

 

The Center of Space

 

Trillions of magnificent stars shone everywhere, turning the whole sky golden, except for the colossal black hole at its center.

The sight was fantastic, and probably the most magnificent sight Kruger had ever seen, and he thought he sensed mysterious and dangerous things existed there.

They stood on the flat top of a high hill, overlooking the world for approximately fifty miles in every direction, and watched the fog blanketing the entire frontal world, going into the horizon, where the GX1 was positioned.

Around twenty of the main vehicles on the world were positioned behind all the men from the vehicles, positioned around the edge of the cliff, where the majority were examining the incredible view.

Many filmed the sight, which made the whole voyage worth taking part in, and the rest were scientists carry out their work with their equipment, with some of the military, including Major Ripley, checking the world for dangers.

Kruger stood with the two paranormal scientists, Mitchel and Bryan, with their equipment and scientists, examining everything around them.

They had confirmed it was the central galaxy of the universe, and the black hole, where they had appeared there from, was at the exact center of it, in the middle of the sky, with them examining it, facing the entire the center of the universe, and center of space.

The black hole interested the majority of the scientists and military, as it was considered to be the only way to return to the universe, and it was the only proper view of it that had emerged so far – from a distance away from it – which allowed all of it to be properly visible – with its influence on the surrounding galaxy.

The entire galaxy seemed to be in orbit around it, and Kruger gasped, wondering how they had managed to escape from it. But he knew the power of the GX1, and what it was capable of.

Kruger wondered if there was a central galaxy at the center of his universe, and wondered how they could have missed such a sight, and the multitude of stars.

“So that was the center of space?” Kruger asked the two paranormal scientists, staring at the center of the black hole, recalling their appearance there.

“Yes! Their instruments proved it …” Bryan replied. “It seems to be centered perfectly …”

He wondered why they were so positive, and how they had detected it.

The red rock about them glowed brightly from the ultra-bright light from the sky, and it was like a dream world.

The world’s fast rotation had put them directly under the center of the central galaxy, and the suns now virtually covered all the sky, in all their different sizes, going deep into the immense galaxy. They were so packed together that there was virtually no blackness of space left in the sky.

Kruger examined the whirled black circle of the center of space, with the suns whirled around it, going into all the horizons. The stars whirled around it made it look as if it really covered the whole sky. There were lines of suns going towards it! Some suns were visibly moving across the sky towards it.

They would end up going into it, and being unable to travel through the gateway, like they had, would be destroyed. The debris from the suns thinly covered the whole central galaxy with particles, gas, dust, stones, boulders, and many other things.

Debris from it was scattered all over the world, and there were areas of dense space clouds and debris everywhere in the sky, with massive clouds of asteroids.

It was almost beyond his comprehension how much power it had. The center of space was clearly responsible for the central galaxy having so many massive suns, novas, and other strange sun formations.

They watched a sun burn bright in the depths of space, and they saw another asteroid soar across the atmosphere in a ball of flames, blazing through the atmosphere, leaving a trail of smoke, being followed by a shower of small meteorites streaking across the sky.

A distant thud was felt and heard from where it crashed into the world, and a large cloud of smoke revealed its crash sight.

 

Chapter 13

 

The Paranormal Abnormality

 

The edge of the cliff at the other side of the hill went down for many thousand feet, with only a faint trace of the fog at the bottom as mist, covering an immense ancient meteorite cavity covering the entire region below, going out for miles.

All the people in the vehicle examined it calculatedly and calmly, before the vehicle went down to the bottom, and Kruger wondered again why they refused to fly high above the ground, as it was far safer, and could even be done at a level that they would be able to see what was there, and he realized their response to it again, and that though the vehicles were safe they could crash on worlds such as it, which they had done already.

The world below, as they approached it, soon started to show signs of strangeness, and that weird things existed there. Immense weird vegetation covered great regions, and sights and sounds like things out of ancient horror movies emerged there, and he thought he heard a cry of an immense werewolf.

Kruger had always been interested in proper paranormal activity, if it existed. Even after all that they had been through and discovered there still was not anything that proved that anything existed there, and he was sure that both the paranormal scientists had realized it.

Their instruments detected what they claimed was a high level of paranormal from a particular spot in the direction that they had chosen to take their group of vehicles in, and none of the other scientists had a clue what it was or what the two paranormal scientists believed was there.

They were not so far wrong about anything, or had put forward any claims of supernatural things that could be thought of as being anything other than a check for what might exist there. But there was a suggestion that they were looking to prove something of that nature existed.

What were they expecting to find, and what actually existed?

Their instruments detected high levels of something that was worth investigating, and all the people interested in what they had found so far had joined the expedition.

Could what was there be from beyond normal universes, and a supernatural being?

All the scientists there were very accurate in their investigations and checked everything that they did, searching for things or proof of things many scientists like them dreamed of coming across, and never took anything without reflection.

They wanted to investigate what other scientists could not, and do it to a far greater degree than before.

Kruger had wondered on many occasions if they would eventually find something with their detection methods and equipment that had gone undetected by everyone.

The equipment that they had fitted into the vehicle with them was nothing less than the most advanced and interesting.

The vehicle had six people in it, which was him, the two paranormal scientists, and three of their associate scientists, who helped with the equipment, which was packed solid into the vehicle all around them, with them speedily monitoring it.

They all had the same thing in common and that was to find things that transcended the boundaries of natural science and discoveries, and see if the supernatural existed in any form.

 

Chapter 14

 

The Formation

 

Their worst fears soon started to become real all around them, as they traveled into another fog formation, which was formed like miniature concentrated hurricane, and none of them thought such a small formation could create any problems.

They hurtled straight into it ignoring all the signs of danger, trusting their knowledge of what normally existed. Yet the density of it was staggering and Kruger felt the vehicle was being slowed, like it was thickening into water, and he spotted the brightest stars in thinner areas vanish.

At one point they all expeditiously rushed to their positions, recalling emergency procedures, and prepared themselves, wondering what such a formation could throw at them.

“Tell me if the speed vastly decreases,” Mitchel uttered to a scientist at the front of the vehicle, controlling the vehicle, figuring out a way to compensate.

“We’ve lost all communications,” he replied, as he examined a display.

“We could land!” Bryan stated, making them all gasp at the possibilities of what could be there and could occur on the ground.

“Why do they not go up, over it …?” Kruger finally queried, wishing to consult the onboard computer.

“That is an idea …!” Bryan replied.

“We can do it if we have to?” Mitchel answered.

“I do not think we can do that …” the scientist steering the vehicle answered back. “This vehicle can only stay up high for so long, and if we run out of power and get stranded out here, it could be very dangerous – as we’ve already seen by the deaths that have occurred here on this world …”

All five scientists avoided looking at each other, with their horrified glares, recalling all the details that had emerged on the hideous deaths of the people in the crashed vehicles, and their remains that they had found.

The upper layers of above the wild storm seemed more deadly, and it was clear that they were no longer in control of their fate.

Again Kruger realized that they had not expected such a scenario!

In its deep depths Kruger saw faint lights, and then distant flashes, as if some supernatural disorder burst into its confines.

It gave him sensations of traveling into a maelstrom, with it starting to overwhelm them with its forces.

A swift flaring exploded out going straight through it, and was followed by a shudder from its blast, and impact on it. The explosive sounds of the thunder that followed held them spellbound.

From the window, Kruger saw the expanse of lashing waves of what had to be water, shifting around with tremendous velocity and energy, from the cloud formation over it.

As crazy flashes of lightening flickered around them, with deafening tremors, he imagined it floating over the depths of hell.

His eyes glared, as he barely believed the destructive forces lashing out at them, and could hardly grasp how such tremendous forces could be generated from so little.

“There’s something ahead!” the scientist at the front declared, showing them an obscure shape emerging in front of them.

 

Chapter 15

 

Ancient Civilization

 

The parts of structures, buried beneath sand and debris, had appeared below them, and Kruger realized that there had been an advanced civilization there after all, and what was left of their civilization was buried away in the small desert region, with parts of structures sticking up from under dunes.

The area was closer to the sun, and in the brightness there they had spotted a group of scientists from the GX1 already there, and on their approach had seen that they had been excavating the most interesting structures.

When Kruger jumped out the vehicle he had instantly felt the hot temperature at the area, and had realized how well the vehicle controlled its temperature.

There were no clouds, or the blasted fog, and they were glad, as none of them wanted to enter any cloud formations again.

They were lucky to be alive, and they all now realized the dangers of being on such a world!

Kruger felt his spacesuit clothing alter its temperature, but it was not good enough, as his head was not covered by it, and it made him feel warmer than he wanted to be, so he adjusted his spacesuit to a colder temperature.

He studied the bright, now warm looking stars, and observed faraway sand being blown about by gusts of wind. The area was like an oasis on this world, but it only seemed that way, and they had actually traveled a great distance from the other regions.

Even the small creatures of the world, which darted about, examining them, looked like miniature monsters.

The structures the others were entering were very primitive structures to them, but advanced looking to them now.

They strolled through heaps of sand in buildings, and Kruger wondered if their civilization would ever fall and turn into the place, and have beings like them from another universe exploring their remains.

Sand and bushes blew about wildly outside from different directions, as if unable to decide where to go.

Sand was everywhere about them, and parts of metal from machinery was sticking out, covered in the dust.

It was hotter in the shade, with the high temperature building up there, and he rested and watched small lizard-like animals marching passed buildings, showing them they lived there, while others watched them from hiding places.

Many of the scientists were surprised at the amounts of them, and the lack of larger ones. Some of the scientists complained at their deadly reactions to them, and Kruger realized what they had meant when he saw what looked like a large mouse alter from what it looked like with its friendly expressions, and fold back the skin around its neck and display large sharp fangs, with a snarl.

They clearly had never seen weapons, or had known the large inhabitants of the civilization, and were the largest life forms in the area, and were the dominant species of the place.

The species interested him a great deal as a scientist, and he would normal have spent a great deal of time with them, but there was far more here, and they were in another universe and had encountered far more, and all he did was film the best of what he found, and look for anything of interest in the remains of technology of the race that had once dwelled there.

In the interior of a structure they entered an underground chamber and heard underground creatures making noises, from beyond the walls, as they burrowed into tunnels, below the sand.

It was a world that would never know darkness, and he studied any differences in the life forms, and wondered if they slept the same as they did, if at all.

Their small footprints on the floors were different and clearly indicated that they had adapted to being in sand regions.

At one point they heard one of the scientists make a discovery, and all the scientists around there left what they were doing and went to investigate, not wanting to miss anything.

Under a heap of small stones and debris, the scientist had uncovered a form of skeleton, almost like a fossil, which had resemblances to an upright ape creature, but on uncovering its skull it proved to have a far more unusual shape, which disappointed some of the scientists. It was believed to have lived in the building that they were in! Some other scientists claimed that they had found the remains of advanced technology, but they never fully proved it.

 

Chapter 16

 

The Destruction of the Civilization

 

It was when the leading archeologists from the GX1 were bought in that the scientists moved further out and started finding buildings that were far more advanced, and not buried under sand, where the civilization was clearly centered around, and showed that the scientists had been examining rural regions.

Kruger did not know if he was happy with the idea of a race existing there that had destroyed its civilization in the way that it had, and realized how long ago it would have happened, and that they could handle them anyway if they were still about.

Yet the destructive way they had ruthlessly attacked was clear all over the structures.

It was strange walking about such structures, especially with there being no inhabitants about. Throughout his life he had never really seen any empty unpopulated city regions, and his mind clearly never completely accepted that it existed.

There were no signs of any inhabitants being anywhere, but his mind kept giving him vivid images of them being there!

It was also strange to see such a place covered in such growth – like forms of moss, shrubs, and weeds – with thick layers of dirt over all the structures.

They went through corridor after corridor into mysterious mazes, walking briskly without finding anything more than stone walls. There were barely any window holes or anything to let in light, but there were the remains of lighting devices on ceilings.

Major structures were soon found and they went to explore them, and listened to the explorers there.

Though they all agreed on the fact that something had happened, nobody agreed on what had actually occurred there, and there were even arguments between them on what had happened, as many believed a war had taken place between them, and that it was what should be agreed to as to what happened, and, of course, the others refused to accept it had been a war between them, and most of them believed that they had been attacked by outsiders.

Later Kruger was amazed to discover that they had found and verified that something else had destroyed the civilization, and that it had incredible powers.

 

Chapter 17

 

The Jungle

 

Absolute horror struck Kruger as he woke, as the vehicle that he was in was racing over the top of a large region of jungle vegetation and something had shot out straight under the vehicle, thumping it upwards, where it was out of range of their weapons, and the vehicles at their sides.

“What the hell was that?” Major Ripley moaned loudly, to all the people in the vehicle behind him, and they all looked out the windows, and down at the jungle below, and Kruger looked back at where it had happened, and saw a black shape shift through the vegetation, racing in their direction, and he checked the speed that they were going at and considered if it could catch up with them, and if they should speed up.

From a screen at the front they saw a camera view of the damage below, and that the thing had grabbed and ripped away a massive chunk of metal from the bottom of the vehicle.

It clearly had attempted to pull them down and had failed!

“That thing is still chasing us …” Major Ripley stated, checking a side view of the jungle.

“What was that?” Larsen moaned, listening to a side window, where he had clearly heard it.

“What did it sound like?” Bryan asked, trying to hear anything that he could.

“A howl! Like some monster …!”

Major Ripley for some reason hesitated over if he should speed the vehicle up, as he would have to monitor the vehicle and journey if he did, and he was sure nothing living could catch them.

All of them only started ignoring it when nothing further happened, and Kruger realized that Major Ripley was not bothered that much about the dangers, and now accepted them.

It was a bit worrying as it left them open to attacks, especially on this world!

Suddenly Kruger stomach leapt as the whole vehicle fell downwards, clearly being pulled downwards by something of immense strength and weight.

Major Ripley automatically increased the speed forward, while lifting it upwards, but it hardly moved, and they all gasped, thinking what was there, and Major Ripley increased the power, and force to pull away.

From a screen they examined what looked like the inside of something’s massive jaws, and Major Ripley removed the weapons, and handed them to them and opened the windows.

“Kill it if you can!” he ordered, being the head of the vehicle.

Without hesitation they all started firing downwards through the windows, until there was a hideous scream below and the whole vehicle shot upwards and away, and its massive jaws could be seen falling away to the ground and into an empty region of the jungle, and Kruger finally caught a glimpse of it as it turned to land on the ground, and its enormous cat-like features, with its cunning and intelligence.

After the attack Major Ripley never lowered his defenses and raced forward, while keeping the other vehicles at the same speed, and at a higher height than he thought it could reach, as he was sure there were far more, as many of the others in the vehicles gave claims of sightings of them in the regions around them.

The sun and immense stars were blazing overhead, and over the canopy of the clusters of jungle, and the air was roasting and they closed all the windows, and allowed the vehicle to properly lower the temperature to the correct level, and as Kruger wondered what things existed there he spotted a distant pinnacle of rock appear from below the horizon, and saw that the jungle ended there and that something else was going to replace it.

He the saw the others all start giving reactions to it and that the two paranormal scientists knew it was there and that they had something planned.

Dark shapes emerged resembling evil figures, but altered to strange rock formations – as they constantly adjusted – and the landscape altered about them.

Finally the whole of their surroundings turned to a region of unusual hill and mountains, where there clearly had a one point been a great deal of faulty lines creating a great deal of destruction, and there were places where there had been recent earthquakes, but not as massive as they had been.

It was there that they all saw the true size of the rock pinnacle as it stretched upwards into the sky like a giant clawed finger, scrapping at the stars, with its artificial top on the biggest star in the sky.

 

Chapter 18

 

The Alien Castle

 

The giant pinnacle was tremendous, and everyone in the vehicles gasped as they flew up it, where they were confronted by the dangers of landing on the structure at the top.

No sane being could have built it! Anything staying in it must have been or was mad or extremely determined to avoid something dangerous!

It was beyond comprehension how it could have stayed up and not crashed down below long ago! All its giant boulder chunks were not cemented together, and barely straight.

There were resemblances of ancient monasteries in it, but it had to be a castle, and an alien castle. Some form of alien race had to have built it!

On their approach to it Kruger saw that it had two towers that made it look like an old fairy-tale castle that he had once seen, and he gasped at how they must have built it.

The towers of stone were so thin and high that he was not sure how they managed stay up above the landscape and consistently examined them over and over trying to see what it was that he was missing.

The pinnacle itself looked dangerous and incapable of supporting itself, and looked impossible to climb. There were no paths visible that could have been used to climb up it. It was so high up that he was sure that they would not be able to breathe properly outside the vehicle, and that they would have to put on their spacesuit helmets.

They flew carefully around its thick gray stone walls examining it in detail, and still they found no real way in. There were only small gaps in the walls, for breathing inside, which suggested there was enough air, but going by the main races he had seen on other worlds they could live on very low amounts of air, and many breathed different things completely.

He could only gasp and wonder at what type of alien would have built such a dangerous structure, and was sure it may be warlike or defensive to an extraordinary level.

They landed on snow on its flat roof, which looked as if it could collapse, and Kruger started wondering why the two paranormal scientists wanted to land there. They claimed it was major source of the paranormal energy that they had detected on the world, and he soon started to wonder if it was how it had been built, by something using paranormal forces.

Most of them were reluctant to get out of the vehicles, and when they did stood near them, ready to get back in them.

Kruger waded his feet through the snow covering the top, and he stopped to view the unbelievable sky, which was tremendous, and worth being there for. It was the biggest galaxy or anything that he had ever seen! Its stars were all over the central region, everywhere, glowing brighter there, with it being so high up.

He stood at the edge of the structure like he was standing on the top of the world, as though the world below were his mighty empire, and he wondered if the aliens there considered themselves the rulers of the world. Yet nothing showed their civilization and technology were anything like the remains of the last civilization, and he wondered if it had been them that had attacked and destroyed their civilization, and he gasped at the height that it was over the world, under his feet, and the sheer drop of it astounded him, going off into the distance.

A bluish horizon appeared at his side and he studied it, checking the differences in it than the other worlds he had been on, and he watched a massive meteorite blaze across the sky there, and heard a distant thud of it impacting, which was a sound that he had become used to there, and he saw how big it was. Its size was huge as it sent up a massive ball of flames and smoke going right up to the sky, and he considered what it would be like living on a world with the meteorites and their constant threat.

He was unsure if they could fully protect them from them, as some of the cavities they left were immense, and recent, and he was sure something would eventually happen if they stayed there for long enough.

The sun was already rising towards them from the other side of the world, and it looked animated with its swift acceleration.

A gust of wind blew up snow dust along the edge of the roof, and he watched the others checking the roof.

Some even stamped on the surface to check its safety, and show what their thoughts were about it, and others used their equipment to recheck it more properly, and the rest who were keen scientists and archeologists ignored it, and eagerly explored their new find.

Kruger joined in, and brushed away the crusted snow to reveal thick stone slabs below him, and he watched the two paranormal scientists helping brush away the crusted snow to reveal an extra large slab over the center of the roof.

Hinges made of some unknown material held it in place on every side, and there was no indication as how to open it, and they stood examining all its edges for a noticeable way in.

“Would you just open the entrance?” Major Ripley finally ordered one of the other members of the military.

All of them stepped away, and he lift up his weapon into the air, and a beam fired out from it at a hinge and at the rest of them, and flashes of bright light came from them and the stone crashed into the structure, throwing up a cloud of dust into the air.

Kruger observed the peculiar shape of the structure and noticed there were signs that someone a long time ago had done the same as they had and used a weapon to remove the entrance before, and that it had been repaired.

“What shall we do if this structure is inhabited?” Major Ripley asked the two scientists, who had resumed command of the mission because of their experience, and they were there because of them and their detection of the energy source there.

“Even though this structure does not look as if it has been lived in for a long time,” Mitchel replied, “the source that we are investigating is active within it! So we better be prepared for an encounter with something, as I do not think it could be created by something that is not living or without intelligence …”

Kruger gasped, as he knew he did not play around with such things, and that if they suggested something was there, that there more than likely be far more.

Layers of dirt hung in the air as Kruger followed the two scientists down into it, who were following Major Ripley, who marched in first with his weapon ready.

Kruger considered what could possibly be there and if he was going to get another surprise, and thought about the scientific viewpoint of what they were claiming while he observed its dark interior engulfing them.

Why were they so enthusiastic to discover what was there anyway? They had avoided all questioning on it, and showed more interested in it than anything else! Like it was the ultimate treasure, and their form of treasure, which was buried away there.

Even the insects there were unseen before, and had characteristics that they had not seen anywhere. A yellow piece of flying slime hung in the air, and had the characteristics of flying, hanging in the air, and moving with notable form of flying and moving that they had found, even after many examinations, and must have a secret means of doing it that they had never encountered, and it vastly interested a great deal of the scientists, as if they could not pinpoint it and find a way of reproducing it, it would be worth a great deal back home.

Yet it could be something that existed in this universe that they were in that allowed it to exist, and it may not be possible for them to bring it back to use if they returned to their universe.

The inside of the structure was incredible and looked like they were encountering something from Earth’s early past, and an ancient castle that resembled a haunted castle, which was long gone from civilization and not even believed to have existed by the majority of people.

The wind occasionally howled around through the corridor in front of them, as air was caught by gusts of wind.

He was not sure if it was an alien’s form of a castle or what it was for, as its location was strange, and he could not even imagine what was behind it anymore.

For a moment he felt a strange feeling that something had detected them from over at the towers, and was amazed that the two paranormal scientist reacted simultaneously with him, and he saw the others had even detected something, including Major Ripley, who went on the defense and seemed confused about what it had been, and held his weapon ready for an encounter.

 

Chapter 19

 

The Interior

 

Kruger jerked backwards, as a loud thud came through the floor, from the lower world, from a massive meteorite impact, which sounded close, and again wondered why the inhabitants of the world had never reacted when it had happened, and he realized that they would have adapted genetically and learned to ignore it.

They walked into its darkness almost in a straight line, with all of them on their own with lights, observing everything of interest.

Some had remained above to guard the vehicles and keep watch there, and keep in touch with the GX1 and other vehicles positioned in their hundreds across the world, exploring everything of interest and possible interest.

The voyage would be an incredible success if they managed to return, and many scientists aboard the GX1 were working on the problem of getting them back, with a great deal of breakthroughs, especially from the information the paranormal scientists had given them, and the equipment that they had used to enter the new universe.

Kruger watched the dust in their lights fly about, and he followed them down a stone ramp going into it, and further in the dampness of the stone walls gave a stale scent through the air.

Kruger turned up his light, as the others did, to give them enough brightness to see in front of them correctly, and he continued walking deeper into the stone corridor, searching the floor for any damage to it and for any holes that they could fall through, and go crashing down below.

The tunnel was full of piles of dust and rock crumbs all along its sides from the crumbling walls, and dry dust covered the center of the floor, and they marched along leaving firm footprints on it, and he started to wonder how they could even consider the owners of such a structure as an advanced intelligence.

Weird insects darted about and into cracks in stones when they saw them for the first time, and they passed them.

The top of the structure disappeared away behind them as they went down the long corridors, and more water and mud covered parts of the floor as they turned around a bend and went down into lower levels.

Most of the dampness finally started clearing, but the passages grew narrow and the air grew stale, and they stepped through thicker layers of dirt that occasionally blew up in clouds of dust over them, and they coughed it out when it entered deep into their lungs and noses.

Major Ripley came to a gap in a wall, and he shined his light over it showing them it, and he illuminated a dull and empty room, packed with scattered with dirt, dust, and rot.

As they explored the corridor further along, after finding nothing else in the room, they found something made of metal embedded within layers of mud in the wall of the corridor, and Major Ripley gripped a metal bar attached to it and gave it a sharp pull, but it remained jammed or locked, so he yanked it hard, and a metal sheet came loose out of the wall, where it had been stuck on with two rotted hinges, and he lifted it up and over, and placed it against the side of the corridor.

Starlight from a giant single star brightly beamed through a window hole into the dark confined space, and when they had finished their examination they left the empty room.

The next obstacle that they came to was a pile of stones that had collapsed inwards from the top of the corridor and blocked it, which seemed to confuse them as they had not accepted that there was not a way in. Yet once they were up close, for a close look, they found that it had a gap through, and they squeezed through, and went around a bend and came to a solid metal door, in front of the corridor, which was firmly shut, and looked as though it would end their journey.

But Major Ripley was too determined to stop and made them back away from it and stood and fired his weapon beam at it, temporary blinding them with its intense light in the dark corridor, and its hinges shone brightly and molten metal glowed and poured away, and he pushed the door away.

Once through the entrance Kruger watched its cloud of smoke moving up to the top of a large hall, and pass a high balcony at the middle of hall.

On their examination of it they saw a type of staircase going around the hall, winding up from the bottom to the top of the hall.

Kruger examined everything and listened to the others give their opinions with interest, and realized that they were missing out one point and the hall was virtually an ancient human construction, but never said a thing as there had been many discoveries of alien constructions that were similar to human constructions, including the remains of the civilization that they had found on the journey there. The constructions were the best that they could produce and it was very likely if any life form tried to create the best construction available that they would come up with a similar or more advanced construction.

There were animal remains scattered throughout the dirt beneath their feet all over the floor, and he listened for any signs of them in his surroundings.

One of the military men helped one of the scientists out by using his weapon to remove a large slab similar to the stone slab that had been on the roof, and he blasted away the hinges and the stone slab flew away down the immense cliff of the pinnacle and smashed to pieces below.

Kruger remembered the way that the part of the structure that they were on stuck out over the side of the cliff and moved to an area over the pinnacle, where there was a massive rolled up rope, which the occupants had used to do down.

The brightness of all the turned up lights showed the hall properly, and further along they saw lines of stone structures, which resembled seats with a walkway going down the middle, with a block of stone at the front, where some form of spiritual ritual had been practiced, which interested the paranormal scientists greatly, and they examined everything while consulting with each other silently, while everyone listened.

They found nothing else so they climbed the large stone steps to the balcony above, and crept along the narrow balcony checking its safety as they went along, with their lights mainly on the edge of it, and slowly made their way up the stairs.

At the top, they entered an area that had two passageways, and they followed the two paranormal scientists along one of them, and Major Ripley took them up the spiral stairs of one of the towers, as the two paranormal scientists discussed whether they should check the other tower at the end of the other passageway, and decided to leave it.

Kruger followed them up, and they suddenly stopped, startled by something, and he felt a vibration through the stone of the tower, and as he moved close to it heard something whirling around, somewhere above.

 

Chapter 20

 

The Wizard

 

A colossal energy shape floated in an energy bubble, rotating gradually, suspended over the floor of the room at the top of the tower, as the energy bubble vibrated the tower with its power.

Kruger stood in line with the two paranormal scientists and Major Ripley, all standing staring, examining it, as the others remained on the stairs examining it at a distance.

Could it be possible? Its shape looked like a being, and human, for a few seconds!

Kruger studied its energy formation and saw large shapes and colors form within it, and its shape and formation altered, and glowed with white light. It was over eight feet high, and flashes of some form of skeleton flashed visible within it.

A repeated whisper came from it, and he studied where he believed its mouth would be, and never saw anything and wondered what it was, and saw its eyes appear as red glowing lights and vanish.

Kruger, Major Ripley, and the others on the stairs stayed silent, waiting for anything to explain what the hell they were standing in front of, while the two paranormal scientists conferred silently in single words that never explained anything, not saying anything of its identity, until Major Ripley finally asked them to explain what the hell it was.

“We’re not fully sure yet?” Bryan explained, slightly shrugging his shoulders, stalling for time.

“But this is the energy source that we followed here?”

“Yes! It is that!”

“Is it dangerous …?”

“Not in this state!”

“Why? What state is it in?”

Major Ripley tried to identify the altering energy formations and shapes of it, and shrugged his shoulders back.

“It is trapped in that energy bubble!”

“Why? How did it get trapped there?”

“We trapped it there!”

Kruger thought he was confused before, but now things were worse than ever!

“Our scientists trapped it here with our equipment aboard the GX1. We had the equipment to not only detect it, but to place an energy field around it before it vanished … It had a faint presence when we were aboard, and made a full appearance as we made our way here!”

“So we are not in any danger then?” Major Ripley asked firmly, to confirm one point.

“Right!”

All of the people on the top stairs moved in, as they moved in close to see what they had.

Kruger managed to remove his eyes from it for the first time since he had seen it in the room, and he moved around the room, examining the room, seeking long awaited clues.

On the walls there were faint drawings, which had a chart of nearby stars, in the central galaxy, and he found piles of animal skins with ancient blood marks on them with drawings of creatures and symbols beside them, and one with a diagram of a type of telescope, and he looked out the window and saw the whole world going into the horizon and realized that it was also a watch tower, and used for different uses, including scientific work, even though he never recognized anything of the great deal of equipment and objects stacked away in it.

Colors of light appeared and flickered on the damp stone from the energy bubble and thing in it.

A silent whirling, like a miniature whirlwind mingled with a crackling, could be heard coming from within it.

They crept around carefully and silently not touching or going too close to things, as though they all realized that it still had power to do something.

At angles it resembled a medieval laboratory, but it was far more than that.

A diagram of something was marked on the center of the floor, with symbols around it, below it, and it would light up when a bright white light lit occasionally in the energy bubble.

As Kruger tried to grasp everything that he could, and filmed as mush as he could, he spotted it appear brighter and whirl around fast, with sparks of colored light going around its fringes, and he saw thousands of miniature transparent ones emerge around him and the rest of the room, and they condensed into the whole of the middle area, while they created flashes of light over the walls.

The air from it blew against their faces, and he heard silent, almost inaudible, chanting from the thing in the energy bubble, as it did something.

 

Chapter 21

 

The Energy Bubble

 

The time being had timed its appearance in its room in the tower at the same time as its powers showed it that the immense GX1 spacecraft was on the world.

It appeared as an explosion of light magically hovering in mid-air, and it concluded an experiment and appeared there fast, using newly acquired powers to make an undetected entry, in case it had timed it wrongly, and also to have no entry there noted in time, in case the beings had powers to detect it.

It made sure that it could swiftly leave at any time, without it leaving any traces of it having been there.

It had studied what it was able to detect there of the visit, and had followed their path through the remains of the civilization, which it had destroyed with its immense powers centuries ago, and had gained control of the world, and stopped them killing it, and it had realized the beings were the same as beings that had visited its room centuries before (called Professor Farrell and Sandler), and it had taken their flying device, which had proven to be useless to escape the world.

It had realized that there were far more options open to it than it had realized, and though it knew that it could destroy them there, it could not get aboard and destroy the rest of the crew, and that it had to use a way to conceal itself to get aboard undetected, and it chose to reduce its size and disguise itself as something that the beings ignored, and could not properly see, and had carried out experiments in reducing its size as far as it could with the powers available to it, and it was able to reduce itself and turn itself into a form of insect, which it had seen that they had not fully noted had been in their vehicles.

It had recalled its ancient race and how they had advanced science to incredible lengths, and had colonized an entire galaxy, and their many genetic alterations that had turned them into a master race, with abilities unheard of, but had eventually ruined themselves by turning themselves into a more warlike race, which had eventually killed itself off, which had been remembered throughout galaxies for thousands of years.

It was condemned to remain on the world, and had started dreaming of escaping and rebuilding their empire, and turning its race into a new species, who would be immortal and use science to reach the ultimate that could ever exist.

Its powers were immense already, and it began its mission, and altered itself and prepared itself to be shrank and turned into the insect that it had chosen, which it had worked on for a great deal of time, disguising any sign of it, and then it prepared itself to travel forwards in time to a point in time before their arrival there.

It had created bright flashes of light with its mind, and watched the room alter, and it watched the room vibrate around as it exploded with power that shuddered through the whole tower!

The room had looked a mess, as it had not visited it in a great deal of time, and it knew it was its last and only attempt of escaping from the world.

It had whirled fast through the outer regions of time, and watched the sparks of colored light around its fringes play, and thousands more emerge, and the whole of the room appear in the future, before the vehicles arrived, and sounds became deafening.

The center of where the being had been turned bright like a sun, becoming louder and brighter, with the whirling decreasing, shaking everything furiously, including the stone tower.

On its arrival it had been hit by a powerful energy force from something strange from beyond the castle, and though the time being had been able to reappear, but not entirely, it had been held in the energy bubble, and trapped there.

 

Chapter 22

 

The Amazing Discovery

 

It was incredible how startling things were, and it amazed Kruger that they could make such mistakes!

In all the accounts so far mentioned by people observing everything – spoken and written, and mentioned in all forms of media – nobody had given anything about the general appearance of the alien and site – the things, tower room, writings, symbols, and powers – and that they clearly revealed that the alien could have paranormal powers.

It was incredible how the two paranormal scientists had handled the scenario of them not having any proof of any paranormal.

They had many silent discussions, which avoided given their thoughts on what they thought they were dealing with, and seemed trapped in a situation of constantly trying to prove something existed, not being fully able to do so and reveal their thoughts.

Yet Kruger was unable to realize if he himself could believe it was supernatural, even if it fully was and they had all the proof, as it clearly had another side to it that was showed it was normal, and it was just a new alien with new powers, which could act in the same ways.

Though the discovery showed itself as new alien discovery many people traveled over to investigate it, and most of them were archaeologists, and many dropped their investigation of the alien remains to reach there before they missed anything.

Not one of them or the groups of scientists were not astounded by the site, and tremendous location, and view of the world and galaxy beyond, and many filmed it over and over, from every viewpoint conceivable, and many were being shown on all the media aboard the GX1.

Even the president of the GX1 had shown deep interest in wishing to experience the site, and discovery in its natural inhabitant, and intended to arrive later, after he finished his current work, and all safety precautions were taken care of.

Kruger had checked everything on top of the castle roof, and with the people there that he knew, where he was questioned on the discovery, and had noted that they had supported the castle and roof with gravity stabilizers that could hold the whole castle and roof up if everything else went crashing down below.

He answered far more questions and details than he could recall doing so before. The trip was turning a great success, and he realized that how liked and admired the paranormal scientists were, and far more than he thought possible, and he decided to use their methods and technology in his investigations of aliens on his return to the galaxy and Earth.

It had been incredible how they had invented and used their equipment and had captured the alien, and foreseen its not being able to escape, and hindered its dangerous powers.

The site was incredible, and if the place was not as dangerous, and remote, and was located near where he wished to be, he would even consider living in the place.

It was incredible how they had accepted and brought in the archaeologists to excavate the tower. Many had been interested in the castle more than anything, and could not believe they had actually found an ancient castle of the past – there out in the deepest depths of space, in another universe – and so closely resembling a now almost extinct structure, which barely existed on the Earth.

They soon were all over it, and the amount of vehicles were increasing there. Most of the vehicles packed onto the top of the castle were being taken down to the lower world to make way for them, and some were examining the remarkable pinnacle, and how it managed to remain up, and support its own weight.

The place was a scientific wonderland, and they were unsure how they would return there if they managed to leave the universe, and return home, but, to Kruger’s satisfaction, many were now sure they that it was possible, and he had tried to get information on their progression on returning there, and had not received any information, and the two paranormal scientists had shown that they had nothing on it.

Everything in the towers had been examined as far as they could check them there, and they were now working on a way of removing the entire top of the tower and taking back to the GX1, which had surprised Kruger at first as he thought of the dangers of letting such an alien aboard, after what the alien in the void had done, but it was thought that it had been a one off occurrence, and that they would ruin all the investigations of aliens if they thought of them all as being the same.

They would have to find ways of handling the situation to stop it reoccurring, and he was sure that they were already making progress there aboard the GX1, thanks to the paranormal scientists.

The scientists were working with many engineers on removing the tower top, and were coming up with the result that they wished, and they were waiting on some special vehicles and equipment to be transported over.

When they finally appeared, Kruger was standing looking out one of the castle windows at the stars, and saw their massive shapes shift over the stars.

He examined the room about him again wondering why the place was the way it was, as neither the alien nor castle had any resemblances to each other, and there would have to have been more of them or the alien had just liked the look of such a castle.

He was sure from what he had heard by from the archaeologists that that there had been other beings there, and that they were sure that they had been the same as the beings at the ruins.

The alien must have captured it or found it abandoned there, and altered it for its uses. There were no signs of how the alien fed itself or what it did there, and they were unsure if it actually ate at all, and had some other means of powering itself.

The vehicles were immense, and he was not sure why, as any of the smaller versions of them that he had seen aboard would have done, and would not have been so awkward to use, and they never even fitted on the roof, and were landed below the pinnacle, until they were needed.

He was sure that they had to have brought them for a reason, and that they needed more power than thought to remove the tower top, which he could not realize why!

 

Chapter 23

 

The Archeological Discovery

 

The pictorial panoramic spectacle of the world stretching out below from the castle was fascinating, with the rugged golden shades of the starlight beaming everywhere, through massive gaps in the castle walls beneath the tower, where the archaeologists were working away, checking if there was anything in the walls, and how the stones had been made.

He always had liked archeology, especially on alien worlds, and liked exploring the past and the occurrences that had taken place.

The world below now looked like it had been frozen in time, and was a fantastic surreal prehistoric times world, and he recalled why he had wanted to be a paleontologist. It conjured up great visions of the original primitive world, with its astounding untouched magnitude.

While he rested against a wall he looked through a massive gap in the tower, and occasionally examined the stone and debris the archeologists sifted through, looking for anything of interest to him, and he watched the sky in a place that he had not examined before, and wondered what existed there and what other strange worlds there were to explore, and started to realize he was starting to like the galaxy more than his own, and that he would miss it, and the stars would never be the same again when he returned, and that they would completely empty.

In the distance he spotted an incredible immense meteorite crater with a strange mist cloud over it, only filling the dent, fitting itself into with its shape.

He believed he would make a good archeologist as he was interested in having everything investigated, and the true findings being revealed.

The archeologists around him enjoyed their work, and were still very intrigued with everything that they found there, and what fascinating things they could find.

He tried to work out the age of the tower, but could not, and just accepted the rough estimate given by the archeologists that he questioned about it. He was still searching for something, and for something that he was sure that he had missed. There were signs that it was really old, and older than they thought, and the walls of the tower had some materials in it that nobody had recognized.

Perhaps it was from an unknown and rare element found down there on the world. A new universe, and such a galaxy, had to have such. The place was unique and a real winner, and he had waited the majority of his life for such a find to emerge, and now he was going to grasp it!

Major Ripley rushed over to him, before he entered the stairs going up the tower, and immediately revealed how they had received more powerful digging equipment and generators to dig into areas in the tower, as they had found artificial objects in the walls, which they could not recognize.

Kruger started to realize that something was there, buried away in the tower, and saw that the archaeologists had slowed down their operations, and were more interested in what was buried away in the tower.

 

Chapter 24

 

The Tower Removal

 

Gold and white radiances loomed over a shadowed region of the tower, while an immense lifting vehicle hauled it up, while the pilots aboard it controlled the computers and monitored it.

Kruger watched it with the two paranormal scientists, beside other major scientists, at the edge of the flat top of the castle.

The operation had been far more difficult than they had realized, as they found objects inside the tower that had apparently held the tower up, under the hideous conditions the alien had subjected it to with its incredible powers. The structure would have collapsed a long time ago if it had not used them!

It was virtually the only thing that they had successfully found the use of that belonged to it, and they could barely work out how they worked.

The top part of the tower glided away, under the vehicle, and they moved it over to the castle roof, where they were, and placed it in the central region, and the vehicle lifted away, and left to go down below.

Kruger watched the towers shape probing its way amidst the abyss of the stars behind it, and gasped as a giant star exploded with light, turning into what had to be the biggest nova and explosion that he had seen.

All the scientists gasped, and some filmed it, and watched parts of blast out into space, scattering beams of blinding light, and he saw that it was in fact the merging of two suns, being pulled together, as they were being dragged into the black hole at the center of the galaxy, and he moved his feet over the silky dust that rested on the roof, which had fallen there over night from space, and he wondered if the remains of it would come down as it, and he would actually touch the remains such a powerful phenomenon.

The air stuck deep in his lungs for a moment as he considered the dust being in the air, and considered how it affected the world.

In the powerful sunlight of the nova, the shadow of the whole pinnacle and tower stretched across the world like gigantic alien finger/claw, as though pointing at something, and he considered it for real for a brief moment and dismissed it.

Faint echoes of a distant meteorite landing appeared, and sounded like the nova explosion coming through the dense galaxy, and reaching the world, and it vanished into an extraordinary silence, as they all approached the tower to begin work, and to watch them remove the alien in the energy bubble, and place it there, for them to check properly, out of the tower.

 

Chapter 25

 

The Monster Captured

 

Altering forms of the monsters consistently rematerialized in the energy bubble, as it floated over the center of large stone castle roof, as all the scientists stood around it examining it, trying to grasp what it was and was doing there.

Kruger watched the vehicle remove the tower away to the GX1 for examination, leaving only the energy bubble and alien there, and he wondered if they were underestimating its powers and if it was a mistake removing it from the tower.

The thing did resemble a magical being in its normal state. If it actually had a normal state, and he tried to grasp what it could really be, and why it had chosen the castle and region overlooking the center of the universe, and he gasped again as its giant demon shape appeared and glowed with energy, and altered and whirled within hideous energy surges – while it was consistently stopped from vanishing, to where they never knew.

Kruger spotted a new vehicle flying in from over the horizon, as it appeared there, heading towards them, with all the equipment that they would use to carry out an examination of what they could, in a brief examination, before they took it to the GX1 for it to be properly checked – with them checking if it should be brought aboard.

The alien shape at times looked as if it was looking directly at him, as if thinking of communicating, and was soon thrown into a turmoil of reactions, which left him considering if it was the energy bubble the two paranormal scientists had put it in or if it was it that was putting it in the state it was in.

Surely the energy bubble could not cause such a consequence?

But he was sure it was some sort of entity/life form and that it was trapped there, and he wondered what the paranormal scientists intended to do with it. If they never left it there, would someone eventually remove the energy bubble – to either investigate it more closely or check its normal state, and if they removed it what would happen? Surely they had not forgotten the alien in the void already, and he thought that it should be checked out of the energy bubble before it was taken aboard.

 

Chapter 26

 

The Time Alterations

 

At the edge of the energy bubble, altering wildly, gleams of light from bright stars were being held motionlessly, and were being filmed and studied by the scientists.

The entire top of the castle was now covered in equipment and scientists studying the alien in the energy bubble, and of the discovery made earlier in close examinations of the energy bubble.

A clock placed at the end of a cable was entered into its field, and the scientist reacted immediately when they received results, and concluded that its precision digital numbers were being frozen, and into multidimensional forms as the cable shifted, and they studied the suspended cluster of partially transparent layers, as they moved in with cameras.

The two paranormal scientists were controlling the experiments of the leading scientists, and had gained a great deal of status and authority with them, and aboard the GX1, where most of the filming of it was being shown on the media.

Both occasionally gave detailed explanations of what they were doing, and believed was occurring, and they had the cable released further, edging it into the confines of the energy bubble, creating more spectacular optical effects with the clock, making it distort in twisted forms, like shaping beams of light with matter.

All the numbers on clock shifted fast forward to their surprise, and all the scientists, technicians, and archeologists there crowded around it loudly discussing it, and applauding the find, as it was the first discover of time travel.

Kruger stood with them startled, though he had known it existed, he had not proven it, and believed Don had traveled back in time, and he had been waiting for it to appear somewhere, to prove it, and for the event to take place, and he watched it wondering what the hell it was, as it was far more different than he had thought, and he had not realized or heard anything that could explain anything to him, and he had deliberately stayed near the two paranormal scientists and main scientists in hope of picking something up.

It looked as though it were rupturing space in a way that played with time. It had properties of suspending it! It was creating alterations in it and the fabric of space, but could it allow some form of gateway into the depths of time to exist?

Many of the leading scientists were carrying out numerous basic and complex experiments all around it, using equipment, and others were recording various things about it, and great amounts of detailed information were being sent back to the GX1 for them to analyze in a far greater degree.

Nobody had been able to determine its origins or if it came from the galaxy. Yet they were in another universe, which they had not checked in any proper degree, and there were many occurrences there and in the black hole that were still unexplained, and their voyage through the galaxy had shown that many mysterious things existed there.

It would take the rest of their lives to explore the place properly and make proper findings, and they may never fully achieve their goal, and it could be found long after they existed.

He had shuddered as he had studied its shape hovering about, and its occasional appearance, like a lion eyeing up its prey.

The abnormal antics of some of the scientists at times captivated him, mystifying him with the depth of their nervousness and fear of something! Some still repetitively studied the readings from their equipment and with alarm – preparing themselves for something, which he saw the two paranormal scientists slowly become aware of!

What the hell was it? What was the thing? Was it really a supernatural entity? Could something go wrong?

A swift flash of light appeared and exploded at the edge of a region of the energy bubble, silencing all the scientists.

From it they got a proper view of what happened when the light entered its radius, and they were able to analyze slowed down views of the occurrence.

Kruger listened to a scientist explaining the occurrences to an audience on the GX1, stating, “It manipulated space and time within its outer radius! It can accelerate, decelerate, and suspend it … The clock is now suspending it …”

The cable emerged outwards pulling the clock backwards, with its numbers swiftly turning backwards until its numbers once again became motionless, and Kruger considered if they could use whatever it was to make some form of time machine.

He wondered if in reality time was something far different from what they perceived. But would he ever know? And he just accepted the philosophy! And he was still sure Don was an older version of him!

“What are they intending to do with it?” he asked Mitchel, curiously. “Are they going to construct something from it?”

Mitchel examined him, almost sensing something, wondering why he had an interest, and looked annoyed about something.

“They, of course, have investigated little so far, and if they do, you will be informed!”

“If they can reconstruct it, they can use it for many things, including uses in industry!” he continued. “Stopping time is an incredible tool … With incredible uses …!”

“They have made other findings you know! If you take an observation of its shifting movements, for one thing – which they have been studying closely – its constrained pattern of movements has dramatically altered in some regions in space …”

Kruger examined its lethal appearance, like a large bubble full of pure transparent energy – buzzing wildly and dangerously – ready to discharge somewhere.

“Do you think you have created and have something new here?” he asked, firmly. “Two unheard of inventions of great power combined … The incredible paranormal energy source, in the depths of a new and different universe, with a different makeup, in a galaxy never seen before, with hidden powers beyond our imagination from such a rare being, combined with your energy bubble that has been discovered for the first time from all the technology of worlds, over hundreds of years!

“The combinations of powerful energy sources have created many great discoveries!”

“There may be! It could very well be a one of a kind situation, and we have perhaps a long time to explore it! Perhaps we could find some form of time travel – which may not be found anywhere else – or something else!”

“We may not need to wait that long!” Bryan stated, moving over. “Most inventions allow people to get their best properties straight away. They will in a few days be giving out all the details from all the findings, and from all the experiments, which may be very interesting if I am not mistaken. They have barely even scratched the surface of it!”

 

Chapter 27

 

Its Capture

 

The time being might have been thrown into the realms of hell, into another reality, with its magical being shape altering and whirling within hideous energy surges, threatening to obliterate it, but it consistently had stopped it and it falling out of space and time altogether, and it had consistently altered.

The center of it had glowed bright like a sun from the energy that it had been trapped in, altering and becoming more powerful and then dimming, with it whirling increasing and decreasing, shaking everything furiously about from the impact of powerful energy forces, from something strange from outside, and though it had reappeared at the correct location, it had been trapped there.

It had remained perplexed, and it had stopped making attempts at escaping, and tried to establish what had gone wrong.

On and on it had kept going, and it had seen the humans emerge on the tower stares, and confirm what it had started to suspect, and that they had set a trap and had caught it. It had underestimated them greatly! It would have been normally virtually impossible to do what they had done, and it would be lucky to survive the ordeal! It slowly had realized that they had methods of detection that it had never heard of, but it also had slowly realized that they never had time travel as it had originally known.

After the shock of the encounter, and it had adapted its energy and structure to handle the energy bubble that they had trapped it in, and it had probed the humans and realized it had been lucky, and that they could have killed it, and that they wanted it for something, and it had realized that it had technology that it could use to bargain with, if they ever allowed it to communicate.

Their technology had been strange and some of it primitive to it, and it had even learned how most of it worked, and had been surprised that its race had missed it, and it had realized why.

It had probed their computer records, and had found how powerful their race was, and then had discovered the great revelation that they had arrived there from another universe, after hurtling through the outer limits of space and time, and it had seen the great use that they could have been to its race.

The opportunity to do something had been great, and its determination had turned almost inconceivable.

For a long time it had watched them at work, and their experiments, while its energy surges intermittently had played with it, in hideous attacks, and it had planned what it should do.

 

Chapter 28

 

The Museum

 

Kruger was staggered when he entered the museum, which was the biggest museum aboard the GX1, as the alien’s appearance in the energy bubble had entirely altered.

The thing looked entirely deadly and pulsating, with alien inside with less alterations and looking more powerful, which looked as deadly as he had seen it. By its reactions he could tell that it had something that it could use against them, but he could recognize what, and glared at it trying to get a clue.

The alien had been swiftly brought to the GX1, and most of the scientists had followed it.

The A1 museum show was the first and biggest showing of it, and every major person and personality aboard was there, in the massive hall, with the media covering it everywhere.

The alien and energy bubble was astounding, in the center of the stage, in bright colored beams of light, fascinating everyone there, and especially those arriving there.

Kruger had not visited the museum before and was amazed at the amount of alien artifacts, detailed filmed accounts of alien findings, and ancient alien civilizations uncovered, with detailed accounts of their location, worlds, and environments, and he even saw some of the work that he was involved with, and decided to visit the place more.

The expeditions were some of the best, with best findings, and they were set up like they were on other worlds, and he knew he was going to be part of the greatest of them all, which had been one of his dreams.

On the stage a few scientists stood around the alien, and the two paranormal scientists arrived, and reacted when they saw the alien in its new state, and ignored it and rushed over to the microphone, and Bryan started giving detailed descriptions of their detection of the alien, and their detection of the energy source.

It was incredible that they were not known as paranormal scientists, and only small descriptions of them investigating that sort of work was revealed.

“Details of the tower room that was brought aboard will soon be revealed,” Bryan revealed. “And it should give us an insight into what it is! We have many scientific findings, but little on the alien itself, which surely has derived from an exceedingly advanced race, which may not have come from this world, as all the information indicates. There only seems to be one on the whole world! Its present state shows us little about it!

“The particular habits of the being may become known some day if we find a way to remove the energy bubble and replace it with something that only confines it, which will allow us to study it as it normally is.

“A variety of clues of its highly advanced technology were found in its tower, which we still have found little on, even with our technology. We just do not know precisely where it came from or what it is.”

A group of scientists arrived and brought in equipment and arranged it around the energy bubble of the alien, and Kruger for a moment thought he saw the alien recognize it.

A highly advanced clock was placed at the end of a cable and was entered into its field, and the scientist reacted immediately when they received results, and concluded that its precision digital numbers had being frozen, and it went into multidimensional forms as the cable moved inwards, and they studied the suspended cluster of partially transparent layers, and the audience all watched the phenomenon with amazement.

Many people had seen a short sequence of it on the media, but were still surprised.

The two paranormal scientists controlled the experiments of the other scientists.

Both occasionally gave detailed explanations of what they were doing and believed was occurring, and they had the cable released further, edging it into the confines of the energy bubble, creating more spectacular optical effects with the clock, making it distort in twisted forms, deliberately designed for the stage performance, shaping beams of light with matter like a form of light show.

All the numbers on clock shifted fast forward to the surprise of the audience, and some new leading scientists, who had not seen it, were allowed to investigate it, and they crowded around it, loudly discussing it, and they applauded it, and announced it was the first discover of time travel that anyone had found, and the audience all applauded the discovery.

Many of the audience around Kruger were startled, as they had not believed that it existed, and it had just been proven to exist, and they watched it wondering what the hell it was, as it was far more different than he had thought, and Kruger realized that he had not heard anything that could properly explain how it worked, and he watched the two paranormal scientists and main scientists in hope of picking something up.

It looked as though it were rupturing space in a way that played with time, with properties of altering and suspending time! It was creating alterations in it and the fabric of space.

Many of the leading scientists had been carrying out numerous basic and complex experiments on it with all the equipment aboard, now available to them, and great amounts of detailed information had been accumulated, but most was not available.

Nobody had been able to determine its origins or if it even came from the galaxy. Yet they were in another universe, which they had not checked in any proper degree, and there were many occurrences there and in the black hole that were still unexplained, and their voyage through the galaxy had shown that many mysterious things existed there.

Its altered shape wildly hovering about itself made him shudder, and occasional looks of the alien were like it was a lion eyeing up its prey.

The abnormal antics of some of the scientists and technicians at times were captivating, mystifying him with the depth of their nervousness and deep fear of something, and the fact that he had not seen them actually react about anything without there being something there! The last alien in the void was still unbelievable, and many people thought it was not entirely dead! Some still repetitively studied the readings from equipment that they had set up to detect it.

Were they preparing themselves for something, which he saw the two paranormal scientists occasionally become aware of?

Why did they not do anything, if they really did believe it?

Yet he actually did know why, and that they could not, and it was better to check it and see what happened, if it did.

What the hell was it? What was this thing? Was it really a supernatural thing?

A swift flash of light appeared from a laser and exploded into the edge of a region of the energy bubble, silencing the entire audience, who vibrantly reacted to it and them.

From it they gave and showed the audience a more detailed account of what was happening when he light hit its radius, and they showed them slowed down views of the occurrence on a large screen behind them.

Bryan calmly gave other information that they had found back at the tower.

“It manipulates space and time!” he told them, watching it at the side of his eye. “It suspends, accelerates, and suspends time … And if you’ll look at the clock – suspended within its outer radius – it is now decelerating it …”

The cable was emerged outwards, pulling the clock backwards, with its numbers swiftly turning backwards, until its numbers once again became motionless.

Many people around Kruger talked about it as time travel, and that they were witnessing a form of time machine.

Kruger was now wondering what the hell it really was they were playing with, and why it looked so dangerous.

“What are they intending to do with?” someone from the media asked Bryan. “Could it be used to create something even more incredible – with it fascinating properties?”

Bryan examined him in a glance, and thought of the best reply.

“We and all the scientists aboard have been investigating it with everything we have, which still not enough, and I guess in a year from now it will be very minute, and if they find anything, which I have not heard of, I assure you we will inform you of it!

“They have made other findings!” Mitchel announced, at his side. “If you take an observation of its shifting – which they have been studying closely – its constrained pattern of movements has dramatically altered in regions in space …

“We have checked its movements in other dimensions … It is a new discovery, and we have been monitoring it …

“We also have ways of detecting other things … We detected the energy source by using our equipment …”

While they were talking Kruger saw how more powerful the energy in the energy bubble seemed to become, and he examined its lethal appearance!

The thing was a bubble of energy, looking like it could explode – with an immense energy discharge.

“Do you think this is entirely new concept?” a man in the audience asked, slightly gasping at its altered appearance. “I read one of the recent reports on it, explaining it as the combination of two unheard of inventions of vast power. An incredible energy source, in the depths of a different universe, with a different makeup, with hidden powers beyond our imaginations, and its strange source, from a highly advanced species, combined with your energy and powerful energy bubble, discovered for the first time, and not fully checked, from all the best technology of our worlds, from hundreds of years of scientific breakthroughs … And that the combinations of such powerful energy sources have created numerous great discoveries …”

Suddenly Kruger spotted the center of where the being in the energy bubble was, and that it was turning bright like a sun, and become louder and brighter, with its whirling was increasing, and it started shaking everything furiously about, knocking all the scientists about, and they fell over, and a sudden shockwave impacted it and blasted through the whole museum, and reoccurring blasts followed, knocking everyone and everything over or about, and was followed by one last colossal explosion, before it died away.

The hall turned silent, and all the people got up from the floor, and out of wreckage, and started to recover from what had happened, and Kruger watched the two paranormal scientists dramatically talking with each other, and watched where they looked, towards the energy bubble, and realized that they were not reacting to the explosion, but to the energy bubble itself, as it had changed, and he saw that the being had vanished from inside it, and he gasped, thinking of the trouble that they could be in if the being had escaped.

 

Chapter 29

 

Back on the GX1

 

The spectacular energy explosions and exhaustion of its energy had damaged far more than the alien had thought, and it could barely think and use its powers.

When they had taken it in the energy bubble to the immense GX1 it had gasped in horror, at what it was up against, and that it might be the end.

Yet it had even felt enjoyment at such a creation, and that it could exist, and that it had been seeing powers that its mighty race had never witnessed, and it had realized that it had a proper goal now, and that was to take control of it, and it was about to achieve its goal of getting aboard.

Once inside the GX1 it had been delighted, and thought of nothing else than escaping and what it would do, and this time it intended not to underestimate the humans, no matter what.

It had studied their minds and thoughts, and ways that they worked together, and had been surprised at many things. Their abilities could go far, and they continued doing things further than anything it had encountered, even though they made many mistakes, and usually went further with things that were useless and unneeded, and it realized that its race would have used them to investigate all the things that they had never bothered with.

It had recalled that a long time ago that it had encountered two of them, and had ignored them, but had been amazed by their technology, and it had even sensed that they had come from beyond the universe.

Its proper examination of their computers and records had been the greatest advancement that it had received, and it would have been far more if it had not been in the state that it had been in.

It had explored information about the energy field and its energy levels with astonishment, and had wondered why its race had never gone to the lengths they had to build it, and realized that they had ignored it as it had not been needed, and that they had had better alternatives, but they had ignored how powerful it could become, and could be used for things that their alternatives could not be used for.

Its examination of the occupants had been too swift and uncontrolled, and it had failed to realize many things that it should have known.

Their worlds were different and so populated that it had not been able to grasp how they worked, and how they never had problems, and it had examined their minds, and had started to realize the truth, and that they enjoyed it and thought of it as a common state, and that they would have thought of their worlds as being empty.

While it had continued its explorations another part of it had started work on creating a plan to escape, and it had examined their minds, thoughts, communications, behavior, and it had started to realize a way, and a way to avoid discovery and reveal itself.

It had formed a copy of a man and had altered his features, in which it would use, if it ever wished to copy one.

After examinations of it, it had learned many more things, and it decided to leave the investigation until its powers were returned.

It also found information on the entity in the void with surprise, and all the trouble that they had gone to destroy it, and it had been fascinated. At first it thought it had been a white entity that it had made a mistake with when it had been younger, and which had imprisoned it on the world, which it believed its race could handle, and that it had surprised it, when its powers had been weak. But after more searching it had believed that it could have been one of its own race, and that it had altered greatly, but after further examinations it found that it had been something else, and it decided to investigate it further when it escaped from the energy bubble, and had its powers.

Another problem that it had discovered had been that the humans could recognize a stranger easily, and that if it copied one of them it would have to be more careful than it had thought.

Once when it had examined their minds further it had found a way to alter their memories so that they would recognize it as a normal human, and not as a stranger, and it could alter their records about it, and it had seen where the other alien had gone wrong, and had thought of ways to avoid its mistakes, and it had realized that its powers would be weak and limited against them, with there being so many of them.

Through all that had happened it had managed to explore the strange life forms and their existence, and had been delighted to make it aboard, and it had believed that it could hide somewhere, away from them, if it could not beat them, and it only needed to get on one of their worlds, where it could start to reproduce other members of its species and take control of their worlds, and build its new empire.

 

Chapter 30

 

Its Escape

 

The time being had felt itself dying – it had underestimated its loss of power – and it was on the brink of death, and it had to escape, and get rid of the energy bubble, and had to use its escape plan.

The audience about it had been overwhelming, with their reactions to it and their showing it as a highly advanced species, but their showing their awareness of its powers had caused it to use up far more energy than it had been using.

It could barely think with so little power, but it had felt horror at what it could be up against, and it had even felt a feeling of enjoyment at death.

It had used all its stored energy at once, and forced a small leap through time, with a new method that it had planned, for to it jump back in time to escape the energy bubble just enough to avoid being captured afterwards, and its center had exploded brightly like a sun and it had become louder and brighter, and it saw it shaking everything furiously about, knocking all the scientists about, and before it had vanished it had seen the sudden shockwave impact, and blast through the whole museum.

Everything instantly turned normal and it collapsed on the stage, outside the energy bubble, a day before its arrival at the GX1, and it managed to stay alive and locate an energy center aboard, where that region’s power supplies were located, and it quickly used it to return energy to it.

The hall was silent and dark when it stood up, and it realized that it had not been detected, and that the people in the region were asleep, and it recovered from what had happened and turned itself into the human that it had designed, and moved out of the region to an empty region where it would be hidden, and where they would not look to find it in the future, when it had escaped, and where it could carry out its work unaffected by the energy bubble, and it realized that it was free to do anything it wanted.

These beings had little knowledge of it and time travel, and it was more advanced and powerful than it had ever been, and it had more power available to it than it had ever had.

 

Chapter 31

 

GX1 Alert

 

The GX1 president used all his powers to get the alien found, after it vanishing. If the situation altered into the last alien scenario they would be in deep trouble, so they took every measure they could to investigate what had happened and have the voyager checked for it.

Everyone carried out his slightest notion to the letter, especially after hearing about what had happened on the media. So the spacecraft was on full alert once again!

Kruger knew a great deal about him, especially after the last alien encounter, so he was not surprised to meet him again, but with the two paranormal scientists, and the president questioned them about what had occurred in the museum and tactically queried them on what was happening, and what it was that they were now up against.

The entire ship’s media kept pushing stories on it because they wanted answers, and it was the only real occurrence that had happened since they had brought the alien aboard. The stories told by people were incredible, and he kept wondering what they were up to. There were mentions of deaths and attacks, and the thing actually attacking people all over the museum, and it rampaging through the spacecraft.

He finally came to the conclusion it was the media itself that was behind it, and that it was encouraged by the military into taking action, and into talking the public into realizing the dangers of it, and to report anything to do with it that occurred.

Most people aboard thought there were more of them, and that they should withdraw from the world.

The president could scarcely grasp what was there now, or happening, and because they had not even seen the alien properly in the energy bubble, or where it had vanished to. The descriptions from the officials that he knew had been at the museum had given only vague and confused descriptions, and had no real detail, as they had not fully seen anything other than it vanish and destroy a region of the museum, and had held back their ideas, especially after hearing all the people on the media giving their fantasy descriptions of it.

People just did not realize what it was or if it was even a life form, or what shape, or characteristics, or identity it truly had. It had altered, and had given nothing but a confused mess of details, and the two paranormal scientists, and all the major scientists there had little to tell, even after such close examinations of it, with so many scientists and advanced equipment.

What sort of powers did it fully have? Should they be happy to get rid of it? Should they just leave the world? What kind of science and creations did it have, if it was the highly advanced being that they believed it to be? Could the voyage and GSO even profit greatly from it, if they captured it?

Yet its technology alone would have been priceless to them!

Kruger also, when he never thought of the danger, wondered what it could be, and what it could teach him.

He was a scientist, and he had not just entered the voyage to expand his career and fame. He was interested in science, space, alien life forms, and anything else that existed there.

He was one of the most experienced people on alien life forms there, and he continually thought of the glory of the discovery!

He knew that it was a new superior life form, and wondered if they could capture and study it!

He even thought that they had actually killed it, especially by the reactions of the two paranormal scientists. At times they reacted as though they might have actually killed the thing! The energy bubble was incredibly powerful, and its energy might have become too powerful for it, and the explosion could have been the thing dieing, and its energy blasting out, and they could have very well witnessed the death of one of the most mighty beings that existed, and it would have been all their fault as they had searched it out and had captured it in the hideous way that they had, and there as no suggestion that it had been a danger to them, even with all the things that they had seen.

Yet the power of it was tremendous and it could have killed them all easily if the energy bubble had not been there, even with some of the military being nearby.

Kruger gave descriptions of what had happened and what it had been like in the castle to the president on the media – shown to just about everyone aboard – seeking the truth about what had taken place, and seeking adventure, which they had mostly joined the voyage for.

The two paranormal scientists helped him out with vivid details and their thoughts on it.

It was incredible that they gave their thoughts on what they had suspected about it, and had avoided giving anything on it having any supernatural powers, and he even wondered if they believed it to any further extent.

He expressed his confused thoughts at what it could do, and about what it had been up to and what it was capable of, and he wished that they could have found a way to release it from the energy bubble before they had brought aboard, and they would at least now know what it actually was they were dealing with.

The president had clearly even gone to the museum to see the damage that it had created, and to question the people there about the incident and what it had looked like, in its true form.

The president questioned him intensely about it, to find out what he wanted. He had to take the responsibility for such an incident and occurrence, and he reassured everyone aboard that he and they would do everything that they could to find it, and perhaps study it, and at that moment they were building a special task force to seek it out, and it was to be led by Colonel Pratt of the Military and Space Forces, and it would be based at the Military and Space Forces control center, and that he was the second highest military authority there, under General Chisholm, the head of the Military and Space Forces, and of the security of the entire spacecraft.

General Chisholm made an appearance and warned everyone aboard of the dangers of the alien intruder, and of what had happened the last time, and gave the location of the museum, and told everyone to remain out of its path and to stay in groups and to kill it if they had to, and he then introduced Colonel Pratt, who was at the Military and Space Forces control center.

Colonel Pratt gave all the information that he could, and showed everyone his task force, and that they were all busy at work organizing things, and taking information people were giving them.

It was then that Kruger started to realize that it could actually be a great danger, and that they might have found something that they wished to conceal!

Yet he was not sure, and left it until they produced something, as he knew what they could be like, from past occurrences.

People had been clearly startled by its exit, and he could not decide if it was also its extraordinary form that it had had.

They just did not fully know what it was or its motives might be. They had caught it and forced it to escape, and had threatened it with powerful weapons, and perhaps destruction.

The whole affair was a muddled mess, and many other top scientists were contacted at their quarters, for them to query.

They were normally calm, even after being at the incident, and were willing answer all their questions, and Colonel Pratt finished it by assuring them that he would have them informed of any progress of the affair.

The president left in a state of partial confusion, and never proceeded further, and Colonel Pratt continued by asking them why they had been so sure the alien could not escape, and why they had not confronted the alien with powerful weapons, which he would have authorized members of the military to take, and that they would have been able to handle the problem in the proper way, and he asked them what they intended to do to locate it.

The two paranormal scientists answered swiftly without thinking, explaining the alien had not been able to escape, and they had not believed it to be dangerous, and that the military being there with weapons would have been useless, as the energy beams would not have been able to enter the energy bubble.

They had done everything safely, as far as they could have, and they believed that all their weapons were useless on it anyway, as with the last alien in the void, and they kept them secure by making sure that the energy bubble could not collapse, and they also tested it, and its ability to escape, in front of many witnesses, but they then informed them that it had clearly managed to find a means to escape, and that they had underestimated its capabilities.

 

Chapter 32

 

The Detection of the Alien

 

There was something not right about the way the alien had vanished that intrigued Kruger, and he could not grasp what its connection to the paranormal was. The two paranormal scientists claimed that they had traced a paranormal energy source to the alien in the castle. Why had he not found anything else about this?

They discovered it had faint drawings on walls like ancient magicians had, even though there were charts of nearby stars, of the central galaxy, and there were piles of animal skins, with ancient blood marks with drawings of creatures with symbols beside them, and one with a diagram of a type of telescope.

He had checked old occult books, and still there was nothing!

He had an interest in investigating paranormal activity, as well as aliens, and though he had never properly proven the existence of anything of that nature he still investigated everything of that nature, and never properly proved anything. Could this thing be from some form supernatural place, and want to hide it?

He was famous all over the ship, and its media, and he knew all the major scientists, and knew the only two scientists who believed in it and had the field of investigating the paranormal, and who were there to investigate anything in that region for a paranormal association, and he had known them for years, and had accompanied them on a few of their investigations, and they still avoided giving anything that could prove anything.

They were very accurate in their investigations and checked everything to their limits, searching for the proof that they had always dreamed of coming across, and never took anything without reflection, and had built up the most advanced research paranormal establishment that there was, containing the most highly advanced equipment that there was available, but again what had they found but an alien that might have an interest in things that looked like magic.

Yet they were there to investigate what other scientists could not, and do it to a far greater degree than before, and had been more successfully than their wildest dreams.

He still thought they could detect something that had gone undetected by everyone else with their detection methods and equipment, which he had not heard of being available anywhere else, and which they were making leaps forward in advancing.

At their research laboratory he was staggered, as they had advanced far further again, and had many leading scientists working with them, and he wondered what they were up to now.

They had the place packed solid with ever form of equipment possible, and they acted like they were experimenting to see how far they could push beyond the boundaries of natural science, and out it to the supernatural.

Their new equipment was everywhere all over it, and the scientists and assistants were speedily altering and monitoring everything.

The bright sky of the center of space amazingly beamed through with beams of light like a dim sun through a porthole in the spacecraft, and showed the edge of the black hole center, and its black abyss.

“What are you up to now!” he finally asked Bryan, the younger of the two paranormal scientists, as they completely ignored him.

“Tracking the alien!”

“What you have found it?” he asked, gasping, realizing it actually was aboard, and free to roam about.

“We have!”

“But why has nobody heard of this?”

“Because we just found it, and the military knows we are experimenting in finding it with our detection methods …”

Kruger realized how lucky he had been by going there, and wondered why he had been so lucky, and tried to remember why he had started to think of visiting them, and recalled it was mentions on the media of people seeing ghost images of an alien, and though he had dismissed it as another false story, and alien encounter, by people trying to get on the media, he thought there could be something there, as there were some others claiming that they had seen the alien from the void, and after thinking about it, had realized that he had not visited the two paranormal scientists for a long time, and wondered what they were up to.

 

Chapter 33

 

The Alien Encounter

 

A surreal dream grasped Kruger’s thoughts and drew him into it, with him mildly observing it while he happily rested.

It was a strange dreamy cartoon version of the outside world, with a colorful foggy darkish landscape, and he wondered why he sometimes had dreams that he was conscious in and others with him only coming to at the end of them, recalling it.

In lingering spots in the fog he caught sight of only darkness, which was rare on the world, and the black hole seemed to be the only properly dark place there, and he stared into its abyss, wondering what his brain was showing him, and if there was some form of reason for it being there, and he heard distant sounds or thoughts like whispers come out of the invisible dark zones, and taunt him, and he realized how real it was, and was surprised that his brain could produce such vivid images, and he thought of things it could be used for.

The energy of the stars was visible and he could feel the energy from them, and he saw they were not like the normal stars there that he had been viewing, but some form of energy formations, and he saw the mist was an energy formation too, and he was seeing them as what it was like, if he saw them as forms of energy, powerful and intelligent, which never really made sense when he thought about it, but it did as a fantasy.

It reminded him of a fantasy magical world under bright moons, with lunar radiance visible everywhere.

It was golden in places, and strange energy lights twinkled through thick areas of the energy mist. A bright light appeared deep in it, and he realized the depth of it. It was tremendous, and like looking into the depths of the universe.

He sensed the presence of something mysterious that existed there, and which he could not account for.

Again he wondered what it was, and studied the place. Even though he never recognized the exact place on the world, it looked familiar, and he realized that he could not grasp why it was there, and he was drawn out of the dream by noises, and realized he was being awakened by his communications device.

The voice of Bryan asked him where he was, and he called over that he was dreaming in his bed, and he opened his eyes and checked the time.

Even though it was early morning, ship’s time, the room was mostly dark!

“You wanted to me to contact you if anything happened,” Bryan stated, excitedly. “Well, something has! So you’d better get down here if you do not want to miss the action!”

He never answered and leapt out of bed in one bound, reaching for his clothes, and once dressed he raced out of the door and into his vehicle.

Though the trip there was fast, he had time to awaken fully, and think what was happening, and he knew it might be his first proper look at the alien, and its capture.

At the same moment he got out of the vehicle a loud ghostly shriek ripped right through him, as if some ancient monster from the darkness pit in hell were there.

Its momentarily stunned him, and he opened his eyes wide, and he marched out, observing everything in the corridor ahead, and all the scientists all grouped around their equipment, hidden out of view behind large objects at a doorway, with their equipment ready to take what action was needed, and he looked at the furthest point, before a bend, and saw something faintly move.

“One of our detection systems has picked up the alien,” Bryan explained to him, crouching and looking around at where it was hidden from view. “So if you want to see the thing get down here now! We’ll need you!”

Finally he was going to see it as it really was, and what it reacted like, and he wondered how much of a mistake it could be!

The altering version in energy bubble was powerful, and it would be a real danger to them if their equipment was not powerful enough to handle it, and he saw the equipment that they had used to put it in the energy bubble, and felt happy again.

At that moment a loud scream of a woman came from somewhere ahead, further along the opposite end of the corridor, and he saw a woman rush out of her quarters, and he heard the noises of something strange mingled in her sounds.

While he attempted to identify it other strange sounds appeared all about her, and he tried to recall hearing it before, and he saw many of the scientists looked stunned by everything, and as if they were preparing for a strange confrontation.

“Activate the energy bubble!” Mitchel whispered to the scientists, and they activated it, and the sounds vanished, and the scientists all looked disappointed, and stood up.

“What happened?” Kruger asked, staring about the corridor.

“It escaped again!” Bryan announced. “We thought at this close range we could capture it! It seems to have a way to detect our equipment putting the energy bubble around it and escape before it captures it!”

 

Chapter 34

 

The Ancient Alien

 

The time being had worked away for days, examining everything that it had encountered properly now, with its senses working correctly again, with proper energy supplies, while it slowly altered itself to its new environment and the humans, and making sure that it could not be caught in an energy bubble or anything by them again, making itself like an earlier version of its ancient race, so that could move faster and survive better.

It had examined their things in their empty rooms as it moved like a ghost through the walls, and examined their distant transmissions with interest, and was amazed at how far they had taken the technology, which its race had ignored the uses of, and it had picked up information being given about it, and it learned many things about them, and it learned about their technology, from their computers and stored information, which astounded it in the amount that was held, which went endlessly on, and it continued to examine and collect.

Their species had interested it greatly, and it seemed to have many things that its race had missed, and it even designed a new species of itself that took in all the improvements that it had found, and it had created copies of the new species, in the form of eggs, as it never had the means and space to create anything else, and it was the original way its species had reproduced itself.

There also was no other proper way to reproduce others without them being found, and perhaps be destroyed, and the eggs had been hidden away in ventilation shafts far from where any of the humans went, and it had searched for better places, as it prepared to create more, and other versions.

It had learned to survive hidden away in the shadows, and it started to like its existence and new way of life, which it had not realized it had missed.

The humans were very similar and did things in the ways of its original people, and it had started to like their version, and watched and monitored all their communications with interest.

It had recalled that a long time ago that it had encountered other intelligent life forms, and its examinations of them, and that they had been uncontrolled, and they had failed to be worth its time, and had failed to do any proper examination of them, and from its present findings it wondered why it had not realized that they could achieve a far greater race and technology.

Their world had been so different and so interesting, and when it examined their minds it started to realize the truth, and that it should have built a civilization and its existence there had been empty, and that it had achieved little, and it had even condemned its race for destroying itself.

Its powers to travel in time had been left virtually useless, even though there had been immense power sources aboard that it could use, it needed proper equipment, and it had been impossible to build without a great deal of time, and it could not produce without being caught, and it had to use small leaps though time.

While it had continued its explorations other parts of it detected their attempts at capturing it, and it successfully avoided being captured at close range, by the scientists with their equipment, and energy bubble, and it had avoided trying to capture the equipment, until it could be fully sure that it could get away with it.

The scientists that had done it had interested it a great deal, and it realized that their technology was far better than the rest, but it also sensed there had been dangers from them, and they had prepared for it to attack them, and that they had a defense against it, and it only monitored them at a distance, and made sure they never detected it when it did.

Sometimes when it had been near the life forms and it had examined their minds, thoughts, communications, and behavior, and took great interest in making replies to their communications, but pretending to be other humans, but it always remained an outsider, as it tried to find how well it could become a human, and it realized the best forms to take to avoid discovery.

On the barn world it had been on its own for an implausible amount of time, and even trapped, wishing to leave the world, and had wished many times to meet with others of its race, but had avoided creating others of its race as it had believed that it would not have been happy with them and their presence.

They would not be have been what it wanted, and it saw now that it could have altered them to be more like the humans. Its race had killed itself off, and destroyed an empire, and it believed that only certain types of them were what should have existed, and it believed that it could produce a proper race and civilization now, with all the information it had collected.

While exploring groups of humans it had once discovered another life form, which it never recognized, and had just avoided being detected by it, with its probing, and realized that it had been another alien of the entity that they had encountered in the void.

 

Chapter 35

 

The Alien Capture

 

The scientists eventually decided against going too near the alien, and located at a place where other scientists and the military could join them, where they could make an exit if anything went wrong, and was still close enough to make observations and use proper surveillance equipment to monitor it.

The alien had become predictable in its movements since it had successfully avoided all their attempts of capture, and Kruger started to realize that if this attempt failed that they many be stuck with it, and have a future problem.

It amazed him how far they actually were able to go to stop it!

The paranormal scientists had consultations with the other scientists and the military, and they now entirely left their minds open to what was there.

Yet what the two paranormal scientists had discovered was that the being was a time traveler, and was escaping from them by making jumps through time, which virtually made it indestructible, if they could not find a way of defeating it.

Yet they found that it only made small leaps forward through time, and all that they needed to do was find a way of handling this problem, and it was found that the scientists had developed time travel since its existence had been proven with the energy bubble, and they had found ways of mimicking it, but could only send energy forward in small leaps, and they had found that it reappeared about the same amount of time in the future after each jump, and that it never bothered to alter and vary it.

Their next big surprise was their first view of it through powerful optical equipment, used by advanced astrologists, to give them a real view of the alien, and what they were up against.

“It is new!” Mitchel expressed, when he saw it first, and he allowed Bryan to see it, and he watched it as if he had been waiting all his life to see it, and gasped, and examined what he was looking for, and was staggered.

“What do you make of it?” Major Ripley asked, walking over to them. “We still have nothing put forward on its identity!”

The two scientists consulted quietly, and seemed to avoid giving a firm answer or anything that they would regret.

Mitchel answered, “It is still in an energy form though, and taking some solidness! And we can barely see its features! We think it has altered itself to an earlier version of its species. Perhaps to survive better here! It has many incredible hidden powers, which we have not even heard of before! It has a very mysterious nature! And though we do not know fully what the hell the thing is, we can still recapture it! We have not heard of anything like it!”

Kruger wondered again if they thought it was of paranormal origins, and if they were avoiding ruining their reputations on something that could turn out to be something else, and he then heard them mutter it in a silent conversation with each other.

What surprised him and a few others the most about them was how they reacted and treated such things when there was a suggestion of there being the supernatural there, and he wondered again if they had something at last or were actually covering up something else. He wondered if they would ever prove anything, which they must have been waiting the majority of their lives for.

He even wondered if they actually did find anything if what they showed would be enough to prove its existence and that they were dealing with something supernatural, as explanations could appear to prove that it was not, which it usually was, and the alien was a highly advanced alien that had taken an ancient form.

They consulted with each other openly on what it could be many times, clearly attempting to get the others to give them their thoughts, while leaving things open to anyone to add to, and for the other scientist to give their thoughts freely, and what they mainly agreed to was that they thought it was new, and of an entirely new status.

After a great deal of discussions and surveillance, checking of readings, and of observations through monitors from every form of surveillance, from all the equipment everyone had set up at every conceivable angle, they all remained set on leaving everything on what could happen open, and they took recordings of all the information, and only admitted to that it was more advanced than anything that they had seen, and perhaps would ever see, in many areas.

Kruger was sure that the alien would know of their presence if it was advanced as they claimed, and wondered why it never shifted away through time, or over to another region, as it could easily shift through walls and get away. But he believed the military was surrounding the region, at a distance.

And he wondered what would happen if they just waited at the site for it to arrive, if they made it leap forward in time, and realized that it could just leap again, and they might not see it for a long time if it kept making jumps forward. Though it could only jump so far, and clearly had limited powers, which would not allow it to continue to keep making jumps forward.

All the scientists finally agreed to begin and activated their equipment to create the energy bubble about the alien, and it instantaneously vanished, and they followed it through time with their equipment and used it to capture it in time, putting the energy bubble around it as it arrived at its destination, and they kept it there with the more advanced and more powerful energy bubble, which would not allow it to escape from the destination in the future, and they waited until they reached that point in time, and they had it again.

 

Chapter 36

 

The Time Being’s Release

 

Kruger was staggered when he had first heard the news, and that they were going to release the time being onto the world, and allow it its freedom, and that the scientists had made a deal with it, for the privilege, and had received vast amounts of knowledge.

They were miles out on the strange world, with the immense GX1 resting right across the horizon, going up into the sky for miles, which was higher than any of the highest mountains there, and they viewed their achievement proudly.

All the leading scientists and military were there and seated in front of the alien in the energy bubble, which was calm and not altering any longer, and it watched its audience with bizarre interest, with thoughts that they could only guess.

The thing did not look deadly, and pulsated with energy fluctuations, and the two paranormal scientists had their scientists reduce the energy acting on it and allowed it to speak again to them, as they observed it.

“We have made an agreement, and you gave us all the scientific knowledge for your freedom?” Bryan firmly stated, watching the thing, with a few surprised looks, as though he had never believed he would be doing such a thing.

“Yes!” it replied, staring.

“You’re better off here on this world, going by all our information!” Bryan explained. “This could be a great world, if it was exploited wisely …”

The being, still an energy form, moved itself to show its understanding.

It was incredible they had found a way to lower the energy bubble, and its influence on it, and had managed to communicate with it, and had been amazed that it had actually learned to speak in their language, just like a human.

Many leading people including the president had met with it, and they had soon made agreements with it, as they had done on many worlds with many aliens, and had the right to carry out such agreements, and make many offerings to them.

They had many conversations with it, which had concluded with their agreement with each other, and they had made the being their acting head of the world, and its president.

They were even surprised that they had influenced the being so much with their civilization and GX1 that it had intensions of now building its own similar civilization, and they agreed to help it with what it needed.

All the explorations of the world had been completed, and they were making a withdrawal from the region.

The scientists began carefully bringing in its eggs that they had detected, all through the ship, and allowed it to confirm that they were all there, and they turned the energy bubble off and allowed it its freedom, which could have been dangerous at one point, but they now had a way to stop it doing anything if it decided to change its mind.

The time being slowly altered into its normal solid state, to show them its true identity, and not its energy states or its original ancient species state, which it had acquired to survive, and they were surprised how human it looked, even with its large size. But most of all how much it looked like a medieval wizard – especially with its immense cloak, covered in ancient symbols and stars, with only a suggestion of its power on its ancient intelligent face, and Kruger wondered how deadly they looked to it, even though their size was nothing like its.

By its reactions he could tell that it had something that it could use against them, but it could not win, and he glared at it trying to find a clue.

The time being waved its arms and all the eggs vanished away, to somewhere else. Perhaps to its tower room, now back at the top of the castle, where they had replaced it.

The alien was an astounding as a life form as an entity, and was full of energy, and Kruger was sure it had conquered all forms of sickness, as well as immortality, and he was sure it was many thousands of years old, and wondered what marvels it had encountered, and he wondered if humans would one day alter into such beings, with such powers.

 

Chapter 37

 

The New Project

 

When Kruger arrived at the paranormal scientists laboratory he realized straight away that they had something, by the way they were working away and making all the scientists work like crazy to finish their project, which he never even attempted to recognize this time, as the complexity and unfamiliarity of it was too great, and he could only stare in bewilderment at what was there.

It was beyond his imagination, and by looks he spotted it was the same for many of the scientists, and he started thinking of the time being and what had recently being happening. He was glad that it had gone on their side, and they were now even working with it, and they had learned a great deal about it, and far more than they could have. Yet the thing could be dangerous beyond belief, and he wished it never existed or they had never found it. At times it resembled one of the most hideous things he had seen!

Their number one problem now was that they had not found a way to return to the universe, and no matter how much they worked on the project it still never resolved anything. The problem that confronted them was that they could not locate the universe, and there was no proper way available, and signs kept indicating that they would be stuck there.

It was not the fact that the universe that they were in had anything wrong with it, it was the fact that they had people to return to and things to complete by returning and the mission would also be a disaster, and the biggest, most expensive, highly advanced spacecraft would be even classed as a flop, and he doubted if they would ever build another, and it would be a disaster that would ruin all their work, and incredible discoveries, if mankind never received it, and all the future would be altered by the technology and GX1 not being there, and them not warning them of what they had encountered.

They had to return, and they would not stop working on the problem until they had achieved it.

He decided to introduce himself to Bryan, as he stopped his work, of analyzing a device.

“Well, what have you come up with now?” he asked, looking bewildered, realizing it was getting worse, and he now could not identify anything there.

The place was packed with newly manufactured equipment, which he had known they were working on and creating all over the place at different locations, and he had been too involved with his work to bother about investigating it.

“You know we got a great deal of scientific breakthroughs from the time being! Well, the major one was time travel!”

“Time travel!” he gasped, and recalled the presence of Don, and the events that might have made him appear there.

“Yes! It is incredibly complex, and we have everyone that we have working on this project!”

“What will you use time travel for?”

“A time probe! We are going to send a probe back in time, and it will follow the spacecraft back into the black hole and locate the universe, and we will also use it to examine the outer universe, and the other universes there, and find ways to locate them!”

 

Chapter 38

 

The Time Probe

 

The time probe was launched and vanished into the past, to chase the spacecraft back in time, to follow the spacecraft back into the black hole, and voyage beyond the universe, and approximately one minute later it reappeared, after the completion of its mission, with it having traveled back into the future to a minute afterwards.

Kruger gasped at the technology behind it, and realized there could a whole hidden universe about him of multidimensional things and objects traveling in time.

The probe resembled some form of highly advanced missile, and he examined it looking for any damage, and for any signs of powerful forces acting upon it, and hardly saw anything and it looked like it had been when it had left.

He wondered what uses such an object could have. Space probes were still being used all over the place, and were cheaper and far better than sending out spacecrafts, and he thought of all the missions that it could carry out.

They had to be able to find and identify the outer universes, and once the scientists had checked all its information, they all started rejoicing, and started announcing all the information to the media, and that they could go home.

The incredible thing was there were no signs in the recorded voyage of the white entity globes that he had seen there when he had entered the outer universe, and he had questioned others about it and found that nobody but him and the two paranormal scientists had seen them, and they had only given terrifying accounts of them thinking that they had been dieing there.

The problem with the actual voyage, and them traveling as energy forms in such a mind-bending way, was it was not acceptable, and it could only be used if their lives depended upon it, and after some investigations he found out that they intended to use an energy beam that would put everyone aboard to sleep as they entered the black hole, and that they would be immediately awakened on their return to the universe, and they would not even realize what had happened.

The launch from the world was tremendous, and everyone celebrated going home, and what it would be like returning home, with all their stories and discoveries, and Kruger thought of the alien in its castle.

They had given it everything that they could to start its civilization, and its eggs had hatched, and it started using all the equipment and supplies that they had provided.

Kruger watched the voyage into the black hole on a large screen with all the scientists, as they all rested in a large hall in seats, where they would be put to sleep when they left the universe, like being thrown into suspended animation.

The voyager darted straight towards the black hurricane shape, of particles of space matter, asteroids, moons, planets, and suns.

Its black region stretched across the screen like a black monster, and some form of new galaxy, with formations of swirls of matter going around it.

Some people reacted nervously as the deep black radius swiftly grew, and some gritted their teeth as its blackness engulfed them, and darkness covered the screen, and he saw objects darting into it in lines of light, and the screen lit up with diagram lines, marking the blackness with lines showing different regions of it with symbols marking various points of it, and the voyager went straight to a region marked in its depths.

The tremendous speed seemed to increase as it gripped and pulled it towards it, and the voyager shook, and they fell asleep as it turned like to an earthquake tremor.

 

Chapter 39

 

The Universe

 

The universe was strange, and he wondered if they were the first to experience the sensation. It was like some element there was not in the other universe, and he also felt that there was something else in the other universe that was not there.

The mission was a complete success, and everyone aboard was rejoicing, and all the scientists were excitedly working through all the information that they collected in the outer universe, and they were just starting their mission of putting it all together, before they returned to the Earth.

They had traveled through the entire outer universe without knowing it, and had awoken to the site of the universe, when their equipment had put them back into space and time, at the same location, in the void, and they were leaving the void and the entity behind, and he wondered what it had been and if they had picked it up wrongly, and if they could have made a deal with it in the same way as they had done with the time being back on the world.

It was unbelievable the amount of advances that they had achieved, and he wondered if it was a mistake or if they would be remembered in the future for transforming their empire into something incredible.

They could now travel space and time and locate themselves in other universes, dimensions, times, and use leaving space and time to relocate themselves just about anywhere in the universe, and he wondered if the they made the GX1 outdated already, which they would never have believed could happen.

In fact the only real damage he now had was the death of his girlfriend, Marsha Pendleton, who died hideously from being attacked by the alien monster in the void, and he regretted it immensely, and having to go back and tell everyone about her death, and he started to realize that they had time travel, and he might be able to go back and save her.

The whole trip could very well be ruined by it, and he would know that he could have prevented it, and he decided to try to persuade the two paranormal scientists into allowing him to go back and save her, and went over to their research center.

When he arrived he was startled to see Don there, and wondered what was going on, and examined them trying to see what they were up to, and he felt that they had predicted his arrival by some means, and they seemed startled that Don was there too.

“We have some good news!” Bryan eventually announced, after he had finished examining his reactions, seeing he was not going to say anything. “Don wants to go back in time to save Marsha Pendleton, as he thinks it was his faulty that she was killed …”

“Can you actually send him back?” he asked, begging for it to be true.

“We can, and we can return him to the void in vehicle four!”

Kruger could not believe his luck, and realized how lucky he was now! He realized that Don was probably more determined to save her, after all the things that he had been through, and he had more experience than him of time travel.

“I believe that I can save her by relocating her to the right location before the alien attacked the spacecraft, as I have located areas that were not attacked …”

“Why do you not just stop the alien getting aboard?”

“For one thing I am not sure that I could do it, and changing that could do a great deal more damage …”

“He cannot go that far!” Mitchel replied, firmly. “He could alter everything – and we could end up in a worse scenario! We never knew the alien was there, and if is possible for him to kill it or even stop it, the entity may do something else, and may succeed in doing it …”

Kruger was amazed and thanked them greatly, especially for not having to go back there and go through it all again.

Many things about time travel confused him, and he had a hard time working things out, and wondered if they were as positive of the outcome as they made out, as he thought he would be the one to go back in time, and he would be Don.

“What I don’t get is what will happen to Don if he goes back? Will another version of him appear here after he has gone back, and will there be four versions of me back there?”

“It’s a problem, and you will have to accept the consequences for altering it! It is not the same as in the movies though!”

Once they had all agreed to everything they left and went to vehicle four, where the scientists had sent up their equipment to send it back in time and back to the void.

After a while Kruger began to realize that the real problem was the sending of Don back, as they had not had that much experience of doing it so accurately, and had to check everything.

It was clear that the scientists had to lower the energy shield, and replace it quickly, as they were sure that it could not travel through it, as well as other dimensions, and he realized why they were doing it now, and not earlier at a close range to the world, and that they had probably detected that the entity there was out of range to do anything, with the energy shield down.

Don got into the vehicle firmly, and Kruger wondered again why he was so confident and always knew what he was doing. He had tried to question him many times, but had failed to get anything, and he just put it down to him having done everything before, which was staggering thinking back on it all, from his perspective, as Don could have told them, but had not, and he never realized what would happen.

All the scientists stood back as the equipment burst into life, using massive amounts of energy, through attached cables, with the shear energy making the spacecraft about them vibrate, and lurch backwards and forwards.

Kruger for a moment hesitated and wished he had forced them into giving him more information on what they were doing.

White translucent lights appeared magically around the vehicle, as it floated inertly in mid-air, in front of their eyes, like stars in space, and the scientists continued activating controls and monitoring it, and energy discharges fired out at regions of it, and the translucent lights around the vehicles simultaneously increased to bright whiteness, and the power being used could be felt in vibrations and heavy thuds.

A ferocious blast of light exploded out from the center of the vehicle, and it turned transparent and shifted, creating fuzzy transparent dimensional forms beside it, from time shifts, and some formed clustered layers.

It resembled an altered projection of reality magically hovering there, in patterns of energy, and after a sudden explosion of movement it vanished.

 

Epilogue

 

The Alien/Entity Returns

 

The new alien entity had remained almost dormant within the human that it had created, with its automatic senses taking scans of its surroundings.

The human was perfect, and had been the perfect place to dwell undetected by the humans, who believed the human had been something else, and had failed to realize the truth.

It had collected all forms of information about everything, and had collected far more than it needed and had visualized, and it had analyzed everything in a greater degree than it had as the entity in the void.

It had been staggered by the outer universe and the world that they had explored, and had analyzed its surroundings and their information with amazement, and had repeatedly thanked the humans for giving it the chance to study such phenomena.

Everything at first had been beyond its knowledge, and it had been an exploration beyond its wildest thoughts, and it had even considered if there had been others like it there, and if they had created it all, with inconceivable dimensions and powers, far beyond its knowledge and powers, like itself had been compared to its original self billions of years in the past.

The void had been nothing compared to the outside universe, and universes! It had all the relevant information that the entity in the void had, and it had been built to handle what it possibly could, and had been a compressed miniaturized version of it, which had been created with the help of the knowledge it had discovered from the GX1.

It had observed the GX1 from its interior, and its technology had been incredible, and it had decided to recreate it and had changed its plan to capture it, and it had collected enough information to recreate it.

It now only needed to return to the entity in the void to complete its mission, which it was about to do, and it now not only knew how to allow it to recreate the incredible powers of the GX1, and travel hundreds of times the speed of light, and recreate the invincible energy screen, ultimate computers, and other technology, it could travel beyond the universe, and travel through time, and this was only the beginning as once the entity in the void received the information it would soon alter itself into an entirely new form capable of anything that was possible.

It soon sensed the entity outside in the void and altered itself, from being Don, and left the vehicle, as it had been programmed to do, and it became one with the entity.

 

Part III

 

Prologue

 

The Lost Voyager

 

For billions of years the transcendent time/space voyager probe had existed never wholly knowing what had created it or where it had originated, carrying out its mission of searching through time and space in its universe for abnormalities, unknown civilizations and species, and transcendent entities with colossal powers and capabilities and to destroy them if they were dangerous to reality and what its programming considered dangerous.

It had been designed and given technology beyond anything else that it had encountered and had the abilities to search its universe in a degree and with abilities that would not have been believed to exist by the most advanced transcendences and civilizations, and would have been thought of as magical powers, and it had the ability to search its universe throughout time.

Its form had been an invisible complex mass of energy, stored in many dimensions, that had been built to last forever, and it directly entered stars to energize itself and store its vast powers for extensive amounts of time.

Its stores of information had been vast and it had the ability to collect as much information on what it had been programmed for eternally and improve its defenses and other abilities, and it had become the ultimate weapon of destruction against the destruction of its universe.

It had stored the technology and abilities of zillions of species and had the ability to recognize and handle what it had been searching for within a range of its universe.

At one point it had unintentionally left the universe and had entered an outer universe that it had not known the existence of, where colossal amounts of universes had existed, and on its entrance there its programming had accepted it as the real universe and that it had to accept it as the universe that it had to carry out its mission in.

At first it had been unable to enter the universes and properly detect anything in them and it used all its information and studied how it had entered the outer universe and found a way to enter them and locate particular things in them, but infinite amounts of things of unknown origins existed in them.

In supernatural universes it had learned to open and use gateways that shifted it accurately to destinations. It discovered far more than it had ever realized could exist and it gave itself colossal magical abilities and energies and it had analyzed everything in a greater degree.

On its first entrances to this universe and world it had been left staggered when it had encountered something of unknown origins that had drained its energy from it!

Even though it had not done much in its damaged condition, with most of its vast abilities virtually unusable and it being trapped and buried away in a castle, it had been able to explore things through supernatural gateways into universes, going out into the strangest places, and it had even considered if there had been others such as it in the endless universes and if they had created it, and if it could get them to help it, and it had gained abilities to explore inconceivable dimensions and powers in the universes, far beyond its original knowledge and powers.

 

 

 

II

 

In 1620 its materialization had been witnessed by fishermen in the morning mist over the sea, like a crazy shooting star.

Accounts of its accelerated motions and alterations, as a crazy ghost formation, on the brink of existence, emerged from the fishermen, who had taken it to the castle.

According to legends all the people who had come into contact with it had been found dead, and it had been left buried away.

One of the most powerful paranormal objects in existence, with powers going beyond anything else, with power surges opening gateways, turned it into the deadliest haunted castle in existence.

For centuries lost treasure had been thought to exist at the castle by a few explorers, who carried out investigations and searches at the castle, of which many paid by losing their lives.

The castle had been the most dangerous and haunted place in the world and nobody lived there, or near it. People never survived living permanently in its confines! Even though its powers sometimes dwindled and some people managed to survive, and escape, and had given horrific accounts of mind-bending wonders and deadly menaces beyond people’s imaginations.

Once, in 1880, it turned dormant and a wealthy businessman had found the castle, while visiting the region, and had bought it, recognizing its value, and its historical importance, its colossal architecture and dimensions, and had seen it had been worthless at the location, and had it shipped in sections to New York, where it had ended up at a secret location, in the depths of a desolate wood and region, hidden away from anyone relocating it, with what had been there reactivated.

 

 

 

III

 

The sounds had initially been astonishing! Now they had gone beyond, and were mind-bending! They came screaming up through the shaft with a dangerous fury that stunned Pendleton, and no matter how he tried to shake it off and contemplate identities his thoughts never altered or formed stable recognitions.

Clouds of powdered dirt and stone swirled about through beams of lights from the above lights as he released some more rope, edging him downwards, seeking to get hold of the treasure.

The Second World War was still going, but just about over, and Pendleton realized that he had avoided being killed after all, and wondered if he was going to be killed here instead, and was unsure what was worse.

He groaned and dangled about on his rope, and grabbed hold of part of a castle boulder, while glimpsing parts of the shaft above, wondering if he could have wangled his way out of it. But it was not really them and he really wanted to do it, and he wanted to explore the castle shaft. He had always wanted to explore and discover something new of value and greatness, and perhaps even be remembered in history.

What interested and terrified them was why the treasure was hidden in such a place with such occurrences!

What was it they were dealing with anyway? Why was it there in such a far out place? Was the stuff protected by something?

Something of unfathomable unidentifiable supernatural nature sounded as though it were under the castle, in some form of magnetic field or energy field, trapped or trying to free itself from something, ultimately escaping to another location of liberty, and he tried imagining some form of spirit trapped there every night for hundreds of years, perhaps in an ancient dungeon. Yet again even that could not explain it, or anything!

“Have you found if it’s down there?” Henrik shouted down, in a combination of extreme annoyance and confusion, with a way that gave Pendleton the impression that the two archaeologists up above might be on the edge of considering doing something extreme, and beyond their normal. Though Norgrove, the other archaeologist, gave him the impression that he had waited all his life to be here!

He again started to realize the implications of the find and that they would have to check what was there, no matter what.

He quickly shouted up: “You investigated all these walls?”

“Yes!” Norgrove replied. “We used all the best equipment.”

“We’re the only ones here and that know about it?” he replied, still trying to find out more about what was happening, and they were allowing him to know. Basically it was just them three there at the great old immense haunted castle, buried away in the wood, at the location that they had traced the treasure to.

Yet they could have left the task until the morning but they could not wait. They had waited too long and had gone too far to get their hands on it, and he just wanted to get it.

What the hell difference did it make if it was morning or night? It was dark there in the tunnel at both times!

He wondered why the lights were above, and why he never had one, and shouted up, “Are you two coming down here or what?”

The two archeologists shifted into the shaft and made their way down, with the lights, and he observed them, and realized why they had not given him a light, and that he was like a worm on a fishing line, and there to check what the score was. The two also had trouble climbing in and down, and were overweight and bulky, and he was better at climbing than they were. They would have a hard time getting back up again! And he even wondered if they would camp the night at the bottom or something, if they were too tired and sleepy, which made him gasp again when he thought about it, and he lodged his boot into a gap between two of the boulders, to rest his tired body.

“What did they find out?” he muttered, mainly to himself, and wondered what he was missing again.

“There are other small shafts running through here …” Henrik called down, dangling overhead, who had stopped to examine a small hole in the shaft, he had missed in the darkness there.

“Ventilation shafts that connect together,” Norgrove continued. “They must run through most of the building.”

“I agree! I’m sure they are for an ancient ventilation …” Henrik continued, sticking his head up close, and shining his light in the hole and looking along it.

“What else could it be?” Pendleton asked.

“They could have been used to build it …” Henrik replied, moving away, looking for something else.

Pendleton wondered how high up they were, as the height of the castle was immense, and they had been on the top floor, and they never knew how far underground it went, and the blackness there looked like an abyss.

The height of the castle was incredible, as well as the length being massive with rooms and corridors going out everywhere, especially with there being no proper lighting, and he had not thought such a construction was possible at the date that they had given. It was also unbelievable that somebody had managed to ship the thing over to America, and when it must have happened, in such large sections and fit them together.

How could people spend so much on such things and leave them derelict, out in such desolate woods? Why had it not even been put out in the open for everyone to see?

Pendleton gasped as he recalled the legends and what had already happened, and wondered if this would be his death, in a death or glory situation.

For a moment he wondered if it had actually come from Transylvania and had vampires, and realized that if it were at least he would be still around as a vampire. At times he had thought it had similarities to castles over there.

“So are we going down …?” Henrik asked firmly, watching Pendleton’s peculiar expressions in his light, from overhead.

“You could send down a camera with a light attached?” Norgrove moaned sarcastically, and Pendleton started to move off from the wall where he was resting against, and prepared himself, and took glances at what was below as he started going down, but even with the lights being closer it never revealed anything new.

The rope suddenly started swaying and vibrating furiously, giving the impression that Henrik was frantically doing something against Pendleton’s rope, and he glanced up and realized Henrik was climbing up for some reason, and he gasped when he realized Norgrove’s face was frantic and that the two were actually desperately trying to escape from there, almost slipping trying to climb up, which amused him for a moment, bewildered at their sudden change of attitude.

As he tried to see what was going on he noticed that light across his front was not coming downwards from them but shining upwards from something below, and his eyes fixed onto a strange orb of light floating upwards.

“Get me out of here!” Henrik hollered, making Pendleton shudder and try to escape for his life.

Pendleton even thought of removing his harness and plunging down, and perhaps allowing him to have the fate of dying on the ground below, and having a normal human death.

With a loud thud Norgrove came crashing down to his original position after slipping, and clouds of gray dust flew up and blinded Pendleton as it went into his face and lungs, and he went crashing into the wall.

He groaned and dangled about on the rope, glimpsing parts of the shaft around him, mentally exhausted, needing sleep, allowing himself just to go into sleep state, wondering if he could somehow wangle his way out of it. But it was not a matter of persuading himself of anything, it was really happening, and he wished what was going to happen would just happen.

If he had only known all those years ago what would end up happing, he would have forced himself to forget about such ventures.

Sounds were now screaming out at him and he realized how loud they had become, from the abyss below, as if a gateway into hell were there, with him suspended over it on a thin rope, spinning endlessly, waiting to descend into its hideous reaches.

How had they managed to talk him into this? One minute they had been chasing treasure and the next a castle mysteriously appears into it, and he had been dumped with their theories, and then with the shaft.

He jerked, startled, hearing a sort of scream, almost human but somehow different, as though out of a distant strange place, and he visualized it out in space, in blackness.

There were traces of rotted vegetation floating in the light coming down from overhead, as they still continued to climb out.

Some of the blocks of stone about him resembled the stones in Egyptian pyramids. They were strange things to use to build, but they were hard to penetrate, and needed in a good castle.

He realized sounds were now not emerging from under him but coming were from somewhere above, and then they started emerging about him and he listened intensely with confusion.

Sounds manifested everywhere as though invisible creatures were surrounding them, and strange glowing and swirling forces formed and went about them and telepathic figures like spirits with shrouds swirled about it, wailing and screaming, and he partially entered a dream state, and as it increased he believed he was holding onto reality.

A bright explosion of colors exploded out making him come to, and realized the thing below him had reached him and he opened his eyes wide and examined his surroundings and saw that he was no longer in the shaft, and dazed and confusedly he examined his surroundings and an immense whirlpool of shifting outlines magically shifted by, and he studied everything and realized that he had no body or proper presence and was some form of energy formation shifting around with other similar formations, and that he was swirling out into a vortex of reshaping energy patterns that replaced reality, with transforming elements altering to something that he could not recognize.

If he had died and gone into the afterlife why was it so strange? Why it was there mesmerized him! Was he classified as being anything? Where was it? Reality was no more than magically spinning patterns and he wondered how worse the situation could get, realizing that he could be trapped there for all eternity!

 

 

 

I

 

The Lost Castle

 

 

Chapter 1

 

The Supernatural Castle

 

At night they immediately became trapped in the dark strange wood, with altered trees, freezing in deep snow, where they spotted strange black figures in the distance, while mysterious lights startled them, and they heard something occasionally violently smash trees down nearby.

What staggered Bryson the most was that they never knew how to return, and as they rushed away, they held their belief that they would be saved once again, and that there would be an eventual conclusion, but the snow grew thick and shrouded everything everywhere, creating a mind-bending landscape, and they soon became too exhausted to recognize anything.

It was shocking how lost they were, but the moonshine showed them the strange mind-bending landscape ahead!

The sounds of life forms and other strange things hidden away there became dangerous and astonishing, and at times they came screaming out of the dark wood, and also through what sounded like shafts in the ground somewhere, and with a dangerous fury that stunned Bryson, and no matter how much they tried their thoughts never seemed to properly achieve stable recognitions.

For some reason he began to believe there were supernatural regions in the universe, and that they had entered one version, and he was surprised that one of the others mentioned it openly, as if he knew he had known it, and he tried to grasp what the place and places could be and were really for, and considered all the destinations, trying to grasp what the place was doing there.

Some of the others were sure that they had discovered far more than they realized and that it could prove the existence of colossal magical abilities and energies and he analyzed everything in a far greater degree, searching for an answer.

Out of nowhere a colossal light emerged out the undergrowth, and pulsated like a life form, magically illuminating the deep lifeless snow and trees everywhere he looked, and seemed to silence the noises and things surrounding them.

The light allowed them to see almost everything across their front, and they spotted what was a structure buried away in the trees, and Bryson realized that it was the castle, and that they had actually found it, and it was a strange form of castle, buried and hidden deep away in the landscape and colossal wood, and he examined it astounded at its immense size and how it could be built there, and he had a sensation that the structure had colossal power, which would eventually leave him staggered!

The deep snow and freezing cold was a nightmare, and their legs sank into stinking vegetation and muck that started to resemble quicksand in places, and another light emerged deep in the undergrowth and pulsated like a living form, magically illuminating the snow and trees going everywhere, and they accelerated their speed.

The castle even became the most blissful thing he could think of as he saw the dangers radiating through the wood, and they forced themselves on.

Behind them the shifting lights of glowing life forms became vicious and darted about everywhere in the blackness and landscape, and he thought he saw ghostly images of intelligent humanoids, doing hideous things.

Chapter 2

 

The Lost Castle

 

At the front of the haunted castle it was staggering, and he could not even grasp its value, and they were about to reach its entrance when the structure lit, and radiated through the region, mass of trees and foliage, silencing what was there to their astonishment, with its colossal powers, and they examined its colossal size going out into the distance about them and its height going away high over the trees.

Entering a veil of mist, forming at its entrance, created sensations that they were not alone there, and they were there for some hideous purpose, and they blindly entered the ghost oasis, out on the edge of reality, on the bounds of what lay beyond, with them seeking sanctuary and reality.

On their entrance, of its opened entrance, and exit from the hideous jungle, the entrance closed behind them, like a trap, and they saw its interior illuminated in dim light, and Bryson heard vicious heavy beast sounds furiously exploding outside, clearly making last attempts at threatening to destroy them.

Somewhere over to the side of the castle they listened to powerful movements rapidly taking something nearby, and he wondered what was protecting them, and stopped them doing anything to them, and he gasped and saw a faint colossal ghost shape in an area of deep blackness behind him, inside the structure itself, along a corridor, and it floated through the darkness, and altered and vanished.

The situation was bad and he wondered what the hell the place was doing there, and why such a place should and could even exist, without destroying itself!

Who the hell had built such a thing? Should they leave the place, until the morning?

Was there even a morning there? There could be great dangers, waiting on them, but they could find a region where they never existed, and survive!

They had survived so far! There was food and shelter, and some of them had guns!

Something had to be keeping what was there in existence, and if they stayed alive long enough they might find it, and survive!

 

Chapter 3

 

Inside the Castle

 

In the morning all the disturbances and things in the woods vanished and they began to see what the castle was like in daylight, and that the castle was buried away in thick trees and undergrowth, and was colossal, and Bryson was sure that it was far longer and wider than any type of football field, and as high as an average eight-story building (and could even reach up to 150 meters long and 60 meters wide, and 30 meters high).

The builder, William Randall, who had built a castle already, surely would not have built it so massive at the date that it had been built, and he wondered if the people that rebuilt it there had built it bigger! If it was built for defense, like most castles had been, why did he need it to be such a size, as it would have been far easier to build and defend a small castle? He would have needed and had to have maintained an immense army for decades!

Everything he had seen of people of that time had been done logically! Yet he realized it was exaggerated and that William Randall had built it, as he had built the last large castle, but not as large as it, and it might have been to show his immense power and wealth, and an army would also have thought twice before attacking such a construction, and they could easily have thought it held a powerful king, while it being buried away in a wood would have added to its defense.

He was determined to solve all the riddles, and prepared himself to find the proper answers!

He was determined to ignore the events of the past few days and concentrate on what was in the castle. He had seen little of it in the darkness with their lights, and it was cold and smelled of dampness, and nobody left the location at the lounge at the door.

Most of the night had been subjected to false alarms of the things in the wood reappearing there, and they had been glad when the morning arrived.

Later on he and Mortimer and Merton went outside to see it in the light of day and were surprised and disappointed. It was unbelievable and historical, but had fallen into being a derelict. Vegetation and trees virtually entirely covered it, including its roof, and it was part of the wood. It was lucky the interior was preserved, as they would have had a bad time staying there.

Bryson studied pieces from exterior walls strewn about in the undergrowth, and immense square boulders and other parts.

They wandered around it checking what they could but a lot of it was hidden from view, and he had a hard time realizing how they had been able to move it there! Why they had allowed such a valuable construction to become derelict? And realized again that it was the haunting of it and its deadliness! There were abundant deaths marked as occurring there! He thought the last castle had been bad but this one was deadly beyond belief and people avoided it to save their lives!

He wondered if they should have just left it! If they could not get rid of what was there they could be playing with something of great danger that could result in an immense amount of deaths, for decades to come.

Bryson made a rough drawing/map of it as they wandered around. At the front there seemed to be only the one central door, but there were others at the sides and back, and there was one at a kitchen at the back.

The front door had a hall that led to the other side of the castle, and long corridors of rooms went from one end of the castle to the other all the way through it. With different shaped and sized rooms everywhere. The majority of it was confusing, and he found little to answer his queries. The floors above were not identical, and he considered his theory that the place was built to scare off enemies with its magnitude and value, and he put all the things in it there for the building and with no real use. Yet if an army and other group of people stayed there it could well have all been used by them. They could have been complex and advanced people of that age and did many things not normally done.

He wondered where William had stayed in it, and where his room was located? Perhaps at the top floor, where he would have had a good view of his wood and grounds?

When they arrived back in the castle he heard Mitchell on his phone and listened to his conversation and that he was bringing in all their supplies, as they had planned to do once they had found and entered the castle. They had an area on the remains of the lane to it where the helicopters could land.

All the rest of the scientists and psychic investigators and their highly advanced equipment, to begin a detailed investigation, were being brought, as well as more men to help Mitchell, and as well as food supplies they were bringing generators for proper power supplies for the lights and everything else.

 

Chapter 4

 

The Legends

 

Throughout centuries the place had been viciously subjected to deadly mind-bending forces and manifestations!

Legends were extraordinary, bordering on absurd, and once Bryson got all his things off a helicopter he was able to check through the details that they had gathered in intense investigations at loads of locations, which was used to locate the lost castle.

The origins, from a majority of accumulated sources, to which he and the others had proven had occurred, occurred around 1620 when fishermen at a Scottish fishing village had witnessed the materialization of something of unknown origins, and that a bright light of magnitude had exploded out of the early morning mist over the sea, like a crazy shooting star, and had been seen landing.

After a great deal of observations, research, and discussions by the leading scientists they had agreed that the thing that they had found at Grovnor Castle, with its appearance there and its alien artifact creating gateways throughout space and time, could very well have been detected and located by it. The first had left traces through space and time for anything to detect!

Space and time could be full of things of unknown origins searching for other things of unknown origins throughout space and time. The description of the second revealed that it could well have been attempting to mimic the first and could have even been there to make contact with it or check what it was and analyze it.

Something encountering something new at an unknown location could easily assume that it belonged there, and they believed that when it had appeared there that it had assumed that the other thing had been an inhabitant of this world!

There was no proof that both encountered each other, and though the castles had been in the same region there had in fact been a great deal of distance between them. They also believed that though they had reached their destinations that neither had been able to achieve their objectives.

They knew why the original one had nearly been killed when it had made an appearance, when it had been found by fishermen, and that it had eventually died where the first castle had been built before the other had arrived, even though its powers had haunted that castle for centuries with its lost alien artifact hidden there.

Accounts of the other reshaping and continually altering its appearance showed that it had altered from something else and had been trying to adapt, and it having accelerated/decelerated motions and forms like a crazy entity/life form as it had appeared.

At first it had appeared to have damaged itself and be on the brink of losing its existence but it had been later perceived that it had entered some form of damaged or dormant state – surely exhausted of energy from either its extraordinary manifestation, or from its impact with the world, or it not even having existed in space and time.

The fishermen that found it had taken it to the most knowledgeable and powerful person there and to William Randall, who had been staggered by its existence, and who gave them his extensive knowledge and experience, but had displayed more confusion on its appearance than them.

He had taken it from them and it was never seen again, but years later, after the construction of William Randall’s second castle, they had heard of its activation at the second castle and that many deaths had occurred and that they had been trying use it for magical purposes – to foresee future occurrences – and to accumulate its powerful powers.

According to legends all the people there had been found dead, and it had left the most powerful magical object in existence at the castle – in whatever state and place they had left it – with powers going beyond anything else – with power surges opening gateways going beyond space and time – and with William Randall’s valuable treasure nearby.

For centuries the lost treasure had been thought to exist there by a few explorers, who had carried out investigations and searches for it, of which many had paid by losing their lives, by being in the confines of the castle at the wrong time or place.

No real clues to its whereabouts existed other than it was located near a magical object! The legends gave mentions of it but the actual details were too little and too vague and the occurrences at the place made it too confused to establish. All the facts were missing, but having seen what the William Randall had been like and that the other treasure had existed Bryson and the paranormal scientists thought he could have had it, and it was hidden there.

The place must have been one of the most dangerous places in the world and nobody attempted to live there, or even live near there. People could not survive permanently living in its confines! Even though most of the time its powers dwindled and some people had managed to survive and escape after living for months there, and had given horrific accounts of the mind-bending wonders and deadliest menaces that they had been subjected to.

At one point, in 1880, to which nobody knows why, its existence had become entirely dormant and a wealthy businessman had found the castle by accident while visiting the region and had bought it from the owners of the land.

He had recognized its value, historical importance, colossal architecture and dimensions, and had seen that it was worthless in the desolate wood, in the middle of nowhere, and had it removed in large sections and shipped across the Atlantic, where he had intended to reconstruct it near New York.

What occurred next was never revealed, and there occurred an extensive amount of lost information, and all that was known was that the owner had died in mysterious circumstances and that the castle had ended up at a different and secret location in the depths of an immense desolate wood, hidden away from anyone locating it, with what was there activated again.

 

Chapter 5

 

The Disturbances

 

When Bryson opened his eyes he never even knew what he was! He had no recognition of anything or where he was, or that he was in one of the rooms in the castle!

He was staggered and sat upright and turned on his room light, and wondered if it was caused by his exhaustion, done on the day before, or his lack of food, the severe cold and snow falling outside, or something in the castle influencing him.

The dreams that he had had been incomprehensible and he wondered if they had actually been dreams! They never made sense and had been made up with shimmering lights and freakish sounds being whirled about him, and like being in a colossal vortex, where he never thought or even did anything, and had been like he never existed and just experienced what was there.

He liked the room around him and how well preserved it was after such a length of time, and how well it had been made, especially for the era it had been from.

Merton was in the room next to his on the left and Mortimer’s room was next to that, and Mitchell was in the room next to Bryson on the other side, where he was next to his men.

They were all sleeping in rooms at the front of the left side of the second floor, with the stairs in the center of the castle.

Bryson noted the air was just cold and with no scent, and that it was cool and calm in the room, and he spotted that there was a really thick blanket of snow covering the wood outside. He remembered earlier and being in a huddled posture with his blankets tightly wrapped about him, with him reacting to the cold.

For a moment he recalled an earlier dream and that he had thought he had died and gone to some form of afterlife, and tried to recall everything he could about it. The dreams that he had at Grovnor Castle had given him vision of other places, and what could be hidden away, and he had visualized the places the creatures sounds there were coming from and had some insight into them and their environment.

The sky outside was dark even though it was snowing, and it was normally light where he lived with the streetlights and light being reflected from the snow illuminating it, and he realized how far they were from the outside world and this place this time had no roads or connections to anything. Their communications had gone when the dark winter night began.

It was so peculiar that he liked it more than he should have! His normal life and things he encountered were too repetitive and he relished finding abnormal things to do and explore, especially when they had new outcomes and findings.

He switched off his light and went over to the window and stared out into the darkness and ancient wood with a shiver running through him, from the cold, thoughts of the cold, and deadly things that they had encountered there.

It was like another world to him and they were put there to explore it, and it was like a world without a proper sun and thousands of light years of empty space between it and the stars.

The world below was a decomposing landscape shrouded in snow with weak energy.

An array of door knocks made the door shift about, reminding him of the age of the place, and he wondered again why it had such advanced objects and structure for that age, and he realized again that the people who had reconstructed it had done it up and that he was experiencing 1880 technology.

He slowly marched over and yanked open the thick wooden door, which had been clearly expertly crafted by hand, and he watched Merton and Mortimer standing glaring at him from the darkness outside, suggesting something was along the corridor. Bryson nodded and closed the door behind him and followed them along the outer corridor.

He still wondered why they liked being up in the middle of the night so much, and why he never had properly seen them tired in the middle of the night. Surely they never had that many things to do at night?

As he considered how sleepy he was and what they were up to, and then thought of other situations that they had done and of them awaking him in the middle of the night, and as he recalled situations he gasped as he suddenly realized that he could hear sounds emerging from somewhere further ahead, and he gasped even more when the sounds seemed to magnify and turn to being blared out.

It then mildly amused him as he recalled a similar situation, and he also realized that the sounds reminded him of his dream, but he could not notice any connection and why it did.

“What hell happened?” Mitchell moaned, rushing up the corridor, after being awakened by something and seeing them rushing towards something.

He slapped his face trying to awaken himself further, vaguely looking like he had a slight hangover, and he recalled him taking alcohol from the helicopter.

As they approached a region of the corridor that they heard the sounds at their loudest the disturbance seemed as if it had different states to it and regularly altered, and Bryson imagined it as a warp through in space and time causing many different things to occur and create sporadic sounds about the castle, and in his dream he wondered if he had seen inside the warp itself (and the castle lay somewhere beyond it, being one of the locations connected to it throughout space and time).

Yet even if it was a warp he still never knew what it was or what was happening, what created it, and why the things in the wood were there! Did the things, whatever they were, become part of the disturbance while near it, when it automatically opened?

Three scientists rushed up to Merton and Mortimer and they began discussing the occurrences and situation, and the three scientists rushed back to get equipment and more of the scientists.

Merton and Mortimer stood listening to the sounds trying to establish things and where they were mainly emerging.

Some sounds came screaming at them with fury and sometimes as though things were trapped in some form of field.

The scientists rushed back and forward setting up their new equipment, connecting the equipment along that region of the corridor.

“What do think?” Merton carefully asked him, leaving Bryson with little to say.

He gave Bryson the impression that they might be going to do something or come to a conclusion.

Mortimer also gave him the impression, which would normally have confirmed it, but things were different there and they were not fully themselves!

Bryson started to realize the implications of things and that they might have to check what was there and things of great danger!

Mortimer quickly told the other scientists: “Investigate all these walls, floor and roof …”

Bryson suddenly felt deep tiredness and wished that he had stayed in bed, and was asleep.

Why were they not tired like him? What had they been doing when they heard the sounds?

In the darkness at the end of the corridor two figures came rushing towards them from the stairs – resembling a sort of dream view to Bryson in his sleepy state – and the figures turned out to be two of Mitchell’s men, who were on guard below, and they whispered things in Mitchell’s ear.

Mitchell’s face turned frantic, and he was desperate to do something, and he rushed away with the two men to where the men had been, and to the stairs.

“What are they up to?” Merton muttered, staring, bewildered.

“This place is a hell of a place!” Bryson mumbled.

Bryson watched drifting currents of snowflakes blow about a room window, and he realized that he really felt like going to bed. It had been a long day and the next day could even be longer, and he watched Mortimer rush away after them to the stairs, and he wondered what he was missing. Even though he had done what he felt like doing – rush away – but in the opposite direction – to his bed, and without saying anything.

Why were they not all tired like him? And he recalled all the things he had been doing and all the late nights before he had arrived there.

He watched them rush into the darkness at the stairs and realized that they might have to stay up for a long time, to obtain the conclusion to what was occurring, and he realized he had better follow to get it over with.

Merton shrugged and followed him, and they eventually started chasing after them.

In the sounds behind him he heard a rhythmical tapping, slowly increasing in volume, making him slow to listen, and he realized that it was footsteps rushing towards him from behind, and from behind him two more of Mitchell’s men came running along, while they were fixing gun holsters on their waists.

Bryson saw Mitchell going down the stairs with his gun in his hand. They seemed to have adjusted their lights dimmer, to make them darker and not open targets.

The situation looked bad! If someone did not die it would be surprising!

Bryson and Merton rushed to them and crept down the stairs – which creaked loudly when they made rapid movements.

At the bottom of the stairs he watched their dark figures creep around from room to room looking for something, occasionally giving a significant gasp, which most of them had given since they had arrived at the castle.

They eventually approached Mortimer trying to get information.

“Let’s look in the kitchen!” Mitchell warned, creeping away.

His men followed him. And one of them switched on a light and they rushed into the kitchen, holding out their guns, ready to shoot at anything that appeared.

Bryson felt awake again, but tired and he avoided staggering.

“I saw someone down here with a gun,” one of Mitchell’s men muttered to them, moving along with them.

How had he seen anyone down here he wondered? It had been so dark without the lights that it was virtually in complete darkness, and when he questioned him further he told them that all they had seen had been a dark figure with a gun.

When Mitchell entered the kitchen they heard him gasp loudly, grasping Bryson’s attention as he had definitely found something, and they rushed in after him.

When they reached the kitchen it was virtually in darkness and Bryson turned his head about to search in every direction and to where he saw gusts of snow blowing rhythmical against a window, and through the window he saw the haunting dark shapes of the trees of the wood shifting in the wind, almost hidden in the dark about the castle.

The brightness beamed down from the kitchen lights lighting everything about them, when someone finally turned them on, and they entered further and glared over at an area of the floor, to their side, where Mitchell was kneeling next to a dead body.

 

Chapter 6

 

Mind-Bending Dreams

 

Lights flew around everywhere like electric forms of insects stopping Bryson from seeing anything else in his surreal dream, with him mildly viewing it while he happily slept, floating freely.

Deep in dark regions he caught sight of things shifting about with no form to what they were or doing, like energy floating wildly around in a void surrounding him, and to his fascination he heard sounds of thoughts like whispers from out in hidden places or invisible zones, and they taunted him.

Energies of the universe shone and moved, which normally would have been invisible, and he saw mist formations that were really energy formations and he realized that he was seeing something as it really was, which was powerful and intelligent, which never really made sense when thought about, but which did as a fantasy.

It resembled floating in a cold dark cloudless night sky with no ground below, under a bright moon, and a lunar colored radiance emerged everywhere.

Golden places appeared around the strange energy lights that twinkled brighter through thick areas of the energy mist and a bright light appeared deep in the mist, and he realized the depth of it was really immense and that he was further off than he thought. It was tremendous and like looking into the depths of deep space.

He felt the presence of something mysterious and alive, which existed all around him and which he could not account for, and again he looked out at the lights and wondered what it all was, and studied it. Even though he never recognized anything it had a familiar look, which he determinedly tried to grasp.

He was suddenly awakened by a loud knock that rattled his room door up and down and he saw by the morning light that it was later than he had intended to sleep and he rolled sideways and checked his clock and realized that it was even later.

He automatically listened to the voice of Mortimer asking him where he was, and he told him he was getting dressed.

Even though it was winter and the border of window was shrouded with vines and other vegetation it was bright with the sun and light blue sky and the snow covering the entire landscape, and he quickly put on his clothes and opened the door and saw Merton and Mitchell, who both studied him curiously.

“You wanted us to contact you if anything happened,” Merton stated, excitedly. “Well, something has! You’d better get down to the lounge if you do not want to miss the action!”

“What action?” he answered, shifting out of the door and studying the corridor, watching some of the new scientists that they had brought in, who were checking areas of the corridor.

“One of our men just found a few faint footprints of the killer at another window further along from the kitchen!”

“Is that everything …?” Bryson asked firmly. “And your theories are?”

“He killed one of my men – who must have discovered him doing something … And he got out the door, escaped into the wood … And must have returned later …”

“He wouldn’t have dared go deep into the wood!”

“And we should have predicted his movements …”

“You found the remains of his footprints after the heavy snow fall, with the prints at the window that he entered, where they avoided being fully covered over …”

“Perfectly correct! We are having a discussion on it in the lounge and wanted you there!”

“But this means the killer is in the castle and that he can’t escape!”

Both Merton and Mitchell nodded in agreement!

 

Chapter 7

 

The First Death

 

All the main people in the castle were there, sitting silently in the large lounge, where everything seemed to have massive proportions for some reason.

They all sat still in various large seats at various angles, in seats found in the surrounding rooms, in front of what must be the largest fireplace Bryson had ever seen, with the logs blazing away with a high temperature from all the logs someone had piled into it, surely to fit it in there without making it too small.

Mitchell resumed his pacing across their path, leaving a faint trail over the late nineteenth century carpet there, which the whole castle had as well as main other modifications that allowed people to live there, which had been added later on – including electrical lighting, kitchens, toilets, proper beds …

They had found a generator that powered everything, when they had tried to connect the generator that the helicopter had brought in. Yet even with all the later technology the castle remained the same, lost in time and trapped in a warp in time.

Mitchell’s expressions barely ever altered but now showed there was trouble ahead, and some of the time he was in deep thought not quite mentally there.

Bryson wondered if any of them had been confronted with such crimes before, and why they had?

In fact, after a careful examination of all the people there he realized that he and the two psychic researchers must have the most experience, especially from the murders at the last castle! And he realized why they had wanted him there and Merton had taken Mitchell up to get him, and he realized that he could have a lot of problems ahead of him!

They were not experienced enough to conduct an investigation, and the last time it was the police that had been doing things and he had helped.

He was sure that Mitchell had some facts about the killing that he was not revealing, and he tried to think of what he would not say and what he would do! Yet there was little to go at the moment and he left it for later.

There were many hidden facts to it and he would wait until they surfaced, and stopped troubling himself.

The others were mainly discussing the death but knew little, going by what they said. They were waiting for something to occur and come to some conclusion – perhaps even waiting for an argument to occur. Then perhaps they might get some information to enlighten them about it.

Bryson gave occasional shudders from the cold that came through the opened door. His lungs felt as if they had sandpaper grated over them from breathing in the cold in his room.

Merton and Mortimer sat at his sides, silenced by the whole event, glimpsing the window as if they were waiting for something and did not want to say anything.

Mitchell turned and coughed into a handkerchief.

“I don’t understand,” Merton argued, “why someone would want to kill the guy? What did he not want us to find out by being caught in the kitchen …?”

“You could be right!” Mitchell replied. “Why did he not want to be caught so much?”

“How did a stranger know about this place? Who do you think he was?”

“I don’t know, but we’ll have to make sure it doesn’t happen again! Now knowing this place … I could imagine him easily as a lunatic …”

“Are the cops coming then?” Bryson asked, seeing the meeting there was to get everyone informed on what was happening.

“They’ll be arriving later today by helicopter!” Mitchell answered, showing the situation was nothing to do with him.

“It’s going to be really tricky explaining the place and the situation to them …?”

The police obviously might not accept the full account and of what had happened to them in the wood, and it clearly involved a horrendous crime …

Mitchell turned his face away from the fireplace and its yellow radiance flickered over his back, and Bryson watched gray wisps of smoke rising up the chimney.

“Anyway, I wanted to ask you all … Did anyone see anyone near this place?” Mitchell spoke, standing, and watching nobody move in the room, and they all nodded that they never one by one.

If it had been one of them and not a stranger then the person must have been missing when it took place and he wondered about the people that he had not seen, and from what Mortimer told them they had checked up on them and that there was at least ten people there that never came in contact with anyone when it took place, and had been sleeping, and Bryson realized that they had made a mistake by not checking them at their rooms to see if anyone had been missing, and he also realized that they never thought it was them and that they would not have gone to such lengths to carry anything out.

Bryson realized the infernal place now had a killer, who had a motive to kill for, and they and all the evidence had shown that the person could not be in the wood and was hidden away somewhere in the colossal castle, and that they would have to sleep there with him lurking in shadows.

 

Chapter 8

 

The Treasure Quest

 

The entire castle was colossal and dangerous beyond belief, even during the day, and they had checked all the stuff that they had accumulated and found there had been many occurrences and deaths during the day, and nobody seemed to want to go into the unexplored regions, where they also thought the killer lurked.

So when they started their investigations of the castle it was in search of the treasure there and was organized by Mitchell and he brought all his men, with Bryson and the two psychic investigators, and some scientists and archaeologists, who were curious what was in the unexplored regions.

They had been no further than the central region, and region that they slept in on the second floor, so Mitchell’s idea of going to the central region of the top floor was really interesting.

Bryson climbed the stairs studying everything, while curiously watching Mitchell as he followed him up and occasionally listened to everyone else behind him, and Bryson noticed that his surroundings seemed to get dirtier the further up they went and by the time they reached the top they were sweeping giant webs away, which seemed to increase in size, and he started to consider there being dangerous spiders there.

“Well,” Mitchell finally announced, breaking his silence. “We now know that killer has not been here! Though there must be other staircases up here, so we still have him being about as a problem.”

They entered the top floor and it looked incredible to Bryson. It was like another world and like seeing a real haunted place, place where supernatural existed, and he considered it as being either one of the only places like it on the planet or one of the most powerful places on the planet.

The corridor had to be the most ghostly darkest places he had seen, and with freezing cold and snow it was even more still, silent, and empty of life as was possible. Even with the lights on there were strange haunting dark shadows and glows that held secrets and dangers!

Some of Mitchell’s men insisted in announcing their being there clearly to the killer, if he was up there, and they insisted in leaving him until the police arrived. And even though it was one of his men and he had directly attacked them, he had escaped and it was a police matter! Though he was sure most of them actually still intended to do something when they could!

They grouped closely together and wander down the corridor in the one direction with startled and amused faces as they searched its interior, with faint thoughts of what it would be like there at night. The place to everyone there seemed to be the source of all the occurrences in the wood, and it at times was like being in a central area where something existed that was more powerful than anything else there, and perhaps on the planet, and the stuff in the wood avoided going there because of its power and that they were being checked and it had hidden intentions to do things with them.

The treasure being hidden away there was like something were using it to lure people there to their deaths, and he wondered again if he would survive this adventure!

Merton wandered about offering anyone next to him a cigarette, and spoke to them confidently, and they gave startled expressions at their surroundings and what he actually worked as and a famous leading investigator of psychic occurrences.

Mitchell, Bryson noticed, was giving them confidence and his wisdom in carrying out the task ahead, while gently persuading them to do what he wished, and use their powers of deduction to find clues or anything there. There main motivation seemed to be money, and they were all positive that was what motivated the killer there.

As they passed different rooms it became clear that nobody had been there in many decades. Cobwebs and dirt just about shrouded everything they met with!

Nothing showed any clues to what Bryson wanted, and it made little sense.

The killer had to be ruthless and carefree to have done it in the way that it had been done, especially to one of Mitchell’s men. The person had done it under their noses! Yet it could indicate that he never knew them or what they were like?

From the looks that that he caught he knew that the incident had affected them all. Some of them were argumentative when they mentioned the dead guy, and he was sure that they had not found any major clues.

Bryson touched his sore forehead with his fingers feeling if the coldness had sunk into his brain.

He saw that it had still stopped snowing and that there was a good chance, according to a forecast, that the weather would stay that way until the night.

He wondered if the place had actually turned people insane! He wondered if the killer had an interest in anything else and if they were thinking of him as being only after one thing.

A loud helicopter thud gradually emerged away in the distance, and they all grew silent and considered the arrival of the police, and at a window Bryson and some of the others watched it and another three helicopters arrive, making them even change their interest there to below the castle, where they landed, and Bryson watched the faces of all the police and people connected with them get out and looking about slightly amused but mainly very curious, and some actually knowing some things about the place, and he heard some of their communications blaring out as they told of their arrival and what the place looked like.

The police had a hard time realizing what they were dealing with, and Bryson listened to the person he was sure was in charge of everything. He had clearly been communicating with the police elsewhere in his helicopter.

“We can separately look about more,” Merton declared, clearly losing interest with looking out the window. “We can cover more ground …”

They all split up more and into groups, going into rooms more, and searching more.

Bryson marched away himself straight to where he thought one of the main rooms was, which was larger and unusual, and he was sure it belonged to the owner that had reconstructed the castle, if he had even lived there or had it built for him before his death.

It was incredible how fast Mitchell rushed after him, and he watched Merton follow him, seeing it was the most interesting place to go.

The others mainly agreed to search the corridor and to check paintings and antiques, which were really ancient and valuable looking, especially being there and covered in such dust and dirt.

The door to the room at first seemed locked when Bryson reached it, before the other two had made it to him, and he quickly confirmed it was locked before trying to shove it in.

“Curious!” Mitchell muttered. “Very curious! It’s got a lock and it’s locked!”

Merton ducked and stuck his eye to the keyhole and moved back, and asked, “We could wait and try to find a key, which may not exist, or we could just break in?”

“Let’s break in!” Mitchell quickly replied first. “What’s in there could be of great value! And if we leave it someone else could get here first! This place is getting more and more people …”

“Alright!” Bryson replied. “The door can be replaced anyway, if it’s of any value …”

Mitchell immediately left to nearby rooms until he found what he wanted, and arrived with a large log of wood, which had been in a fireplace, and used it to smash in the lock and viciously shove it in, until the door screeched right open and Bryson saw only darkness and then windows that were covered by thick curtains, and dust flew down over them as they moved in and they entered like they were entering a tomb.

The mess was shocking! Webs and fungus had shrouded everything and an ancient bed was left rotted away within the room, with small amounts of ancient furniture around the edges of the large room, and Bryson attempted to age it all but never succeeded.

“The owner liked a large bed,” Merton muttered, humorously, examining its remains, watching a dust cloud from their entrance float in beams of light, from streaks of sunlight from the window where Mitchell started opening the curtains, trying not to destroy the rotted remains of them, and looking out at the wood from there with some fascination!

They then crept around the room watching his fascination of the wood, and his drawing all the areas of interest in a vague map, and listening to their creaks and cracks from the floorboards.

Bryson’s attention fell on the bed again trying to imagine what age it was, and he realized it was early twenty-century technology.

When he moved back he saw the humorous side of what they were doing. The place interested him and he liked such places and their history, imagining all the past events and people who had been there, and all the many hours and days and thoughts that they had, and he wondered what the future would hold for it and fantasized being in a time machine shooting through the depths of time. What would the future be? And what would the outcome of their investigations there be? What would the future be now that the murder and all the police were there? Was this the end of the desolation of it? Or could the place become so deadly that they would have to isolate it from humanity?

He saw a small drawer under the legs of the remains of a wardrobe in the corner of the room and saw it had not been seen, and investigated it with interest, while he considered the room from different perspectives. He wondered if the people had just slowly left there or had been forced out by the occurrences there, or had they died there?

The stiff drawer revealed it was full of old clothes and he looked through and man’s clothes considering what he had been like.

Mitchell never investigated anything any further and assumed that they had found what they were going to, while Merton copied Bryson and still searched unusual places and objects that he came to, and looked under a small gap below the bed.

“This place is gruesome!” Bryson muttered. “This place must have been the biggest castle in the world when it was built! And it could have had one of the richest people too! It must have been the most magnificence building to live in at one time, with luxury beyond other people’s wildest dreams! And look at what it ended up like! One of the worst deadliest places on the planet!”

He wondered if something might occur to mankind in hundreds of years with the world turning desolate like the castle! Could this be really what happens to the whole of civilization one day? Will the remains of the human race end up living in the remains of everything, treating it as desolate gruesome remains of an ancient race obsessed with size and power, building immense structures for unknown strange reasons?

“An incredible place with an even more incredible history!” he remarked, flicking webs away from him.

“Do you think that we made a mistake being here?” Merton asked, seeing his change of feelings. “This place is cursed with deaths … And not just one or two people at a time …!”

“A ruthlessly place with many lost secrets that does not like people staying in its locality for too long …”

“Let’s check somewhere else!”

As they left they were amazed at how far the others were going to search the place, and even Mitchell gave a surprised look at what some of his men were doing and that they were frantically yanking up floorboards all over the place, as well as in specific places.

When they walked further up Mitchell was even more surprised and stood with his mouth open, and one of his men whispered something in his ear and he realized something and nodded back in agreement, making Bryson wonder what they had realized and had turned frantic over.

“A good way!” Merton revealed. “We can get this place searched properly if they all carry on like this.”

When they moved along the corridor Bryson realized that it was a good idea and slowly started copying and helping them.

Though Mitchell allowed it he never joined in and remained ready to go to anywhere anything was occurring though.

Bryson wandered around just to see what he randomly found, and stopped at paintings and antiques wondering what they were worth. The owners were immensely wealthy and could easily have left something that could have vastly increased in value, and he studied a painting and wondered what it was worth.

He quickly phoned an old friend to see if he would value them and was surprised that he had heard about the castle and occurrences there and that it was all over the media, and he was comforted to know that they never knew the location as the police did not want to give away the location, and Bryson knew that they knew there was danger there and that people would be in danger.

His next surprise was that he was more interested than he had thought in checking the value the things there for him and Bryson sent photos of paintings and antiques when came to them, and left him to check them.

While he searched a repetitive forceful hammering appeared in the distance and occasionally interrupted him enough to stop and listen and wonder why someone was so determined to break through something.

He realized how much he liked and missed treasure hunting and quest for the discovery of the paranormal cause and the solutions, and realized why he was there more than ever. The quest, the exhilaration, and the thrill of the chase made gave him immense excitement and adrenalin rushes! He was sure there was stuff all over the place after seeing the reactions and things there!

While he considered the castle’s interior from various perspectives the sounds in the background escalated into a furious rummaging and banging, which made everyone about him stand alert and listen. What was happening? What had they missed by not checking there? The people behind the sounds sounded as if they had really found something and were trying breakthrough to something to get it.

Bryson stood next to Merton and watched a room far along the corridor where there was a cloud of dust was coming out, and heavy thuds were accelerating louder, almost climaxing and the people were about to uncover something and they marched quickly there, and the others around them joined them.

“What the hell have they found there!” one of Mitchell’s men finally moaned out loud, glaring ahead.

Bryson followed behind him and watched the room – where the cloud of dust increased and moved along towards them, and they heard and felt shudders going through the walls and sounds of boulders crashing across the floor.

Their looks changed from bewildered glances to observing everything as they approached it, and they looked in the doorway and saw chunks of rock and pieces of plaster scattered everywhere across the room and Mitchell and his men crowded around an area of the floor where there was a large black hole, which they had smashed the floor away to reveal.

They had discovered something concealed below the stone floor beneath the wooden planks. Perhaps after they had discovered that the ground under the floorboards had given a hollow tone, but when he questioned Mitchell he told them that when they had lifted the floorboards there that they found that the stone floor had a hole in it, where it had caved in, and that they had seen a chamber below.

Bryson measured the floor with amazement and realized that he had not even considered it, even after being in the last castle. It was phenomenal how thick the floor between the top floor and the lower floor was and he had not noticed it, and it even looked large enough to conceal something, and he recalled what William Randall, the builder of the castles, was like and had done in the other castle.

Yet why had he gone to such lengths to conceal this one? Was there any connection between it and the disturbances that had occurred at the place?

Mitchell’s men viciously smashed heavy hammers against the thick stone and chunks of it crumbled away and crashed down beneath the floor, while the others got ready to climb down.

 

Chapter 9

 

The Hidden Chamber

 

A deep thud echoed down when Bryson jumped down into the chamber below, through the hole, landing on all the debris that they had smashed in, and he watched Mitchell and his men looking around with a single torch and Bryson looked up and out the hole at the faces of the others glaring down, interested but remaining there until more lights arrived.

It was hard to figure out why it was so valuable to them and why it was even anything, although in the last castle it had been, and he started looking for proof that it was more than part of the structure of the castle.

The ebbing radiance of the torch clearly was not enough to allow more of them to see properly at any proper distance and they moved gradually while checking everything, and Bryson followed scarcely grasping the concept of why such things had been built, and recalled in the last castle they had been used as hiding places and escape routes from being attacked and overcome by enemies.

He had only one fact to prove and that because it was in the castle it might have been part of its defense against invaders! So he searched everywhere for clues that people had been supposed to stay in it and all he saw were chimneys and supporting walls as his eyes slowly adjusted to the vague light.

The height of it was low and they were crouched over to avoid hitting their heads against the above floor and they crept through the dirt and building debris, while sounds took strange tones, and he strained his eyes more trying to see further in, but there were no features of anything.

After a great deal of time they wandered around and the new lights arrived and surprised them as they were able to see away into distant regions all around them, and one of Mitchell’s men suddenly shouted and they all followed his gaze to a strange shape away in the distance, and one of the men shone his light directly on it and revealed a large square object.

While they shifted there it became clear the place had not been used as a hiding place, unless it could have been going to be one or the builder had put it in to convert into it if they had needed it.

They approached the object slowly and Bryson wondered where they were under, at the above floor, and tried to grasp what would be there. Was it hidden away or was it part of the structure of the castle? His examinations of it at a close range gave him little to go on other than it was made of gray stone and square, but when they finally approached the thing it became clear it was the square end of a tomb, and if they had seen it from a front angle they might have recognized it.

They examined small writing on the side of it but the stone had deteriorated and it was too dirty and dark and none of them could identify any of it.

Bryson took out a piece of paper and drew a vague plan of where they had traveled giving the exact angle and distance that they had walked from the entrance hole for him later to find where the tomb was actually under, and he realized there had to have been an entrance nearby as someone would not have taken such a bulky heavy object across any great distance. They were practical people, which he had proven in the last castle as well.

He searched around looking for it above and found a large slab entrance hidden in dirt on the above floor in front of the tomb.

“What’s that?” Mitchell asked, hardly seeing him, too busy trying to find clues on the object.

“I worked out that they had to have had a nearby entrance to get that down here …” he replied, shoving the thin slab up and sideways, out of the way, and examined the floorboards over it and found that they were not nailed down there, but fixed together, and he carefully removed them and pushed the carpet over it up, ripping the areas of it up where it was nailed down.

Sunlight from outside beamed down through the above room through the entrance, lighting everything around them, and Mitchell’s men congratulated it and some of them left through the hole, and Bryson climbed out to see where it was and was surprised that it was over the central region, where it had been in the last castle.

He searched about for anything else but only found that it was faraway in the opposite direction than they had been searching in, and he climbed down to the tomb when they started to lift the lid off. Then he wondered who was buried there and why they had been placed there? And he gasped when he recalled all the disturbances and deaths that had occurred there?

“Who will it be?” Mitchell asked, astonished, looking at the tomb, seeing if Bryson had any idea.

“I do not know!” he replied, moving over to his side at the side of it, standing as though he were standing at the front of an altar, which amused Mitchell.

As they started to shove the thick slab covering the tomb onto the floor Bryson examined the writing on the tomb again and cleaned away as much dirt as he could by washing it in water, from a bottle he borrowed from one of the men, and he started to see vague outlines of the writing but could not fully understand it, and took photos of it to examine afterwards.

“Check that stuff later,” Mitchell moaned, amazed at the sight of the cover of the tomb moving from the tomb.

Something stopped the lid being shoved any further again and they gave it a quick heavy shove pushing it only slightly sideways, and it seemed fixed in position, and it needed much more force to shift it or the heavy block of stone would have to be lifted off it.

Before they lifted it one of the men from above climbed down with a crowbar and they used it to shift it sideways again, and as Bryson rested and the cover went over onto the ground his sight fell on a skeleton, and he wondered if any of them knew it might be one of his ancient ancestors, as it could very well have been a descendant or relative of William Randall, his ancestor, and why he had been at the other castle in the first place.

 

Chapter 10

 

The Ancient Tomb

 

Most of the words on the tomb were by all means to do with William Randall but words were missing and they were in riddles and were only comprehensible to someone who would have known the things that they suggested.

The skeleton had to be someone connected to William Randall or the original people at the castle, and it might be the only source of any information about the occurrences and treasure.

“Do you get any of it?” Mitchell pleaded, seeing him intensely examining the words on the tomb again, after he saw little in the tomb itself, and he had stayed watching him crouching in front of the tomb reading over what he could, trying to find something.

All of it was confused, and it was turning to a disappointment, and Bryson nodded in disagreement and stood up and ignored it.

Mitchell and he moved around looking baffled, as well as tired, and examined the skeleton again.

“What do you think they buried this here for?” Mitchell asked, probing, curious and looking for more.

Bryson rested and never replied and as he did his sight fell on the skeleton, and he wondered if he should react to having the privilege of encountering a great ancestor, and he saw that it had the same height as he had.

Traces on the skull showed that he had had similar looks too!

Mitchell grew annoyed and poked it, and it moved and shifted position and he saw something sparkle as it did, and Bryson stuck down his hand at where it was in a pile of dust in the center of the skeleton and he probed through its bones and felt an object, and he pulled it out.

“What do you think?” Mitchell asked, trying to see what was there.

He cleaned the dirt, which was encrusting most of it, and found that it was a large ring, and he started polishing it with a cotton handkerchief that he had in his pocket and revealed an expensive ancient large diamond gold ring, and he examined the diamond realizing that it had been it that had sparkled.

The large size of it was peculiar and he had not seen any normal ring that size before.

“Can I see it?” an archeologist asked, which one of Mitchell’s men had brought over, and he swiftly shifted in beside him, and put out his hand. “I’ve seen something like that before …”

Bryson handed it over seeing that he knew something, and the archeologist twisted and unscrewed the area that held the diamond, and removed it from the ring.

“People concealed small objects in them,” the archeologist stated. “Just below the jewel!”

His fingers probed in it and he removed a small piece of paper!

 

Chapter 11

 

The Secret Map

 

He unfolded and stretched it out, perhaps done for the first time in hundreds of years, and someone shone a light over it and its details became clearer and some of the men grouped around him, and they examined it.

“It’s an old drawing of this castle,” Mitchell replied first, seeing something that confirmed his beliefs.

But Bryson realized that it was more than that and that it was an ancient plan of it from a side view, showing where something was, and he knew it because it was so important that the person had it hidden in the ring, and he had seen something similar in the other castle. It had far more detail, and more than what it had looked like when first seen, and it was an accurate map of the interior.

Bryson’s thoughts went wild and he wondered what they had been up to! The other castle was just a place haunted, but this place in places never made sense anywhere! What did they find? What were they doing here? And why were there so many secrets involved?

Mitchell took it, and held it over his light, and he and Bryson considered the faint lines for a moment. He tried to realize what he had been like. What had he actually been like? And what had he thought of the castle?

“Could be anything to do with the treasure?” one of the men finally asked, desperate for clues.

They examined it for clues to its identity, and why it was there!

It could be more valuable as assumed but on the other hand it could be anything! They studied it from different angles, until they started losing interest.

“That looks like a faded cross marking something?” the man that had asked if it could be anything to do with the treasure asked, pointing at a very faint cross that he had found.

Bryson was surprised that he had not seen it, and that the others never seemed to have noticed it.

“Where do you think that is?” the man finally muttered, like he knew where it was and wanted to confirm it.

“It’s on the top floor and surely not far from here!” Mitchell finally answered, seeing they were not coming out with anything. “So let’s go and have a check …”

After a few seconds of examining it the others started climbing out, into the room above, and Bryson put it away in his pocket.

The ring was valuable and could well prove there was more, and showed they had wealth, which he had known already by the massive castles and estates, and last treasure they had found. Yet he could not work out why there would be two treasures!

As he climbed out he vaguely wondered how safe the castle structure itself really was, and if it was safe to be in, as it had been built by ancient craftsmen with only a basic knowledge. Who would know if they had only designed it to last a few decades at the most? Yet if it had stayed up the amount of time that it had it must be strong enough not to collapse! They could have easily built it to last! He had only seen castles with no roofs that were crumbling away, and he had never heard of one such as it falling. Yet he had heard of parts of modern structures collapsing!

As they walked along the corridor Bryson noticed some signs of value in paintings, and took photos of them. There could even be a connection between something in them and the clue!

 

Chapter 12

 

The Discovery

 

What Bryson was surprised at was how easily and firmly they had identified where the mark on the map was in the castle, and he had not even considered that it had been when they had arrived there!

The man who had found the mark on the map seemed to be the best at it, and they all looked at the rooms there.

As Bryson examined the best places to look he remembered the plan of the castle and removed it, and he started trying to see what the mark was at, and he suddenly noticed the man that had found the mark and Mitchell were measuring the floor in the corridor, outside the rooms, and he wondered what they were thinking.

The map looked different in the light from outside at a window, and he saw things that had not been recognizable before and it slightly surprised him, as he had expected it to have dulled lines and blemishes, especially because of its already bad condition and ancient age.

Bryson glared, partially blinded by a sudden illumination from the sun, and its powerful glare from the snow. Then when it decreased he saw more detail and faint lines that had faded and that had not been visible before, and he wondered if the others had seen stuff that he had not seen there, and why they never bothered asking to see it again?

He studied things on it astonished at missing them and saw where the exact location of the small cross mark was marked at the castle, even though it was so faint that he could easily have taken it to be a badly drawn mark or correction rubbed away.

Yet though he knew that it was something its size was not big – it looked too small to be significant – and it was not just a bad drawing as it had been carefully drawn there! And he considered why the person had gone to such lengths to draw it so well into the sketch, and wondered how the man in his tomb had died and what the person had been like, and why he had been buried there?

Bryson stood up and joined Mitchell and some of his men measuring the room, who took it that he knew what they knew.

Bryson gradually realized what he had missed and that there was a large distance between a room wall and the wall in the room next to it, and when he knocked the wall it did not sound as solid, and it was not as solid as the stone walls in the other rooms.

He was sure a small chamber existed there, and wondered why it had been hidden away, and why they had been so secretive and had marked it on an old map?

Nonetheless, how could they check it? Where could the entrance to it be? It could be sealed, but there could be a way to climb into it!

Bryson considered it for a moment and realized that was what Mitchell was considering, and he wondered if he would knock a hole in the wall of the room where the map cross had been marked? Their faces still some showed puzzlement, indicating that he had a problem and had not realized how best to get into it.

Bryson started tapping the room wall and listening to see how hollow it was in different places.

Mitchell decided to do more, suddenly looking more energetic!

“It would be a shame to ruin this wall,” Bryson explained, considering the hole that they had made in the floor to enter the chamber beneath the floor. “It could make a hell of a mess!”

The man who had found the mark on the map suddenly used the opportunity to show them what they were missing and went over to the corner of the room and lifted up the edges of the wallpaper, showing them that there was, in fact, a gap going around the entire wall, and looked like a large crack and was deliberately concealed.

“What do you think it is then?” Bryson asked, confused, not fully grasping what it was or what he was explaining it was.

“We’ll need to find a way to tug it out from the side at the door as the hinges are at the other side,” he replied, and Bryson shrugged and decided to wait for him to show him what he was talking about.

He went to different places of the wall examining the crack and inserted a tool into the gap, which allowed him to grip the wall and yank it slightly outwards, proving nothing was holding it, and Bryson recalled an inner library that they had found at the last castle, and realized that the wall was really a giant doorway concealing something behind it, and he helped the man pull it out, and soon realized that it opened out on hinges at the opposite side.

It opened out like a giant door revealing a hidden chamber full of old books and scrolls, and Mitchell’s men saw value in the books and the information they could hold, and Bryson wondered why the map had it marked on it and why someone would keep just books as a secret?

 

Chapter 13

 

The Police Investigation

 

A bright large fire burning furiously in the fireplace in the lounge enticed Bryson in and to a seat, where he intended to rest and go through all the things that they had found in detail, and he was sure he missing things and that he would realize them now, while resting on his own.

Yet as soon as he sat down three of the policemen marched in, and looked him over!

The heat from the fire made the central policeman’s eyes bulge out as they entered further in, making their way to the fireplace, and Bryson saw he was the policeman in charge there.

“So you’re Bryson!” he exclaimed, looking about him. “I’m Lieutenant Spelman. I’m in charge at the moment …”

“Have you found anything?” Bryson asked, becoming interested, examining their official clothing, wondering what they would make of the disturbances there, and wondered if they had encountered anything or what they had heard and thought of it.

“Where are the others?”

“They’re at the top floor rooms,” he answered authoritatively.

“They’ll all be back down soon?” he asked.

“I don’t know when they’ll be down! But I’m sure most of them will be down soon … It’s dark now! Have you found anything out about the death of the man in the kitchen?”

“Various things! But we don’t have the killer yet!”

“So have you found any fingerprints or DNA?”

“You’re one of the scientists here! This place is strange!”

“Strange? Stay here long enough and I’m sure you’ll never see anything as strange again!”

The policemen showed signs of confusion and surprise, but Bryson was sure that they had been informed of some of the things that had happened there or had already seen something. He was sure someone in the ex-military men with Mitchell had been telling them what had happened. It was also them that had called the police in and he was sure one of them also knew them.

In distance Bryson realized that there were noises of trouble, and action by the police, and he realized that something was happening, especially going by the reactions of the police in the room, and a policeman rushed in the door.

“We had him but he escaped!” he hollered, breathing faster. “We know where he went and two of our men are going after him!

“We were investigating the castle where his footprints were and we found him at the floor of a room. He escaped down a tunnel there!”

They followed him out and they rushed over to the room, and Bryson sensed that he was going to be in danger of getting it!

At the side of the room the carpet had been rolled over, and the person had removed a hidden entrance to a tunnel and had escaped without covering it over, and Bryson heard scrambling movements and panic-stricken voices deep in it, where the police were clearly chasing the killer out towards the wood.

It was worse than he had imagined! More police were rushing in determined for action, and they were contacting the rest of the police force, and he now positively knew that they never knew of the dangers out there and that great danger was there! And yet if he told them, warned them, he not only knew that it would be a mistake, it could very well make things far worse.

He just did not know what to do and was too tired, and he hoped that Merton and Mortimer would appear and help prevent things escalating further.

Then he realized that they might be able to catch the man before he left the tunnel, and he thought he could either catch him or make them go faster, and he rushed into the tunnel with the others.

“That guy was sneaking around up there!” Bryson gasped, speaking to a policeman at his side.

“If he escapes we may never have a chance to get him again.”

“Let’s go as fast as we can!” Bryson announced, checking his watch.

He swiftly led them deeper into the tunnel, surprising them with how fast and experienced he was in going through tunnels.

He surely did not have that much of a head start! If they moved fast enough they might catch him in the wood.

He gasped at the fact that they could end up going miles into the wood with those things there, as his footprints were guaranteed to be there and force them into getting him. Yet if they moved far faster than him they might capture him first before anything happened. It had only just turned dark!

As he rushed on he studied the walls of the tunnel amazed at the workmanship and that it had been manufactured like the other tunnels that they found there, and he wondered if the guy knew the people that had made it.

As he grew tired he thought the police in the tunnel would just give up. Yet he was sure that they could catch him! He wondered what he looked like, and what he was up to? He also knew that the police would be using helicopters and wondered what would happen there, and if he used a hideout?

From one of the communicators behind him he learned that it was now snowing heavily above and over the whole region, and he happily knew it would cover his trail in the wood, if they could not get there before him entering deep into the wood. They had to be as fast as they could! This could be the only chance to get him!

As he heard the police not that far ahead of him he realized that they had not been in a tunnel before and that they were going slow, trying to see what was ahead, and he gasped as he suddenly heard the police communicators stop work, from the disturbances in the wood.

Bryson regulated his breathing, blowing out steam through beams of torchlight, and rushed on and on, as he searched for obstacles ahead.

He felt surprisingly awake now, with no need to sleep, and he felt things could be successful and he intended to increase their pace further.

So when the police ahead of him in the tunnel appeared, now going very slowly, they allowed them to pass, almost not believing that they could capture the killer, probably put off by the length of the tunnel.

While they continued Bryson saw that they were following them, at the back, and he realized that he was now at the front and that the killer could even be nearby, and suddenly realized why they had been so happy to allow him to pass and he realized that he never even knew if the police directly behind even had guns.

It was hideous! It could be anyone and the guy could be far more different from what he accepted, especially going by what this place had come out with so far.

He definitely did not want to confront him in the tunnel as he could easily shoot him as there was nothing to give him any cover, and it was better to wait until they were outside. Even though that could mean him escaping or dragging them through the wood in something like a gun battle!

His eyes stayed on the most distant part of the tunnel, searching for him, waiting for him to take a shot at them or to attempt to ambush them.

When he recognized the steps to get out the tunnel he sprinted there, and when he approached them he considered what to do next and realized how easily the killer could be waiting for them to climb out of the tunnel. He knew that they were chasing him, and had to have heard them as they had not tried to conceal them being there, and going by the distance the police in front of him were he considered him not far ahead.

Bryson rushed up the stairs and waited, and the others appeared behind him with startled faces, and he realized that at least he might have talked them out of doing something stupid, and was amused to hear some of them wondering who the hell he was.

“Well, what will we do now?” one of them asked, panting slightly, looking at him as though he was crazy.

“We’d better have the police with guns here! We don’t know what this guy could do!”

Once the police moved to his side Bryson climbed out into an immense blizzard, with the snow blanketing his entire surroundings, almost in complete darkness, without any lights, shifting into deep snow, considering everything that he was up against, attempting to observe any place he could see, and wondered if the killer could possibly see him.

He listened through the howl of the wind and all that he heard was the trees being blown around, and he looked for a place to take cover and move over to, and one of the policemen appeared at his side and shone his torch about, and though the wood became visible, he could barely see anything else.

“There is part of his footstep!” a policeman announced, pointing, and they realized that they could not follow him, as there was only part of one footstep there.

 

Chapter 14

 

The Space/Time Gateway

 

Once Bryson arrived back at the top floor that night after resting and having a meal he instantly realized that they had found something else, and he saw Mitchell and his men standing around a large hole in the floor in front of the bookshelves.

“We just dug through,” Mitchell announced, in excitement, as Bryson arrived, glaring, and Mitchell shone his light around the large hole, where they had removed floorboards and smashed in a stone entrance slab.

“When did you find it?” he replied, wondering what was there, realizing it probably was what was marked on the map, and that the bookshelves were covering it up.

“We found it only an hour ago!” Mitchell replied.

“How did you find it?”

“Some of the men, who were still exploring the chamber with the tomb, found the area below here was surrounded and hidden by a thick wall … And we found a sealed entrance over it …”

“What’s down there?” Bryson asked, trying to see in it.

“There’s stairs … They go down below somewhere!”

Mitchell entered first, using his light to see the ancient steps going straight down, and Bryson followed, surprised that the tunnel and stairs fitted into the massive walls in the floors below.

Bryson watched Mitchell moving down making sure he never slipped, and a deep thud echoed down from behind, and he saw that only one other man followed him, and he realized that it was a good idea only having the three of them as the ancient derelict castle steps might not be able to support more weight.

The ebbing radiance of the light was not enough to allow more than three to go safely down either, and he tried to grasp the concept of the tunnel and he imagined the outside of the castle, as he had seen it, and tried to recall the place where they were on it, and where they were going. He was sure that it might have been part of its defense against invaders!

Sounds from behind altered and echoed down giving muddled and strange tones, and he had to strain his eyes more and more to see what he was doing, what Mitchell was doing, and occasionally look back at Mitchell’s man behind him, who was the man that had seen the cross map on the map, which had led them there, and he wondered why he was so keen to find what was there.

He saw little below and that there were no new features of anything, and that the tunnel’s small shape (less than a meter all around him) vanished into the dark.

The steps descended sharply and hazardously and they had to climb down slowly, rather than walk down like with normal stairs, and he had to hold himself upright and lean backwards, and its drop seemed perpendicular at times.

Once he thought he heard distant movements from below, surrounded by their growing surges of strange sounds, and he was sure Mitchell reacted, just ahead of him, with the light oscillating irregularly. Its light swayed over the stone, and the narrow shaft seemed to vanish at a point below.

A feeble glow from something reflecting light caught his attention and he wondered what was there to reflect it, and he saw what looked like a crack in a wall, between the castle stones, and when he looked down he realized Mitchell had vanished!

At first he thought he never saw him as his light had gone, and that he had broken it and that they would have to return, but as he moved down an explosion of colors exploded out from something stunning him, and he opened his eyes and studied his surroundings and saw that he was no longer in the shaft, and as he confusedly studied his surroundings a colossal whirlpool of shifting outlines magically shifted about him and he realized that he had no body or proper presence, and was some form of energy formation.

 

 

II

 

The Transcendent Voyager

 

 

Chapter 1

 

The Supernatural Vortex

 

Energy beams exploded at Bryson as he gained consciousness, covering his entire vision with bright colored light, and he studied everything that he could see wondering where the hell he was! A colossal vortex of shifting outlines magically shot by and he analyzed it in greater detail and proved that he could not realize what or where it was, or even what he now was!

His presence was some form of force formation, and he swirled out into a vortex of reshaping energy patterns that had replaced reality, and he wondered if he could be trapped there for all eternity, and he ignored it and realized that he was no longer bothered and wondered what his future would be like.

He studied a surreal splendor of mind-bending displacements and saw that they were altering to something that he could not recognize. All of his knowledge of science and universe gave him little and it left him mesmerized! Was he even classified as being a life form? His knowledge of what was beyond the universe was little and he felt like he was about to explore something far greater and mind-boggling than he could have ever imagined!

Questions started emerging and he mainly wondered how he could observe anything? If it actually was light there what was he using to perceive it? Yet he recalled the mind-bending dreams that had experienced in the castle and being in a supernatural vortex, and he started to realize that it had to be it or something similar.

Even though he never actually had anything he still felt glad he had some form of recognition of what it was and tried to work out what it did, how it worked, and where it might go to!

While he was considering what would happen next he spotted a miniature circle of flames buried away in the central region ahead of him, and he grew more and more interested, and he started to recognize more detail as it grew and was astonished as he shifted into it, and within its depths he saw what looked like magnificent colossal stars, in a golden haze, blending into his surrounding brilliant colors.

Spectacular golden beams exploded out, and gold stars shot by, and he realized the tremendous speed that he was traveling at, and a region of golden space was expanding out all across his front, and he floated into it.

He saw his body emerge with a new formation and start transforming, and sensed there was something far more different about it, and he saw a strange transparent world formation emerge, with ghost images going through the swirling golden brightness.

Magnificent bright white and gold lights filled his entire vision everywhere, shifting around everywhere, as if he were floating into some form of cartoon cosmos.

Where was he now? Was he actually in one of his dreams he had been at the castle? It was incredible! Would he be able to solve all those queries he had accumulated? At an early age, when he had first visited the first castle, he had experienced the dreams and mysteries buried away there!

Large objects, he was sure were stars, dazzled him with their brightness. Their density together filled space everywhere and yet they never came into contact with each other, staggering him that they could even exist in their state, without being pulled together.

The whole of space around him had the objects shifting and visibly shooting around, and he observed them with curiosity, and as a scientist. He had to answer what was there as much as he could! He was sure that they avoided courses that would make them crash into other objects, and he finally spotted one actually altering its course to avoid hitting another and was dazed and confused that such an object, if they were suns or the size of suns, could have intelligence and the ability to alter their course through space, and he considered what they were and did.

He exploded with excitement when he searched behind him and saw the vortex he had come out of stretching across space, and he tried to grasp what it was and realized the immense speed that he had been traveling at, and was still moving away at.

The size of vortex looked close to the size of a solar system and the vision staggered him and stuck in his mind!

Over a great deal of time he dreamily partially entered a form of sleep state, shooting through the surrounding emptiness, through the surreal space, far from the universe, out beyond reality.

Obscure illuminations endlessly shifted as he wildly spun around, with no real awareness of anything, and a tranquil shape gradually emerged across his front, of something of brightness, and he came to sometimes to study it.

How had he managed to end up in such a far-out place? Where the hell was he? How could he survive this? He was barely a ghost/energy state in some far out mind-bending place, and he considered if he was actually in the castle in a dream state!

He felt as though he had been falling through something and he tried to grasp the concept, and where, and suddenly realized something was blowing at him from somewhere and he saw, hidden away in intense brightness, he was plunging down to some form of world under him.

He was over some form of water! He was sure of it! And he was falling out of its sky!

He prepared himself for everything that he could think of and a roaring and blinding surge of what looked like invisible water or form of energy hit him and he automatically put out his arms, swimming upwards and pulling himself out of the endless depths, where he saw star objects through at the other side of the world.

 

Chapter 2

 

The Mind-Bending Universe

 

He continually kept going over everything that had happened! All the supernatural occurrences that they had encountered as they had approached the castle, exploring the wood surrounding the castle, and the strange mists and lights there that haunted the place for centuries, and attacks by the things that emerged there, chasing them through the deep snow and into the strange tunnel that they had found that led them to the location of the castle.

Even now he could not explain what it was all caused by! What could be there and have created such a disturbance, which nobody could now deny existed? Yet he had worse things to explain now, and thought if he ever returned he would be spending the rest of his life trying to explain it all!

They had professional ex-soldiers, with Mitchell leading them, and every leading scientist in paranormal or anything connected to it, and he was a leading scientist too, with the two main psychic researchers there, Merton and Mortimer, who had explored the last castle, and found everything that they could have, and he was sure they could achieve something if given long enough.

Who had the killer of one of the ex-military men been? The police were exploring the whole region there now and he wondered what the outcome of that would be, and he gasped! They could not find a way to explain things to them to prevent them from doing something stupid there!

The most frustrating things were the search for the treasure and them finding more and more clues! They had only been searching the castle for a day and they had made discoveries everywhere! A chamber under the top floor with a tomb in it, with some strange writing on it, which he had not been given any proper time and proper examination of, and the strange skeleton inside, which had to be someone significant and be buried there for a reason – and with a ring that had a secret compartment with a map with a secret location marked on it that they had traced to a library where they had found a tunnel below – which the three of them had climbed down, with him following Mitchell down and one of Mitchell’s men following him, and then Mitchell had suddenly vanished below him and when he had climbed down had been transported into the vortex to where he was.

He had to find a way back and he constantly went over things trying to find something that he had missed!

He wondered where Mitchell was, and the other man if he had followed him there, and he wondered if it transported people to random locations? Was it the supernatural vortex that he had dreamed of in the castle? Did it have things trapped in it? Did things get transported back and forward through it? And if it did why could he not reenter it and return there?

The island, if it could be called an island, was fascinating and made of something similar to matter, and he constantly studied.

It was virtually translucent in places, as well as being slightly translucent in different degrees in other places with different colors through it, which he was sure was made of some form of new energy, with strange atoms replacing normal ones.

It was firm in places but like being on a waterbed in other places and he was glad to be on it as he had spent hours wading through its sea, if it could be called a sea, as it was nearly like thick air and he only managed to float on it due to him also being made of a similar composition. He was sure gravity existed, at least! Or was it just something similar?

It was incredible! Through the sea and areas of the land he had seen the other side of the world, if it could be called a world, and its size was close to being the same as the moon and he saw similar islands to his in different sizes and shapes, some massive and others small like his island and they seemed to float around it.

The place never needed a sun and glowed brightly with all the surrounding lights or suns in the sky, virtually covering all the sky, and he had to search for black areas of empty space to confirm they actually existed there, which he was still unable to prove.

The world also generated its own light and heat, but he could not realize how! The strange thing was it had the many of the characteristics of the normal universe and it was like it was mimicking it and as though it had some of the same forces like gravity and had formed similarly with the forces governing it.

Though his survival was an important thing he wondered if he could actually die as he never needed any food or oxygen and he was made of the same indestructible or nearly indestructible substance that everything there was made of, and he was unsure how it functioned.

The sea surrounding the shore was barely visible but had colored matter grains in it against the shore, like sand, mixing through it, and the rhythms of its waves skimming up the surface of island gave sounds like real waves and blew the form of air there in gusts like something was breathing over him, and he wondered if something was there examining him!

There were vague things in orbit and mists over the upper atmosphere that shifted, with the world’s vague rotation, and he saw some signs of its faint rain having fallen. And he put the exploration of the island as his main activity, except he had to find a way to return home!

One time he dived deep into the sea, as fast as he possibly could, and admired the surreal abyss below and enjoyed the swim, going fast and furiously into it. It was a dreamland and he treated it like a holiday, especially compared to the conditions of the castle, and he realized how bad the conditions at the castle had been and that the warmness there was ecstatic compared to the cold and snow and he wandered around enjoying the solitude and bright light, and exploring an unexplored alien world.

 

Chapter 3

 

Back in the Castle

 

Deep in dark regions and lights surrounded Bryson in his dream as it started ending and he started waking, and he caught sight of things shifting about with no form and wondered what they were or were doing there as he opened his eyes and examined the sun beaming into his castle room, and the snow falling outside.

After all he had been through the dreams still never made any sense and he still insisted in trying to examine it to find some clue to what he was missing.

The dream had been about nothing and eventually bored him, and he rested in his bed with his blankets wrapped tightly on him.

Yet the lights in the dream reminded of the supernatural vortex he had been in and he now wondered if it had anything to do with the supernatural or something else.

The dream had allowed him to forget all the events of the previous day and his return to the castle. It had been incredible! He had been exploring the shore of the island when he had found footprints, which could have only have belonged to a human put there like him, and he had traced them for hours, thinking it had to be Mitchell or his man who had been behind him in the tunnel, but he had been surprised that it had been another human.

They had talked for hours, and he had realized that the man was almost crazy in places from being stranded there for many years, and the man had loved hearing his accounts of what the outside world was like, and all the new technology that now existed, and Bryson had learned that he had been there for decades and from the Second World War, surprising Bryson with his young looks, and that he was far older and had clearly not aged.

Bryson had learned about him being in the castle and their search for the treasure there with great interest!

Even though Bryson had been surprised at his search for the treasure he was sure that he had not known much about it and had been there to help.

Both of them had thought each other had been dangerous at first but had slowly realized that they had finally met other humans, and though he had been amazed at Bryson’s accounts of the castle and the tunnel he had been surprised that there had been stairs in the tunnel and Bryson had realized that the man and his two associates had been in another tunnel and that they had been sure the treasure had been buried away there.

Yet one of the biggest surprises had been when the man finally remembered his own name again, as he had been so delirious for so long that he could not recall things about himself, and he had told him that his name was Pendleton, which Bryson had heard of in the accounts of some of the people who had vanished there.

The man’s view of the island had been startling and he had even thought that he had missed something as the man had not fully believed that he had been transported there through a vortex and had religious beliefs of what had occurred! He surely had thought he had gone into his own place in the afterlife and was unsure whether it was heaven or hell, and had beliefs that he was still being considered for both, and he had watched him regularly praying to be saved.

Yet after being there, and all that had happened, he almost felt like copying him, but had thought better of it. It clearly had not saved him for one thing!

One of the problems had been there was little to do! There was no need for food and they never got tired or slept! And if it had not been for the fact that they never felt properly bored, agitated, or, in fact, anything really, and he would have been worried!

One time they had visited a strange phenomenon on the island, which Pendleton had told him of, which was a large hole going into a hard region of the island, which seemed to go down into an abyss far below the island, which had actually looked volcanic, and had grasped Bryson’s attention as if it was volcanic it could have proven that the island had been formed in the same way as the world, and, of course, given him some form of insight into how the world had been formed and what it actually was.

Yet after a great deal of examination of the substance there he had still found nothing! There had been no sign of anything that remotely came out of volcanoes!

About a day later, when they had started to think about leaving there they had suddenly started vanishing, which had grabbed Pendleton’s attention first and the most as he had not experienced it before and he had prepared himself for years to meet something there and enter some other place in the afterlife.

They had both appeared in the castle, surrounded by scientists, to their astonishment and confusion!

How the hell did they get there? Neither of them could explain anything! Bryson could not explain anything and why they had not gone through the vortex and Pendleton could not explain anything either! And Pendleton could not even recognize the castle after such a long time! He must have been the only person in the history of the world to have been in such a place and have returned to the world after such a long time!

The simplest things confused Pendleton and his now normal human body staggered him, and he had a hard time adapting to it and having such things as feelings. He could not understand and remember what hunger was and why he grew tired, and even thought that he was ill most of the time, and occasionally gasped at what he had been missing – yet as he was still the same age as he been when he had left he still had the same amount of years that he would have had!

He also never recognized people, and they were different from what he had remembered them as, and he had not seen anything of the future! He was like a time traveler in a future world! He also thought of himself as having been put there to start over again and repent, in another attempt at entering his relished afterlife.

He spent most of his time studying everything that he met with in fascination – like he were an alien being visiting this world in the form of a human being.

 

Chapter 4

 

The Psychic Research Equipment

 

When Bryson had recovered and rested from everything that he had been through he decided to go and visit Merton and Mortimer in their new psychic research room, which was located behind the wall of the tunnel at the exact spot he and Mitchell had vanished into the supernatural vortex – where they were most likely to get the best response – and where all the action must be.

When he entered he was surprised at not only how advanced their equipment had become but at the capabilities of other stuff they had there. Their visit to the last castle had clearly given them far more of an insight and knowledge than he had realized. He was positive that they had found far more than they had indicated, and were keeping secrets from him.

What confused him the most was how they had managed to get him back to the castle! He had not thought of anything himself, and continuously tried to think of a good way to get them to tell him as they had avoided answering his and everyone else’s queries on it and were clearly hiding things. What sort of equipment could have taken him back into the castle almost instantaneously with Pendleton?

He recalled seeing Pendleton wandering around dazed exploring the inhabited region of the castle, getting use to his new body and life on the Earth. He mainly remained on his own the most of the time, as he had become use to, but was still excited to meet the others in the lounge. The police there had examined him wondering what he was doing there as they had been given strange vague replies and detailed explanations by the scientists, which had left them baffled.

Mitchell’s return had confused everyone as he had given them the strangest replies that he had heard from any of them, and he was particularly interested in where he had ended up as he had not arrived at the same place or even universe that he had, and he clearly was covering things up on what was there, which they had not been able to get why. It was in his nature not to say much and be secretive, and it was not apparent if there was anything they should know there and that he was really keeping something that they had not even imagined.

The other man, Mitchell’s man who had been behind Bryson in the tunnel, had seen and acknowledged everything that had happened in the tunnel and had returned to the top, which explained why nobody else had entered it, looking for them, and it had been him that had told the scientists what had happened and what he had seen happen, and they had immediately started work on getting him returned.

It surprised them and Bryson that only the three of them had returned, and he and them believed that the rest had all died a long time ago at where they had been located, and Bryson realized that it proved that there was no immortality in the places that they had gone and that the other places were vastly different, which could also be proven from what they had seen of the other events that they had heard of, and what they had seen existed.

Bryson believed from what he had overheard from some of the other scientists in the room that they had temporally deactivated, for a brief amount of time, what was in the tunnel with their own energy field in the room and had allowed them to return, and he was sure that it had been dangerous, which he believed was because it might cause whatever was in the castle to become more activated again as it had done at many times in the past.

 

Chapter 5

 

Reverse Sequence of the Spectral Maelstrom

 

Bryson was growing in determination to find out what they all knew that he should know, so he was glad to see Mitchell and his man who had been in the tunnel turn up at the room seeking answers to what was going on there.

Bryson examined all their equipment for clues, and recalled reading about some of the work that Merton and Mortimer had done recently, after they had given out documents of some of their investigations on the paranormal investigations at the other castle.

Their stuff had been surprising, and even alarming in places, which had drawn his attention at the time, and he had just dismissed it later as them using it to advertise their work! At times he had thought they were deliberately putting the psychic research there to cover their real work and discoveries! They never mentioned anything on the other stuff that they did, which he had found existed at many occasions, and he had hardly even seen anyone even check what they did or had created. They ignored them as being fake ghost and alien hunters!

Merton and Mortimer informed him that they were checking for virtually all known forms of energy and matter disturbances in and around the void and gateway in the tunnel and he was sure that they could have reversed what was in the tunnel instead of what he had heard earlier from some of the other scientists who thought that they had just deactivated it. They could have caused a reverse sequence of the spectral maelstrom!

By the way that they reacted he believed that they might have something that could detect aliens, so they would know if there were any about. But he was unsure and he was sure that they were unsure if it worked, and at what distance from them would it work, and he wondered if they had anything that could be used to catch them, and even catch and kill the things in the wood!

Presumable their presence could produce effects to indicate them being there – such as altering air currents, gravity, magnetic fields, radioactivity, scent, sound waves, static, and the light spectrum …

Most of the equipment in the surrounding laboratory was there to check everything in a degree that had not been done before!

Bryson finally made a proper move to find out more and moved over to some equipment that he had heard them talking of, with suggestions that they might being able to detect aliens with, and he asked Mortimer, “Would this detect an alien at a distance?”

“It may detect temperature changes at really far distances! I am unsure what temperature readings aliens create though – or if they, in fact, have any temperature here! But we do have stuff here that we use to check a whole range of things to show us exactly what is occurring and what we may be missing. Information such as it is vital! We may be able to acquire some type of insight into what is happening – with the right information?”

Bryson realized once again that he was avoiding telling about things, as he had clearly heard them mention things that he had avoided telling!

“So are you using any of the equipment in the wood?” he quickly replied.

Mortimer strangely glared at him, and asked, “What take the stuff over there? Why should you want to do that? It’s too expensive! Besides we believe that we may get the opportunity to use it in the castle!”

“To find out if we are missing something out there! Those things could kill, and they have not come up with anything to destroy them with yet! And if things go the way that they are I am sure it will! Those police could enter there later at night … If you have anything, even if it just helps locate their position, then it will be of great use …”

Bryson glared and wondered how much he had exaggerated the situation – or if it was really far more.

“That may be a good idea,” Mortimer replied after some time, still considering it. “But are you fully sure they just want to kill?”

His reply surprised Bryson and he was sure that he had forgotten all the accounts of occurrences there, and he wondered what he thought those things in the wood had been up to. Did he think that they were just animals protecting their territory or something?

“I’ve a few good ideas about that you should know …!” Bryson warned. “So when was the last time you read up on all the deaths that have been occurring around here?”

“They may have been done by something else!” Mortimer firmly responded.

 

Chapter 6

 

The Psychic Research

 

Bryson removed a container from his bag and poured the drink from it down his throat.

“Perfect!” he announced to Merton. “What type of surveillance stuff have you for detecting it then?”

“We have a great deal of stuff as we’ve already shown you! We specialize and experiment in detecting things! This is the best there is, and we love investigating anything extraordinary! Even if it is an assassin that could try to wipe us out … And we would love to help stop it …”

Bryson was surprised and wondered what he was talking about now! He knew they were hiding things, and were hiding what their equipment was and was for. Even the most craziest things that they had come out with had something!

There was something strange about the way that they insisted something of a paranormal nature existed and that it was entirely new, and had not existed in the last castle, especially after considering that he had not actually heard them come out with anything that existed there and that their work showed how accurate they were and always kept to the facts, only showing what truly was there and what they believed was there.

Bryson had a great passion for the new and fantastic and the investigation of the paranormal activity was really interesting even after him actually being in what he considered was a supernatural universe, even though he now had thoughts that it could be something else, and he was surprised that they never questioned him much, but he had realized that they had been affected by meeting Mitchell first and him avoiding saying virtual nothing about what had happened, which made Bryson very curious, and he noticed that they all had an interest in Pendleton for some reason, which he was convinced was to do with his free way of saying things, when he did talk to them. He had a hard time explaining what was there though!

The dreams of the supernatural vortex that Bryson had enlightened them about only confused them and he was sure that they thought he had imagined it and was exaggerating anything that might have existed.

The problem, he was sure, was that they never properly knew what they were up against, as it was a different castle with something else, and that they were not entirely sure what had been at the last one, and that it had not fitted into everything that they had known and had been trained to deal with, which was very vague, unexplored and unproven, and he was sure the vast amount of it had been created to fill the void of nothing occurring.

He believed there were strange phenomena that had not be fully explained everywhere and that the scientists there mainly knew it!

Could this thing they were considering as being from beyond the realms of the universe, and some form of supernatural being, actually be some form of alien? He had not fully proven that the supernatural universe that he had been in had been! Why could such things not exist with hidden science that they never knew of?

What was classed as supernatural? Anything could exist with the right science existing and he wondered if he could actually believe it if he fully encountered it!

It was incredible that nobody had fully proven and investigated anything of that nature, and that all the scientists only considered it when it was brought up, and the other castle seemed to be the only proper case of anything of that nature existing!

He and Merton and Mortimer always saw their point of view and that there was barely any real evidence! They could barely even establish anything and jumped at the chance of finding the slightest suggestion of something that actually was there, and finding new ways of detection! They were fanatics and crazy to achieve what kept proving itself as being fantasy!

They were there to investigate anything in that region that could have been missed, and missed out by other scientists who avoided checking or wasting their funds on it!

The two scientists were accurate in their investigations and checked everything that they could and had built up the most advanced paranormal research establishment that there was, containing the most highly advanced equipment that there was available, which they mainly had there.

On arriving there he had realized that they had something and that they had put together something, and they continued building a vast assembly of equipment fitted together on tables, covering the surrounding room with it, mainly surrounding and aimed at the tunnel behind the wall, with equipment and tools left everywhere, and it was clear that they had been at work building it for a great deal of time already.

The more he examined everything the more he saw and realized more, and that they might achieve far more!

All their assistants and scientists were still running about altering and adjusting things, collecting new information on things, getting old information from their records, and studying it.

Yet he could barely guess what parts of it were for, and it interested him greatly, especially with the interest of the scientists in it and their reactions to it, as though they had been waiting all their lives to create it and that they never had all their technology available before and had something with such incredible potential!

He wondered if what was in tunnel could damage the equipment that they were using and if they could fix or replace it in the near future? It was clearly expensive stuff and perhaps the only stuff available!

Other scientists were there to investigate what the scientists could not and do it to a greater degree than ever before, and he was positive by their reactions that they had never had their day and proper encounter with anything like it and achieved their goal, and that nothing surely would be left for the people who might follow their work someday, to find and be remembered in history.

If only they could just find something that had gone undetected by everyone else, with their detection methods and equipment, and have proper proof for the world!

He was staggered when he considered what they had come up with, as they had advanced far further than he had even imagined and the place was packed solid with every form of equipment possible, and it went beyond his imagination what they might do!

They had managed to transport him back there from the other universe or whatever it was, and must be the only people ever capable doing that!

It was like an experiment to them to see what would happen if they pushed further than ever beyond the boundaries of natural science and out into the supernatural.

The darkening winter night sky through the window revealed the abyss of the billions of light years of stars to Bryson and reminded him of the dangers of exploration into the unknown, and he considered what could exist in its depths, and what kind of aliens existed out there.

“Well, we have now finished our work on setting some of the stuff up!” Merton announced tiredly to Bryson, dragging himself away from his work.

It was incredible! He realized that he had been there for hours and that they still had not properly notified him what they were doing, and what it was fully for! He could not believe how long he had been there without barely noticing it and wondered if he had been damaged by being in the vortex and other universe, and he had seen that the others had seen differences in him and vaguely studied him now and then.

Merton marched over with a smile, while rubbing his tired arm.

“We are here to help!” he announced. “But we do not want all our work ruined and all our valuable stuff available everywhere before we have properly used it!”

Bryson was surprised by his reply and he did see their point of view, and considered what their thoughts of him there were!

He thanked Merton and for saving him from the tunnel.

“You now must be the most experienced on what exists out there!” Merton informed him and the others.

Bryson examined their scientists and the equipment carefully and tried again at estimating what they were doing and left it until they either told him or showed him its use, which surely was the latter and that it would be better for them to show it.

He watched them silently considering what to tell him!

“When we checked the tunnel behind that wall,” Merton stated, “we realized that we could come up with something better to use to check what it does … Well, especially after hearing and monitoring those sounds, which appeared all around this region, at specific points, and we realized that we should!”

“So you can properly check it further?” Bryson replied tiredly.

“We will be able to check it within other dimensions … And properly check those sounds …”

 

Chapter 7

 

The Dinning Room

 

Most of the people at the castle were sitting in the dinning room, chatting loudly and excitedly all around the dinner table, and Bryson walked in fascinated at how far they had cleaned the place up since the last time he had been there.

Bryson sat between Pendleton and Mitchell at the center of the large ancient circular wooden table and ate his food greedily, hungrily than he had in a long time, and realized that he and Pendleton were both eating and drinking crazily and were the only ones there doing it, and some of the others occasionally watched.

Mitchell now seemed more silent and inactive since he had left the castle and Bryson realized how much interest he had in where Mitchell had ended up, and he continually tried to think of a way to get him to say something and solve the puzzle.

Yet he could not think of anything and knew that he would avoid replying to everything!

They all jerked when two loud exploding crackles came off partly wet logs burning in the fireplace, directly in front of Bryson at the other side of the room. The heat from it could be felt warming the place and some smoke could be seen entering the room, giving the place burnt scent, which liked.

“Well, how are your two scientist friends doing?” Mitchell moaned, moving backwards in his seat, to see him better.

“They are making progress!” he replied firmly, watching Mitchell examine him and Pendleton and their eating habits.

Bryson anxiously took some soup and watched him at the corner of his eye with his chunky face examining him. For a moment, he wondered if he had found the answer to the clue or something else.

The hunt for the money was an exciting game to all of the men there and he listened to their tales of their searches for it with great interest and decided that he wished to pursue the treasure more than anything now. Mitchell’s men now seemed far too overconfident now, for some reason, and he could not establish why and realized that they were deliberately avoiding saying something, and it seemed to be Mitchell’s idea, making him wonder why. Were they on the trail of something and were they keeping things secret? But why worry about it! They would either find it or they would not. They had nothing to lose.

He was happy that they had not found it yet anyway, especially while he was not there! As he really wanted to be at least there, and perhaps hold some influence in its discovery.

There seemed be little findings and activity since they had vanished into the tunnel and he was not sure if it had been the fact that Mitchell had not been there, and perhaps him too, and that they had not known what to do without them being there or if it had been the fact that they had found everything that they could and hit a dead end, but he was sure that it had been both factors.

Why not have a good time there! Who knows they might get something else of great value at the place after all! There were many generations of eccentric owners of the castle! Things in it had been there for an immense amount of time! Perhaps some valuable antique existed hidden away somewhere!

He quickly phoned his friend on his pocket phone, and established contact with him and that he would continue his search of the castle for items and send him photos of them for him to establish if they were worth anything, and was surprised that he was still interested and excited, and told him the latest news about the murder at the castle and the police investigation there had come up with little and it was no longer appearing on the media.

Only one or two of the police were at the castle now and there because some of them wanted them there, because there was still great danger of there being a reoccurrence of the killing.

It emphasized the value of the treasure, if it still was there!

Bryson felt the warm air in the surrounding room now and relaxed against the back of his seat. The corridors and rooms were freezing compared to the room now, which he felt occasionally blow in through a gap in the door from someone further along opening an outside door.

He intermittently lifted his glass and tasted sweet white wine.

“Did they not find anything else with all that equipment that arrived here?” one of Mitchell’s men further along the table asked.

“They’ve not finished!” Bryson replied. “They were working on a lot of things! Like our return to the castle!”

“They’ve not finished their work?” Mitchell answered, reminding him again with how vague he was now.

Pendleton lifted his arm and allowed it to fall to his side, and examined a magazine that he had with him, which one of the scientists had given him, which he kept reading with fascination at the technology and things that now were available.

The whole place was mysterious to him, and Bryson also had many mysteries to solve.

Mitchell stretched his arms out, waking himself, and announced, “It’s time to start work!”

“Where are you working now?” Bryson quickly asked.

“We going to lift that tomb out … Then up through the floor from the hidden chamber … Then we’ll see if there’s anything else there! So if you’re interested …?”

Bryson nodded in agreement, realizing Mitchell wanted him there, as well as the two scientists being there, and realized that it would be a good idea to start there, where they had left off, and he recalled the words on the tomb and that he had not established what they meant.

 

Chapter 8

 

The Clues

 

When they entered the library Bryson examined the tunnel entrance, dug out from the floor and now covered over with an ancient stone slab, and Bryson sensed something unusual. But he only grasped that there was snow falling outside.

Yet something seemed different and he watched the others grouping about the table with seats, in front of the books, and he made himself familiar with his new surroundings. Most of the people there were Mitchell’s men and the archaeologists.

Bryson wondered why the books had been hidden away there anyway – in a chamber hidden behind a false wall that opened out like a door – and why someone had gone to such lengths to build it? He knew why the tunnel was hidden out of view but not why they had hidden a small castle library there.

Yet the others that had looked through the books insisted there was nothing there and he took their word for it!

He watched Pendleton gasp as he saw the covered over tunnel, and quickly acknowledge it as a different tunnel entrance from the one that he had gone down, which they had not investigated yet.

Bryson suddenly realized that the books were uneven and hanging out everywhere and that when he had passed by the room earlier that the books had been neatly placed together by the archaeologists, who had been there last, who were the only ones interested in the books, mainly to search for historic accounts of there, and going by what the others had told them.

Somebody had clearly searched through them for something, and Bryson wondered who had been there, and what had the person been looking for? The majority of the people at the castle had been at the dinning room or with the scientists.

He examined objects in the room from different perspectives trying to see if there were anything altered, but never saw anything else and started examining the books.

He eventually asked the archaeologists, “Are there any books missing there?”

They examined through them but never noticed anything so Bryson ignored it.

He wondered where the killer had gone and if he was looking for the treasure, and he started wondering why he had been so desperate to do something? Why did he not wait? Was there a trail that led to it somewhere? Had the person been trying to get something to get to it?

The treasure could be anything and he even wondered if it was the same one that had been in the other castle, and that they would be spending all their time searching for something that they had found already! The treasure could have been there and had been taken by William Randall to the other castle with him! It was only logical that he would have had it near him! Why did he have two treasures anyway?

Bryson had never heard of people having two treasure before and he considered if there was more than one person involved and that there was a second person who had been at this castle who had been a friend or relative of William Randall, and again he wondered if it had been the person in the tomb buried in the chamber beneath the floor, which they would soon go to and remove from the chamber.

Who the hell had they been, and what had they been up to? He started searching through the books with the others for information! Something had to be there and he searched what the books were mainly about and what they were interested in, and soon found out that the books never belonged to them and belonged to later owners of the castle, and the earliest had only a few books that were virtually meaningless to him and gave little.

He was sure that if the map of the castle found in the ring on the person in the tomb proved the person had been with the original people and William Randall, and that if there was information about them, it might be there after all.

There was something about hunting for hidden things that he did not like and that frustrated him! There were far too many things that suggested where things could be and that could anywhere. The mind could almost turn anything into what looked like a clue just by staring at things for long enough, if the person wanted something badly enough! They could be following false clues all the time and make major mistakes there until they left if they were not careful! He was sure, if they had not already been doing it, that they would start doing it as soon as they checked the main places and clues at the castle, with there being no real ways of finding it left.

Here they were searching books for the answer to something that could be anything, and not even exist. The amount of things that the mind could conjure up and associate with it was vast. He doubted if the treasure seekers that he had seen in movies, who had chased after clues, could have answered the clues that they had been given. Why had he never heard of anyone chasing after treasure like it? As far as he was now concerned the people who had found things had been looking for them in ships with people who had found records of there having been treasure, and which had been aboard vessels that had sunk in specific regions that they could trace – and with them not solving strange riddles to them! People found them with knowledge and traced them with technology, and spent a long time doing it, and in most cases never found anything or virtually nothing!

Yet even though they had in the last castle solved the riddles and traced the treasure! And he tried to recall his line of thought when he had found it, and the way the people at the last castle had been that had helped him discover it.

He believed people that came across treasure were incredibly lucky, in the right place at the right time.

He had never proven that people had actually followed clues ever found anything, even though that was what he intended to do, and he thought what he had done at the last castle was more like solving an ancient mystery! People endlessly chased after treasures that never existed – or with fake or unsolvable clues.

Many people had found things while looking for other things though and he could not recall hearing of any of them finding what they had been looking for when it came to major finds like the Holy Grail.

Yet a long time ago things might have been different, and if people did find them he was sure that most people would have no real reasons to report finding anything! Why would they want to? Why tell that people had actually gone about hiding treasure, leaving maps and riddles?

Would real treasure maps be incomprehensible to anyone else? Surely people would try to stop someone else getting their hands on it? Why would they write down obvious places and names that other people would know of and allow them to find it? They could easily use codes and words that other people would not be able to understand, and miss out and muddle things up making sure other people would not be able to establish things – hiding if numbers were co-ordinates or paces. They could give false clues that could easily remind them of the real ones!

The main problem was that there were no real clues or evidence of the treasure existing and that made it incomprehensible to everyone! Yet somewhere there might be another map or mention of it! They might also be able to discover the treasure itself if they searched all the key places people would put it? The archeologists and scientists had very advanced equipment that could be used.

Yet he was unsure if they could cover the whole castle!

Bryson had also been starting to believe that someone knew something that at least proved its existence! He kept sensing it and, though he had not proven a thing, he was sure that it would not take long before they found out about it!

 

Chapter 9

 

The Tomb

 

Bryson wondered how they were going to remove the tomb, as he made his way there from having something to eat. The tomb was made of solid heavy stone and he wondered if they could get enough of the men around it to lift it through the floor.

When he arrived there he was surprised at how far they had gone to do it, and knew right away it was Mitchell’s idea!

The floorboards of the majority of the room around the entrance were piled in the corner and the entrance had been increased in size to a size far greater than the tomb, surely to allow people to carry it up planks of wood, which were sloped down to the tomb to allow it to be pulled upwards.

By what they said Bryson realized that they had attempted to lift it and had been unable to get it and the men up the planks and through the entrance.

Now they were wrapping chains around the tomb and were putting metal poles across the planks of wood, going up through the entrance.

When they had finished preparing everything he watched them push and roll the tomb up the planks of wood over the poles while the others in the room helped pull the tomb up with the chains.

When it was finally up they lay about resting, and Bryson managed to get a proper look at it in the lighted room and tried to see what he had missed, but he never saw anything as the tomb itself was far too dirty and covered in debris.

What interested him most was what they intended to do with it as he could not realize why they were so desperate to get it out, as they had clearly examined it in the chamber with everything that they had, including all the scientists and archaeologists.

He started examining the tomb to see how valuable it might be, but he could not image it could worth much, unless it had historic value that he never knew about, and he wondered if they knew something there that he never and that the stuff had value somewhere. For some reason he could not imagine them being there if there was nothing with definite value there, even the treasure could be there, and he wondered if collectors might value it as being valuable for some reason that he never knew and he thought of phoning the guy he knew who was having him take photos of things to value there.

After taking a few photos of it from a few angles he sent the photos and a message to his friend, and soon received an acknowledgment of the receipt of them. He watched the others to see what their reactions would be but they just ignored him.

Archeologists arrived and got to work cleaning the tomb, and washing all the dirt from it, and Bryson wondered if they intended to make the castle famous and worth something and he wondered what would happen then – and what would happen if it remained haunted and people visited the place from all over the world.

Bryson realized that they were not properly searching the castle now! Yet even though they had agreed to concentrate in the right places and stay together out of danger it might be a mistake as they surely would start giving up after long enough! He was sure that they were best searching it as quickly as possible and covering as much ground as they could without putting themselves in too much danger, and he wished to discover all the key places and search there.

Therefore he started trying to realize where the key places were and wondered how he could safely wander about the rooms and corridors looking! Perhaps it would help solve some of the mysteries there that had accumulated over a long time and since they had arrived.

For a long time he had wanted to investigate somewhere like the last castle as he had missed it greatly and he could not believe he actually had another to investigate. He had always wanted to search the other castle when he had been younger! He had been unable to do it for years as the servants there had kept him in the lounge, on his only visit there, and had persuaded him not to go anywhere else, and he had been unable to visit there again when he had been older as his uncle had not allowed him back.

He felt that he had the freedom to roam this castle and he wanted to take full advantage of it when he could, without getting into any danger, but he was far more interested in finding everything he could about the tomb before doing anything else.

The others spent a long time tediously cleaning the tomb rock and he joined in and examined the writing on it again in case he had missed something, but never found anything. It was just ancient writing that was usually found on tombs and had nothing of interest or was to do with anything else.

Yet one of the archeologists washing and cleaning the end of the tomb uncovered some writing there, which had been covered over with dirt, and Bryson went there first to see what was there, but just before he got there the archeologist announced to his surprise, “It’s the identity of the person in the tomb … His name is William Randall!”

Bryson was staggered and did not know whether to believe it, but the other archeologists there confirmed that they were positive that it was and Bryson wondered what it meant as he had definitely seen the remains and tomb of his ancestor William Randall at the last castle.

Bryson had a hard time even remembering William Randall in detail, and what his skeleton had looked like, and started realizing that he could not properly prove the skeleton in the tomb was him or was not him! How could they prove anything? The lack of evidence annoyed him greatly and he could not prove anything and was like a blind man trying to recognize someone from someone that had not spoken, or had identified himself properly, or had any information about his identity revealed and met someone who never said anything that was being identified as the person! He remembered little about William Randall! Yet he had known what he had been like in places, but that was only basic stuff about him and other people like him at the time. If only they could find something that could give them something worthwhile about him and the people at the castles!

He tried to remember the accounts that they had put together to find the second castle and he tried to recall something about it. He could not remember much about it – yet he could recall that William Randall had been identified as being at the second castle and had been the person who had the second castle built, and he thought that he would have stayed there as well.

It was as though someone were deliberately trying to muddle the facts up and confuse them! It made him shiver thinking of it and what the consequences were and he would now have to accept that the other skeleton at the other castle was someone else. Yet what the hell difference did it make?

He examined the skeleton in the tomb wondering if it really was his ancestor and what difference it would make.

He wondered why they had buried him there under the floor of the castle? Why would someone bury him there? Was there someone after him, or the person there?

Mitchell marched over seeing his slight distress and examined him and seemed interested in something.

“Wasn’t William Randall mentioned as being at the last castle?” he enquired, trying to get some information from him.

“Yes!” he replied firmly and annoyed. “I saw his tomb there though! He was my ancestor that built the castles …”

Most of the people turned and stared, surprised that it was his ancestor that they were examining.

“Incredible!” Mitchell answered. “That’s right! I remember Sir Richard Randall was your uncle … And Robert Randall the current owner … It must be strange being in such a place and meeting one of your ancestors here?”

Bryson finished examining the skeleton and realized that it actually looked the same as the last skeleton!

“Perhaps they could have both skeletons examined to see if they are genetically linked to you?” Mitchell announced. “That should prove what one is authentic and what one is not!”

“That’s a good idea!” he replied, surprised that he had not thought of it.

“I can have it done for you …?” One of the archeologists firmly replied, examining Bryson’s features and comparing them with the skeleton, with surprise. “I’ve another friend over there … Near the other castle who can get something from the other skeleton …”

Bryson was astonished and realized that they had come up with the answer and he agreed firmly and thanked him, and Mitchell for coming up with such a great idea, and he wondered what the outcome of it would be.

 

Chapter 10

 

The Second Death

 

Bryson studied the crumpled up remains of the body of the scientist, who he had worked with many times, trying to realize what had happened. His body was completely drained of water and of something else that he could not recognize.

He had just arrived there, at the remote region of the castle, with Mitchell and his men, and met with Merton and some scientists and police that had been there.

One of the other scientists who had been with the dead scientist earlier had gone out searching for him when he had not arrived to meet him.

For some reason everyone there took it that he had not been killed by the killer and by something else! By something so hideous, evil, and unearthly that they could not even imagine what! He tried to ignore how hideous it was, trying to look upon it as an artist would observe a crazy exhibit, but it was no use! Something was now out to get them! The things in the wood, if they were not the culprits, looked like nothing compared to it, and they now looked as if they had been playing with them and only scaring them away from their territory.

The complexion of the body showed it was drained of blood and showed the deadliness of the place, and their chances of survival had vastly decreased and danger could now exist there in the castle and during the day now and they never knew what they were up against and how to survive against it. They were becoming defenseless and they could not do anything about it!

Bryson was confused more than he could ever recall and he had difficulty discovering what was occurring because now he could not even imagine solving what had happened!

Strange thoughts of him leaving the cold confines of the place and that region gave him shivers of ecstatic pleasure. Yet the pleasure he could have if they solved all the riddles there would be far greater! He could return home or go on holiday to some hot place next to a desert and celebrate – after returning to reality – not on the brink of catastrophe – and he could return to solving normal everyday problems with the effortlessness that he had done for most of his life.

He attempted to work out the exact time that it could have occurred and where the room it was in was located, and wondered why the scientist had been there working alone anyway? At least it might show that the thing would not touch them in groups and in the inhabited regions of the castle.

He could not get why no sounds seemed to be heard from there, and why the death had not been heard? Some loud sounds outside could be heard miles away. Yet all the castle large stones could block even the loudest sounds!

Merton still seemed slightly shocked at it! He had seen him working with the scientist on many occasions!

They all stood about the body while the police examined things about the body. The scientist even looked as though he had tried to crawl over the floor before his death! But he was sure that it only looked that way and that he had been killed swiftly. But by what? And what had the thing done to him?

Bryson and virtually all of the rest of them, accept the police, gasped when some more of the police arrived and one of them asked, “Who would want to kill him?”

Everyone there shrugged and nobody seemed to be able to reply and Bryson did not know how they were going to explain the castle and the situation there if they had to! The police there refused to believe anything extraordinary could occur there.

Merton seemed to mutter, not being able to stay silent any longer, breaking the deep silence, but then was silenced by definitely not wanting to put his foot in it.

“What worries me more than anything,” Bryson muttered to Merton, with confusion, “is they don’t seem to have any clues!”

“They’ll find something!” Merton quickly replied.

“What kind of thing does that? It even looks like a vampire has drained him of blood!”

“That’s ridiculous! We should not have started entering the castle’s desolate regions on our own!”

“What do you reckon could do that then?”

“You’ve a point and I don’t have enough facts to say anything! It may be entirely new to us? They are best treating it as a normal killing until more facts appear.”

“You’re correct,” he muttered back, glaring through a window at the wood outside with interest, wondering how the police would handle the truth.

“How did his killer know that he would be here?” Bryson spoke louder, for the police to hear, startled by the thought that whatever it was could be watching them, perhaps now hidden away in the distant shadows.

“Perhaps that killer was lurking about and encountered the scientist on his own out here, and confronted him … We’ll have to stay in groups and only enter these regions when we need to.”

The police at the body seemed to realize the body was drained of something more and discussed having it checked further to discover what had happened to it.

“Why kill him? Do you think something has been removed from the body?”

“I do not know that! The body will have to be checked thoroughly.”

One of the policemen started using a phone to communicate information about the situation to someone, and eventually started talking louder to someone else who had him examine the body for him, and the police vigorously checked the body looking for a wound and they checked bruised areas trying to see it and finally seemed to give up disappointed, and the person on the phone seemed to react strangely to it and had them check the body again at other places.

The heavy thuds of distant helicopters arriving appeared in the distance and Bryson saw the others starting to leave there.

Persistent moans followed from the person on the police phone, who was trying to identify what it was, and it gave Bryson the impression that they never had a clue either and that the police at the body had not been entirely able to explain what had happened to the person on the phone, and that the person was being dragged away from another vital case to visit there.

Although he could not fully get what the person thought, as the occurrences on this occasion were far from normal, he was sure that they had not been able to explain the deadliness and unusualness of the death and that they were trying to persuade the person to investigate it.

 

Chapter 11

 

The Blood Red Devil

 

The enormous blood red devil energy field shot through the thick stone castle walls, like they were mist, seeking to attack something with vengeance, and its speed increased and the walls altered to glowing flickers while it raged on.

The few people at the castle that rarely caught glimpses of its distant lightening materializations saw only flashes of red, and if it had been slow they would have seen red energy and devil features, straight out of the realms of hell, and realized that they were confronting the devil, with its giant demon shape glowing, altering, whirling, within hideous energy surges, while it consistently stopped itself vanishing from existence and back into its original place and energy states.

Parts of its composition frequently altered or vanished from view when it totally lost control of itself and it even formed other hideous things, and it would show its powers by forming itself into different versions of itself, like freaks of nature.

In ancient times people who had witnessed it had either just escaped with their lives and had given accounts of confronting the most deadly and powerful devil from the deepest depths of hell or had been brutally killed with many having their bodies drained of energy, with their remains being found in hideous forms, and some had even been found so unrecognizable that they had not been thought of as being human.

Sometimes it had lurked in the dark shadows of the castle doing unseen hideous things, and examining the formation of things.

At times it had seemed to detect their thoughts and try to understand what they were and be able to detect strange forms of energy or energy sources from somewhere and alternate, as though trying to imagine what it could be and that it wished to confront it if it could.

Its vast unstable energy explosions could blast out across outer dimensions with so much force that they threatened to make space and time either unbalanced and warped or completely rip away and destroy the fabric of space and time.

 

Chapter 12

 

The Psychic Research Room

 

The psychic researcher’s room, beside the tunnel, was fantastic now and Bryson felt comfortable being there, and especially away from the murder scene at the other side of the castle, which was now packed with police investigators and the media that they had brought there and he was sure they were using the media to cover up making a mess of things somewhere.

It was incredible as at one point he had considered the room that he was in to be the most dangerous place there, with the supernatural disturbance just behind the wall in the tunnel, and which could well be the most powerful supernatural spot on the planet, and he now felt happy there with feelings of comfort from being away from the murder occurrences.

At one point he had been sure that they had been going to remove them from there or take them all away to interrogate them. Sounds of them could be heard away in the distance, as he watched all the scientists in the room about him doing their work and he considered what they could achieve there at the most – but again he still had too little facts to assume anything.

He had thought of getting permission from Merton or Mortimer to have their scientists inform him of any discoveries and information from the equipment as they monitored it, but decided not to disturb them as they would tell him anything important when it occurred anyway.

He frequently gave gasps like the scientists there when he considered what was behind the wall, and the power of it, with it being able to open powerful gateways out the universe and to beyond. It reminded him of sitting on a wall over hell or some hideous place. What was he missing? What were they missing?

He was sure that he could believe that anything could exist somewhere if it had the right means and he knew the powers of science could be used to create.

The situation was bad and the castle’s interior was very dangerous and he wondered if he was imagining that they could get out the place and situations alive, and that the place and supernatural disturbances was playing with them and when either they tried to escape from there or it was ready it would take action against them. The tension on them had clearly been increasing and some people in or near to the targeted areas reacted as if they were in war zones.

Bryson suddenly recalled recognizing some of the work that some of the scientists had done years ago, when he had been examining documents of theirs, and he recalled why he had remembered it all – as it had to do with them checking for the existence of paranormal for the military.

Their stuff was surprising and even more surprising with them working there with the psychic researchers and he recalled that he had even originally thought that they had been deliberately putting the paranormal research title on their project to cover their work and discoveries, as he had not properly seen anyone even check what they had claimed they had been doing or had created. He had thought that they had been checking an alien encounter or the possibility of an alien encounter having happened.

He questioned them on what they were doing and if they had found anything and they gave him documents that informed him that they were checking for virtually all known forms of energy and matter disturbances within and from the tunnel.

He questioned Mortimer about it and if they had detected anything occurring there or elsewhere when the death had taken place and he informed him that they had not and had acknowledged no differences.

He wondered if they could put something together that could properly detect anything emerging from it into the castle so they would know where it was located and they could warn the others. Their lives could also be in danger, especially at such a close range, and that they were not actually protected by anything, and he wondered if there was some reason that it never reacted to them being there?

“What do you have that can be used to detect that thing that killed one of your scientists if it reappears?” he asked Merton, when Merton entered the room, when he finally returned there, and Bryson watched him consider it as though he had been already for a long time and was now thinking of something to say about it, and come to some a conclusion.

“Presumable reactions and any presence might act on things and produce effects to indicate them being there,” Merton replied firmly, but not sure. “Such as it altering air currents, gravity, magnetic fields, radioactivity, scent, sound waves, static, and the light spectrum …”

“Most of the equipment here is to check everything in a degree that has not been done before!” Bryson replied. “To find out if we are missing something! That thing is starting to kill the people now and they have not come up with anything to destroy it. And if things go the way that they are it could kill far more people! We may even have to leave here in the end! If you have anything, even if it just helps locate its position then it will help …”

Merton glared at him and just laughed, and he looked as if he was wondered how much he was exaggerating things and if they should help.

“That may be a good idea if we can find anything,” Mortimer finally replied for Merton, considering it. “This is not the same as the last castle either! What I want to know is what does it wants here? Why has it not left here after such a length of time? And, very importantly, why does it do what it does?”

“We have an abundance of things as we have shown!” Merton continued. “We specialize and experiment in detecting things! This is the best there is and we love investigating anything extraordinary! Even if it is an assassin trying to wipe us all out … And we would love to help stop it if we can get it …”

Bryson started to grasp how advanced and undetectable the thing really was! And he wanted to see what they were up against!

“We barely even found it here,” Mortimer added, clearly trying to encourage them in their work again. “It was pretty well concealed!”

Bryson was confused and wondered what they were suggesting, and why they were so secretive again? Surely they would only really receive fame for their discovery? Scientists all over here could have announced whatever it was straightaway, without any hesitation, just to be acknowledged with the finders, yet they wished it to be concealed.

“We have found something new!” Bryson continued. “And we have not seen anything like it before. It is totally unknown and it has intelligence!”

“An existence that exists in other dimensions than the ones we’re in?” Merton replied.

“We do not know what it is or if it ever was a life form?” Mortimer continued. “Or what other form of life it could have been? But we are sure one of its properties is that it exists through other dimensions!”

“So you have equipment that can detect outer dimensions? I never knew all that stuff actually existed! I have not seen it proven to exist or anything that can enter or detect there!”

“Exactly! What about when you entered that vortex? We have ways of detecting it! It is confidential, of course.”

Bryson realized their point once again and heard them silently confide that they wished to keep their research as confidential as possible, especially with there being the media and so many not fully checked scientists there, and leading scientists, and they thought of having him to agree to a verbal contract agreement of not disclosing anything without their consent, which he agreed to anyway to show them that he would, and wondered what they could actually discover.

As they considered what to say next Bryson examined nearby equipment, and stuff that he recognized and that it was for detecting neutrinos, and he considered what they used it for, and guessed it was another way of detecting paranormal phenomena.

“Of course! But will you sell it? It could make a lot of cash and they may be able to advance the technology further along!”

“Perhaps!” Mortimer answered. “But it is new and needs to be checked out further and we may come up with other findings before anyone else does!”

“Alright! I get you now.”

“I am certain you’re thing, running about the castle, is connected to what’s in this tunnel!”

“That could explain where it came from!”

“Exactly! We have barely done any research on it and we have been at this virtually since we arrived here. We have barely slept! We have so little time!”

“You could contact someone to prolong the stay to carry out your work? And you may be able to advance the technology further along!”

“Perhaps we may! But it is new and it needs to be checked out further, and we may also come up with other equipment …”

 

Chapter 13

 

The New Scientists

 

Bryson had decided to keep their new equipment as secret as he could, even though he was not sure what they had, and what he had seen had been little and could be easily have been exaggerated by them either to keep the scientists all interested or cover up something else they never wanted to reveal!

When he arrived back at their paranormal research room the next day he was surprised to see that the place was packed with more equipment and even though he never knew what it was and had seen any of it before, and he was well updated in technology. The place looked transformed into something new, and he was surprised to see new scientists had arrived and by what they said he was sure that the equipment had been brought by them and belonged to them. Yet one of the biggest surprises he got was when examined it up close and saw how expensive and advanced it was! He could not understand how they could put it there with such value!

He decided he still liked being there, especially away from the other murder scene at the other side of the castle where things had become worse! Everywhere he had looked he had found investigators and people searching for clues, and examining him! He had listened to helicopters arriving all morning, and had been woken up by a loud one landing nearby.

What staggered him was what would happen if they found that the killer was of supernatural origins? Would they come up with another killer that was human to give to the public?

They had thought of telling them to see what would happen and realized that they would firmly believe that they were crazy, and perhaps check them out as suspects.

The situation was bad and could escalate, and them coming up with a fake culprit might do little. The tension amongst Mitchell’s men for one had increased! The people near the outskirts of where the targeted area seemed to react far more to it being a danger. And he wondered if most of them were hiding behind illusions that what was there would avoid the areas they were together in and he started considering in more detail why the others were so sure about it avoiding there! What could stop it going there? Yet he recalled he had been sure that it originated from the things in the wood not getting near the castle there!

Was there some form of rules to how it worked? Was it the same as vampires not being able to come out in the daylight? Were they missing the fact that these things actually existed? It was thought to be supernatural in nature and have originated from supernatural gateways.

Bryson recalled recognizing some of the work that one of the new scientists in the room had done, after Bryson had examined documents that they had given him.

Their stuff was surprising and far more surprising with them using it to work with the psychic researchers and he even thought that they were deliberately putting the psychic researching title on it to cover their work and discoveries, as he had hardly even seen anyone even check what scientists did or created in that region.

They informed him that they were checking for virtually all known forms of energy and matter disturbances.

Bryson imagined the presence of some mysterious entity there, existing in the tunnel, which they could not detect or account for, and wondered if it could be contacted through someone.

Some people thought mass killing was going on at the castle from the way the media was showing things there, and with them covering details of the occurrences, which the police had done as they had not found anything on how the death was so hideously done. To them it was like some group were carrying it out, and that it looked as though other deaths were to follow.

What was the true nature of the savage and brutal killings that threatened everyone there? What were the motives?

The quest for the treasure by someone seemed to have gone beyond the normal and they thought something else was occurring! Had some hidden occurrence taken place that had led up to the events? Unseen and unpredicted events could occur that had to be handled!

Why did the killer or killers continue on going even after all the occurrences and heavy police presence? Surely the person or people must be mad to continue in the mode they had?

Many people wanted more than investigations of the deaths and what was actually occurring there and Bryson realized that they could end their adventure there – and even accuse them of crimes!

What if it was proven that there was an actual alien there, what would they do? Would they call in the military to deal with it?

The paranormal scientists decided against going near or in the direct path of what was there, if they could avoid it, and they stayed located at places where other scientists and the others regularly occupied and where they could make a quick exit from if it appeared, and Bryson had heard them discuss using surveillance cameras and other equipment, which he was interested in and wondered if the police would consider it?

Whatever it was it was virtually unpredictable! And he wondered if it would turn predictable, as the things in the wood were predictable in their appearance, and he wondered if they were normally unpredictable? What if there were a lot more of them and these were the only ones that made predictable appearances? There could be a great deal of luck involved in encountering them, if they were unpredictable!

Eventually the paranormal scientists had consultations with the police, and the police gave them their accounts of the evidence that they had gathered and they now had left their minds open to what was there.

Bryson knew that all the scientists as a group did think it was of paranormal origins, even though the killer existed, and that he had chased him through a passage out into the wood.

Yet someone who had been there and seen a lot of the things there could easily have found a way to mimic what something there might do, for the person to cover up their crimes! Yet how would the person have removed what had been removed from the body? He wondered if he could have found something there to do it with? How did the tunnels in the wood get made? Where did the technology come from?

Bryson left it there as he never had enough information in what could have done it! He had not heard of anything that could do it or if it was even possible!

What surprised him and a few others was how they reacted and treated it, and that they had something at last that they had been waiting the majority of their lives for, and they were not going to ruin it on such an occurrence and that they had all decided to help the police with their investigations.

The occurrences that they had witnessed there astounded enough of them enough to believe that they were dealing with something supernatural that might have taken an ancient form and they consulted openly with the other scientists on what it could be – while leaving it open to anyone to add to and for other scientists to give their thoughts on – and they all agreed that they thought it was new and of an entirely new status.

After a great deal of discussion and surveillance of the tunnel, checking readings and observations of it through monitors from every form of surveillance, most of them remained set on leaving it open and claimed that it was more advanced than anything that they had seen and perhaps would see.

Another discovery was announced by one of the new scientists at locations around the tunnel, in the rooms going around it, and that faint sounds were emerging around the tunnel, which were being checked by various equipment around it, and that they showed something strange, and that with the sounds played around the scientists in the positions that they were recorded at around the tunnel, with the volume turned up, the sounds were appearing around something, at the other dimensions that they were appearing from.

 

Chapter 14

 

The Treasure Tunnel

 

Bryson and Pendleton arrived at a castle room, deep in the danger zone of the castle, where they had to slip passed the police to get to, and Bryson still could not believe that they were going to such lengths to explore there.

It was the only way to find what was there! The police would not allow them to enter that region of the castle, and Pendleton had told him it was where the tunnel he had entered had been.

After consistently wandering around the castle Pendleton’s memory had returned and he insisted that he knew where the room where the hidden entrance to the tunnel was, on the top floor, but they could not get there because of there being so many police there, and they had gone to the floor and room below it. Bryson could not ignore it! If it was the tunnel that Pendleton had gone down there might be a chance that the treasure was buried somewhere nearby.

Thus Pendleton had a reason for wanting the treasure so much now! He had nothing now that he had returned as all his possessions were gone, years before, and Bryson had promised him a good share in it if he found it.

The room was an ordinary castle room, which had clearly not been entered by anyone for a long time.

He could not get why they thought the treasure had been there, and neither could Pendleton, but the tunnel had been there at the exact location they had traced it to and if it had not been for the supernatural vortex, like the one Bryson had entered in the other room, Pendleton was sure that they would have found it.

Pendleton could not believe he was back there, with the other two treasure hunters now gone, as he had fantasized many times on the island of it.

The wall grabbed his attention as its thickness was the same as the room the other tunnel was in. Even though many rooms had chimneys running through them!

If only he had taken some of the equipment the archaeologists had to scan the wall first he could have gotten a vague view of its interior, as well as of the floor. Yet the scans of the other tunnel had shown little! The technology would have to be improved!

Bryson repeatedly thumped his hand hard against the wall, intensely listening for anything, while he slowly moved over the bed. Then he suddenly halted and jumped back, as a chunk of stone crumbled and shifted in behind the wallpaper.

The destruction of a historical castle gave him slight feelings of guilt but he knew it could be easily repaired and if they got rid of the haunting there he was positive someone would do up the place and turn it into the expensive historic castle that it was supposed to be, and perhaps clear the region of wood surrounding it into gardens with lanes and a road.

He carefully shifted the awkward mass of stone out, in stages, from the wall, as Pendleton stayed ready to help him. Pendleton had little strength now, after being on the island for so many years and though his body was not old it was weak and he suffered from being ill a lot, especially with the intense cold.

They were both obsessed and Bryson’s clambering resumed until he finally had to stop – feeling a sudden loss of energy, with his legs starting to collapse under him, with much discomfort to his hands and arms being cut and bruised at where he had been tugging the boulder out.

His eyes occasionally fell on the mess under him with little interest! The thick layer of stone and dust fragments scattered across the room was nothing now!

With a sudden heave he incredibly wrenched the boulder out and dropped it over to his side, where it bounced off the bed onto the floor, where a loud bang instantly came from the floorboards, which even collapsed in with the weight.

In the large black gap left in the wall, where the stone block had blocked, there was nothing visible and he waited for his eyes to adjust to the darkness. But it stayed dim and showed him nothing!

Pendleton handed him one of the most powerful lights that they had brought to the castle, and which was another reason why they were there as the lights that they had used in the tunnels had been weak and showed nothing because of their limited range.

He turned on his light and confirmed that it was the tunnel and he poked his head in and crawled into the hole towards it.

Once further in, with his arms out in front, he pulled himself into the tunnel, with his head facing downwards, and he shone the powerful light down the tunnel. Where he saw the tunnel going deep down below, and as his sight adjusted to it he saw nothing and started to wonder if it was a large chimney.

Yet it seemed too large to be a chimney and there was no trace of soot or anything that would surely be there, even if they had it cleaned. Although there was the chance that nobody had really used it and that any marks were hidden below. But again it was not in the right position to be one! And he was sure that there were no fireplaces below to be connected to a chimney!

He saw its true size the more he looked and that it went further down to the bottom of the castle. His breathing echoed into it, and its coldness made clouds of steam pour out of his mouth into it.

Suddenly sounds started emerging below and he wondered if he had activated it! They started sounding mind-bending and started screaming through the shaft until they had a fury that stunned him, with some sounding like screams and others like wailing spirits.

Clouds of powdered dirt and stone fell about at different points around boulders far below as though the tunnel were being shaken by an earthquake. Dust swirled through his beam of light as he wondered where the treasure would be buried away!

He imagined Pendleton and the other two treasure hunters there years before, during the Second World War, hanging on their ropes, just over the disturbance, which he tried to locate and realized he could find something there by watching what was happening below carefully, which he had not been able to do when he had been in the other tunnel on the steps, surrounded in darkness, and he realized that he had actually avoided being killed there after all, and wondered if he was going to be killed later instead and was unsure what was worse.

He groaned and grabbed hold of part of a castle boulder he was resting over, with his head and arms sticking over into the tunnel, glimpsing parts of the shaft below, and he wondered what William Randall, his great ancestor, builder of the castle, had done and built there? They had clearly gone to great lengths to build something! At times it had felt like the whole castle was something else – created for some function that he could not even imagine – which went beyond his understanding.

Yet going by the stories something happened that had killed them all! So if it was true then what happened then and how did it end up in the tunnel and in the other tunnel, and was it there in other dimensions, and what was there below? Why had it not moved away into the other dimensions? What was keeping it there? Surely there had to be something there that they were missing? Perhaps it was disguised as something or had been hidden? Such advanced technology could achieve virtually anything and it could be something that he had not even considered possible?

He had always wanted to explore and discover something new of value and greatness in science, and perhaps even be remembered in history!

What interested and alarmed them was why it was hidden in such a place and created such occurrences! What was it they were dealing with anyway? Why was it in such a far out place?

Something of unfathomable unidentifiable supernatural nature sounded as though it were under him trapped in some form of magnetic or energy field, trapped and trying to free itself from something, ultimately escaping to another location of liberty, and he tried imagining some form of spirit trapped there every night for hundreds of years.

“Have you found if it’s down there?” Pendleton shouted in, in an alarmed state, with a combination of annoyance and confusion, and Bryson realized that he had been trying to get his attention, and he gave him the impression that he might be on the edge of considering doing something extreme, beyond the normal.

“It’s that disturbance below! I need more time here to examine the tunnel and see if I can discover something!”

Bryson again started to realize the implications of the find and that they might have to check what was there someday, and he better start finding information about it.

Pendleton shouted loudly, “Good idea!”

Bryson was confused at what they would do if he found the treasure there below? How would they go about getting it? What was there could be guarding the treasure, and why nobody had got it? William Randall could have left it there to guard his treasure while he was away? Yet if that were the case how would he have gotten the treasure himself and how did he put the thing and the treasure below?

Bryson felt that he had finally found something that might even be above his understanding and he wondered if he was going pay for his encountering the thing below?

It amazed Bryson, from what Pendleton had told him, was that they had been trying to get the treasure there in the middle of the night, in what had been a haunted castle buried away in a wood. Yet he believed that they were good – as they had traced the treasure there and found the location – and had survived getting through the wood.

He imagined them shifting into the shaft and making their way down, with their ancient lights.

Bryson looked up and saw ventilation shafts entering the tunnel and realized that they must run through most of the building.

“What else could it be?” Pendleton asked, trying to get some information on the tunnel, and Bryson ignored him.

The height of the castle was incredible, especially with it having been built when it had, as well as the length being so massive with rooms and corridors going out everywhere – and he could hardly believe that they had built it and he wondered if it was built by something else – and he remembered that he had not thought such a construction had been possible at that date. It was also unbelievable that somebody had managed to ship the construction over to there when it had happened, in such large sections and fit them together.

How could people spend so much on such things at the date it was built? It was a disgrace and offense that such a work of art and construction should end up derelict out in such a desolate wood? He really wished to solve the mysteries there and put them out in the open for everyone to see.

He gasped as he recalled the legends and what had already happened there and wondered if this could be his final encounter!

For a moment he considered if it had actually come from Transylvania and had vampires or something – and that was what they were missing! At times he had thought it had similarities to castles over there!

“You could send down a camera with a light attached down?” Pendleton announced, to his surprise, and wondered why the scientists had not done it and recalled that he had heard some of them mention exploring the tunnel with equipment, and remembered that their stuff had vanished.

Sounds were now screaming up at him and he realized how loud they had become, as if a gateway into hell were there, with him balanced over it.

He jerked when he heard some sort of almost human scream as though from out of in a distant strange place, and he searched below where the bottom of the castle was and saw blackness, like it were really located out in space.

Some of blocks of stone about him resembled smaller versions of stones in Egyptian pyramids and he even wondered if they were the same and there for some reason. They were strange things to use to build with as their weight was immense and they could easily have decreased their size and made them easier to shift about and work with, but they were hard to penetrate and were needed in a good castle.

He realized some sounds were now not emerging from far below him but were coming from somewhere just below him, and then he thought he heard one emerge next to him and he listened intensely with confusion.

Sounds manifested everywhere as though they were invisible unidentifiable things surrounding there, and strange glowing and swirling forces seemed to form in the blackness below, and he saw something that looked like a transparent rectangle black shape.

As he tried to see what was going on about him he noticed that light across his front was moving upwards and he fixed his eyes onto a strange orb of light floating upwards.

With a loud thud he banged his shoulder against the side of him and clouds of gray dust flew about almost blinding him, going into his face and lungs, and he rushed back into the room.

 

Chapter 15

 

The Mist

 

Early the next morning Bryson awoke in the deep silence of his room and opened his eyes to see that it was starting to get light, and realized something was somehow different and instead of seeing peaceful surroundings of his darkened room he slowly focused upon a faint mist about him and he instantly started searching for signs of a fire.

Yet there was nothing there to burn as the castle was virtually entirely made of thick stone and was as non-flammable as it could be! So he considered what could be burning!

Could smoke reach there from the lounge, dinning room, or kitchen? Perhaps one of the chimneys caught fire with all the rubbish stuck up in them, from years of being there, with small trees and vegetation covering the outer walls and roof? A hole in a chimney from it crumbling away could let smoke in!

Yet there was no sign of the scent of smoke or anything, and he sat upright in bed and watched a dark shadow from the mist creep over the walls, while cold swirling currents of mist shifted about in a hovering shape, and a wild beast’s blood-chilling screech came from a distant place, hidden out in the landscape, and he considered what it was.

When his eyes adapted and his vision grew in strength he saw a cloud drifting about over the floor that was moving around as though there were no gravity and he considered if it was real or something else. He proved that it was not made of smoke and only looked like it – and was really something else that was unidentifiable that was very faint that he could hardly see – and he looked about to find its source and where it was being generated, but never saw anything and he checked if it was a mirage, and some form of light illusion and reflection off something, and he checked all possible sources. Yet there was nothing visible to him that could produce it and it hung in the air over the middle of the room and swirled about, and seemed to be actually doing something. He was unable to explain its presence, and he stayed where he was, and started to grasp it could be one of the supernatural disturbances there, like the mist in the wood, and he realized that it could be dangerous.

When it thickened he started shifting and grabbed his clothes, without entering the central region, and he moved right up to it and watched it forming a turbulent cloud formation, with it forming shapes in itself, like something was forming itself into a life form, and, even after seeing all the things on the previous day in the tunnel, he still tried to prove that it was something else and he started thinking of other things that it could be.

It was forming itself into something that was unidentifiable and he knew Merton and Mortimer would love to see it and started to work out a route to the door without entering it and realized that he would have to go through one of its edges.

He strained himself and prepared himself to handle what could happen if it reacted and did anything. Though he could not really see it doing much as it was only in a mist formation!

Then within it he spotted what looked like a head and he sat dazed trying to figure out what it would form into, confused at what would happen when it did! What if it formed some form of dangerous life form or something else?

The color of the head region was white, with a far more dense shade than it had been minutes before, and it clearly was now forming at an accelerated rate, and he decided to go and get the others and rushed to the door and out into the corridor and looked out for others but never saw any of them about.

When he knocked on Merton and Mortimer’s doors he wondered if he had imagined what it was and he informed them of what had happened and they both dressed quickly and rushed over with him to his room.

They stood dazed examining it at the doorway, searching it for clues to its identity, trying to see what it could do.

“What the hell is that?” Mitchell said, announcing his arrival from behind them, from the side of the doorway. “Is it dangerous?”

“We don’t know yet?” Mortimer replied first, examining it more than the others. “What I want to know is why it’s in your room and why we have not seen this anywhere else?

“What did you do yesterday? Did you go out into the wood or something? I noticed you were away for a long time …”

Bryson considered what to say and whether to tell him, ignore him, or tell him something else.

“We went to find the other tunnel where Pendleton entered …”

“Was that over there where the police banned us from going?”

“Yes! And we found it! Pendleton recalled where it was – as he now has an interest in the treasure …”

“That could have been dangerous!”

“Did you find anything?” Mitchell said, startled at the mention of someone making a major move to find the treasure without him knowing of it. “What was there?”

“We only found another tunnel like the other one under the library!”

“Where is it then?”

“I’ll have to show you!”

“Alright! Show it to us later!”

“I think it is transferring itself here!” Mortimer announced, staring at the formation forming in the center of the area in front of the bed.

“What will we do with it?” Bryson muttered, wondering if it had a means of understanding them.

“Wait here!” Mitchell replied, and he rushed off to get his men at their rooms.

“It is becoming more powerful!” Merton stated, staring at its large head shape that kept reforming into something, which it was clearly putting most of its time and energy into.

Bryson spotted that it had transformed into normal matter in places and that yellow slime dripped from its head into the carpet, and a slight human/animal odor scented the air.

The thing seemed to sense something somewhere, perhaps danger, and increased how fast it was building itself, and Bryson wondered why it had chosen his room – which the others thought was connected to his visit to the tunnel – and he wondered why something wanted to visit him and he realized that it could have easily formed itself somewhere nearby!

The main questions had to be was it dangerous and what did it want to do there?

Mitchell arrived with his men and their weapons, and moved Bryson and the two scientists out of the way, and stood at the doorway aiming their guns at it, waiting for the opportunity to fire at it.

Bryson wondered if they could kill it in its original state as the bullets surely would have gone straight through it, and now it could keep repairing the damage.

“What are we going to do with it?” Merton suddenly announced emotionally, realizing something about it, deliberately grasping Mitchell’s attention.

“What we need to do now is decide what to do with it if it does not attack us?” Mortimer continued, wondering what Merton had noticed, and he studied it in detail.

Bryson looked at where Merton was staring, at its head region, and he suddenly noticed that it was taking the shape of a human head, and realized that they could be in trouble if they destroyed it in the form of a human.

 

Chapter 16

 

The New Species of Human

 

Once it had completely formed into a human the men dropped their guns down and stared at it with their mouth open, and they acknowledged that they had to have witnessed a miracle.

Surprisingly Bryson had to be the most startled and if not certainly the most confused as it was identical to him, and he realized he was now going to meet himself.

The men seemed happier that they were not now in any apparent danger, and they could destroy it or take it prisoner.

Bryson started to wonder if it had any of his memories and wondered how much of a danger it was to him? Was it intelligent? What did it want? Why had it deliberately done it in front of him, and when he awoke?

Did it have a mission? Was it connected to the thing or was it the thing itself that he had encountered in the tunnel the day before? And was it the same thing that had done the killings there?

They all seemed confused and wishing for answers, and a few of the police, some of Mitchell’s men knew, had passed there and had tried to explain what had been happening, and now never understood why there was another Bryson about.

They watched it put on some clothes one of Mitchell’s men got for it and stand next to them at the doorway, and Bryson realized that not only had it put on clothes that it had done it in the same way that he normally did, and he gasped at the thing knowing all his thoughts and memories and he tried to work out how dangerous it could be.

Yet the supernatural thing could have read and got his make up from the first seconds that he entered the supernatural vortex, and perhaps even before then when he had arrived at the castle.

What was the answer to this problem? None of them knew what they were dealing with! Was it more than one thing? Were the rest things that it had picked up through the vortex? And what was it up to? Was it part of the thing in the tunnel that he had visited the day before?

He did think it had some connection to the thing in the tunnel as it had looked as if it had wanted to make contact or something with him, but he did not risk it as he could have end up in a worse place and situation than the last time!

Yet why had the thing in the tunnel wanted to make contact with him when he must have made contact with it going into the other tunnel and going through the vortex? The thing would have got all the information that it had wanted there and could have communicated with him! Was there two things – one in each tunnel – or perhaps more?

Bryson watched the copy of himself and realized that he could learn a lot of things from it and about himself, and saw all the advantages of it being there. If it was there to do harm why did it not just kill him?

His first thing to do was try to communicate with it and somehow get information about its mission.

Merton and Mortimer took Mitchell further up the corridor and communicated in whispers with him, decided on something and returned, and they took him and the thing down to the empty dinning room, and closed the door behind them, and offered the thing food that Bryson normally ate and they all ate their breakfast, with Bryson sitting opposite them directly in front of the thing, occasionally watching it with some amazement. He had never fully known what he had been like until now – even though it had a great deal of different reactions – mainly due to it being a stranger and unfamiliar with many things – and Bryson slowly accepted it was something else in his body, and realized the potential again, as well as the others as well, and them actually getting information from the thing haunting the place.

Yet after more observations he realized that it could be something else – and not the thing haunting there!

None of them said anything to it and waiting for something to happen, and Bryson wondered what would happen and sat chewing pieces of his food, considering what he would do if he was it in different scenarios and when he finished he considered what the others would do, until he felt that he had considered everything, and was surprised that something else actually happened instead and the dinning room door swiftly swung open and two archeologists entered with startled faces – and stared at the two versions of Bryson facing each other across the table with amazement and laughed – and even thought of changing what they had planned to do but went through with it anyway.

Both of them sat next to Mitchell and one of them removed some documents and placed them on the table in front of him, and Bryson recognized him as the archeologist that had been at the tomb when they had taken it up into the room and found the tomb had the name William Randall engraved on it.

“We had both skeletons examined to see if they are genetically linked to Bryson’s blood sample you gave us?” the archeologist announced. “To prove what one was William Randall and what one was not William Randall!”

“As William Randall is marked as being in a tomb at the other castle and in the tomb here …” Mitchell continued further, vaguely amused, watching the thing along the table from him.

“That’s correct!” he replied, almost laughing hideously for some reason that baffled Bryson – who wondered which one had been the authentic one – thinking the archeologist would now tell them that it was neither.

“We even had the results checked again after receiving them!” the archeologist firmly replied.

“And what …?” Mitchell moaned.

“Well! They are both William Randall!” the archeologist announced, handing the documents over to them, shrugging and wondering again why the stranger looked like Bryson.

 

Chapter 17

 

The Two Randalls

 

Bryson recalled examining the features of the skeleton in the tomb at the top floor and comparing it with the other skeleton at the last castle and knew that they had been the same.

The other version of him had seemed to react for a brief moment when it had been told!

Bryson was astonished and realized that there had been two William Randalls and that they had not been twins! Mitchell had suggested that they had been twins and that the accounts of them had for some reason missed out details of them, which was common in historical accounts as Bryson had learned on many occasions, but the archeologist had firmly declared that they had not been twins and had been identical – and that the documents affirmed that they were of the same person.

It was strange as he now had to think of there being two William Randalls at two castles and he wondered what had happened to create such a situation? How did the William Randall at the top floor die? And why had he been put where he had been? And what had people at the time thought of it, and he wondered if they had thought of it as witchcraft? There had been accounts of it at the last castle, and he even thought the occurrences there had been responsible for putting so much accounts of witchcraft into the history books – as they had been the only proper accounts of witchcraft happening – as far as he was concerned!

For a moment they had all silently watched the other him at the table as he had finished his meal and Bryson had started going through the problems that might surface and that they might keep identifying it as being him and vice versa, and he had wondered what would happen if it started claiming it was and how he could explain to people who had not witnessed what had happened what was happening? They could barely explain anything there to the police already and they insisted in knowing everything there!

He wondered what it was classed as? If it had not been for the strange appearance it had made in his room he could have taken it for something else! He might have thought the disturbance had done something with time and allowed an earlier or older version of him to appear!

Bryson could not realize who was more amazed him or the others, and he dared not let the other him out of his sight in case it did something that he would get the blame for!

“Just tell me – what the hell you are?” Mitchell demanded once, finally trying answer at least one of his queries.

“I do not know!” it announced, clearly not knowing.

“I never knew you had a brother?” Mitchell continued, amused, trying to think of what he was missing. He clearly thought there was a hidden joke!

“I don’t remember anything!” it continued, not knowing what to do now.

“What? You lost your memory? Where did that happen?”

“On my way back here!”

“Back here!” Mitchell replied, and laughed loudly. “What? You are claiming you were here and left …?”

“Of course! I awakened – up there!”

The stranger pointed over in the direction that that had come from, from Bryson’s room, and Bryson tried to detect if it was now following an act to cover up its identity.

Mitchell heard a noise from his communication device and picked it up and started talking to someone.

Bryson wondered what would happen if the thing made copies of all of them? They would be breaking the law if they tried to do anything to them! What could they do with them? Could they prove that they were aliens?

Bryson decided to keep the thing near him! But not to near! He was not going to sleep with it near him! Yet the thing could have easily have already killed him in his opinion!

“That’s strange!” Mitchell announced, leaving the room. “A lot of the stuff on the people here has been erased from our files!”

Bryson immediately wondered why Mitchell had files on the people there, and as if they knew about it. It was strange! They had brought Mitchell there to find the treasure and basically help them with anything dangerous – and he was now running things further than anyone else – and seemed to have connections in the police as well as in the military, where he seemed to be still a major figure for some reason, which he had claimed he had no longer anything to do with – and all the men working for him had treated him as being far more than ex-military, and some had even given him a high up military title and salute.

Bryson watched Merton and Mortimer follow him out and leave him alone with the thing, facing him across the table.

“So what’s your name then?” Bryson finally asked jokingly, realizing that he had to talk to it and he had been in far worse situations there already – like going through the vortex …

“Bryson!” it joked back, making him gag for a moment.

“We could be twins?” he replied, not just joking but seriously trying to solve the problem of what to do with it, for the moment.

“Alright!”

“My name is Bryson so you’ll have to choose another …”

“Call me Thomas!” it replied, making him gasp again, knowing it had deliberately used his first name knowing that it had not been told to it, and he thanked it for letting him know it.

“Choose another!”

“Call me William then!”

“Alright!”

“Maybe we can do each other a favor … We could have information that we both want?”

“You are perfectly correct!”

Bryson observed how human and identical it really was and tried to establish the differences in it to establish what it was really like and he saw differences in the way it used its features.

 

Chapter 18

 

The Thing from the Tunnel

 

Bryson wondered if the thing was automatically carrying out a programming given to it by what was in the second tunnel, even though it was capable of being human and doing human things it was like it was carrying out a plan, which he never fully knew what and left it as it wanting to gather information.

It seemed to like finding information on what it could and checking for anything of interest, abnormalities, and he watched it examining things. And even though he could not get if it was hiding anything he avoided questioning it.

He was starting to think Mitchell was part of scheme to carry out some very illegal activity there. Yet what could he be up to there? Unless he intended to take the treasure away and disappear with it?

He even considered there was something of else of value there and if he intended in taking it back without anyone knowing of it! But what was it? Perhaps he had heard of something being there from accounts of there – which had been hidden away from them? Pendleton and his two treasure hunters had known things that had not been told to them! Yet that was not an illegal activity and it was even up to him whether he told anyone of it – and he was sure that it was something else!

Though he would be bothered if he did take the treasure without him knowing about – even if he never got any of it – as he wanted to find it and see what it was more than anything!

Many items there were being kept and sent out by many of them that thought that they had great hidden value, but he knew that they never as he had them checked out by his friend and Bryson had not found anything worth taking except for glamorous and curious ornaments to remember the place.

They started searching the rest of the top floor and the area the police had warned them not to go in, and searched everything while checking nothing deadly was there.

He started noticing Mitchell had more interest in the William Randall tomb and insisted in having it removed from there – by having the windows of the room removed and having it lowered down to the ground on ropes, where it was taken away by a helicopter. All the people he had contacted about it valued it as of being of little value and he wondered if he was going to have it checked for something, and it having something hidden in it.

He was sure that he would even discard it before they left there, especially if they found something of real value. Since he had been at the last castle he had gotten to know many explorers, who had made explorations all around the world, as it interested him greatly, especially after him finding the last treasure, and he had started to believe there were treasures about and he was amazed that a lot of treasure hunters and people interested in exploration had met with him after hearing of his discover of the treasure, and they had him recollect and give his account of what had happened.

Mitchell was an explorer and had heard of his accounts and had been told many things about him by the scientists.

Bryson was unsure how far they would go there and how it would end, and wondered if they would keep going searching there for months and wondered how long he would stay there until he had enough of it and was positive that there was nothing there, and if they could solve the disturbances there.

He knew how valuable the place was though and would try to get what he wanted somewhere before he left.

There had to be something of value there and they were all keen to find what was hidden away there enough for something to happen, and he briefly wondered if what existed could be let loose on the world? Nobody knew what was holding it there or what it really was!

Bryson searched the rooms with William and watched him search and how he did it. Yet he still could not grasp some major thing about him, and never really knowing what he was doing or looking for being that thing, but he still could not believe it actually was it. It surely was created by it, separate from it, to carry out work.

If it was seriously dangerous, and it started doing things against them, they would have to do things legally against it – because as far as everyone there was now concerned it was human – and he also thought it was human now and that they could end up having serious problems.

What if it really was different and an alien and could breed? Could such creatures start to take over the Earth?

While they were searching a room Mitchell had appeared at the door, and started searching objects there, like he was checking if they were missing anything.

“Do think there is anything here?” Mitchell asked it, trying to get his views about it.

It just laughed like Bryson, over some hidden joke, either about it or about him, or something that they had not grasped.

“I have checked almost everything here,” Bryson replied. “Nothing here is anything of value! What do you think William? Could there be anything of value about here?”

It looked over at him, still slightly amused, with its amused expression, and replied, “Out here! I don’t think so!”

His reactions were little! If he was what he claimed why did he not act more like him? Yet why was he not like a twin and even doing things differently? It once had him searching his memories of his relatives that had been like him!

 

Chapter 19

 

The Killer

 

Bryson stood at a room window and watched the snow come down heavily and he knew that it was the start of another blizzard hitting region, and watched it cover the wood in front of the castle.

Somewhere in the lower castle he heard a heavy thud that sounded like an explosion of something and he felt its shudder go through the castle stone.

As he started to wonder what had caused it a strange black figure, covered all over in black clothing, rushed out the castle at a speed he thought was staggering, and he wondered if he was an eminent sprinter.

Then he watched the figure enter the wood faster than he thought possible and wondered what he was missing, and stood more confused when another figure appeared below and started blasting rounds of bullets at him in the wood with one definitely hitting him – especially going by the confidence of the policeman and the way he stopped and his various reactions.

Bryson left and put on a thicker jacket and rushed down to the lounge and to the front door, where he saw a group of policemen who recognized him immediately as they were the same police that he had followed into the tunnel and out into the wood after the killer.

One of them turned and even gasped when he saw him, and Bryson was sure something was going to happen there as they were getting ready to do something.

They rushed out into the wood and invited Bryson to follow them and Bryson followed them, checking that it was not going to turn dark, but he was sure that they had at least an hour before it did turn dark.

He immediately started showing his presence and went up to the front of the group to question the policeman that recognized him, that he remembered talking with when they had chased the killer into the tunnel.

While they scrambled through the snow he heard two policemen in front of them giving panic-stricken replies and he wondered why?

They clearly believed that they were chasing the killer out into the wood, and they were glad to see Bryson there again and knew that he knew the ground more than them.

The man had been in a large hooded black jacket that he had used to cover his face and nobody had seen his face, and he had shot and killed one of the policemen in the castle.

It was believed that he had entered the castle and police surveillance equipment, put there to catch him, had alerted them to him being there!

A blue light flashed over the wood from behind them and he watched it illuminate the wood slightly, making him realize it had become dimmer, and he wondered if it was entirely the snow falling, thick trees, and heavy clouds doing it.

It turned worse than he had imagined as the police were rushing about back at the castle getting ready to begin a full-scale operation in the wood to get the guy. Yet he realized that though it could have them out there in the dark that a police helicopter could catch him!

The killer confused him as nobody yet had seen his face, which was clearly covered up, and the speed of the man was incredible and that of a top athlete. Had the guy increased his running speed to get out of being caught and he wondered how long he could run at that speed and he knew that the police about him thought that he would slow down eventually.

The speed of him was the main thing that they had underestimated the last time and that he had managed to get out into the wood and have his footprints covered up by the snow, and with them running after him fast through the tunnel.

When Bryson saw his footprints he was surprised again! Though they were normal shoe marks their placement was strange and placed differently than he had seen before! Yet it could have been him rushing through the deep snow and through the blizzard, and he still seemed to Bryson’s disappointment to be still traveling at a fast pace and he wondered where the hell he was going to out there anyway.

He had survived in the wood the last time and seemed to know it and where he was going. If only the helicopter would turn up!

Their confidence was suddenly increased by the discovery of the killer’s blood on some of the snow, showing that he had been wounded and that they had not imagined it, and they collected some and examined it and Bryson was amazed that it actually looked different and as though the person had something on the wound that had altered it somehow – and he wondered if they would trace and catch him if he got away.

Through one of the police communicators he listened to the police back at the castle communicate with the police somewhere else and he listened to their exchanges with interest and heard them mention a helicopter coming out.

When it finally appeared it was far darker and they saw its light racing over the trees, going towards the castle, and he wondered how long it would take to reappear over them. He wondered where the guy was going to and why he thought there was no danger being there in the wood at night? Had the guy originally intended to stay in the castle at night? And where was he going to now?

He decided to accept that the person knew of the disturbances and deaths that had occurred in the wood and wondered if he had made a mistake being there at night or if he had some means of avoiding it, and Bryson started considering all the things available to him. Yet there were few and going by the direction that they were going in that he might pass part of one of the tunnels or there might be another, if there was an entrance to it there.

When he saw one of the police with a map of the region he examined it and saw that there was a small place about twenty miles out across the wood in front of them and he wondered if the guy intended to go there, and he thought he might have made a mistake as if he reached there surely they could be waiting for him. Yet would the guy attempt to get there at night or did he have a hiding place?

The heavy blizzard, going deep into the thick wood, started obscuring their view the darker that it got and they tried to catch up with the guy more.

The snow glowed brightly in their lights, from their lights beaming out, and Bryson spotted the beam of light from police helicopter beam through the wood as it followed their path to them, and he wondered what would happen?

It was turning too dark and he grew tired from the evening spent searching the castle and he remained confused at what the police knew about the disturbances there and if they would make the mistake of staying there in the dark night and he could not think of a proper way to tell them of the dangers that existed there!

To his disappointment the helicopter flew straight overhead blowing up all the snow at them and throwing the blizzard about it, and it raced away into the distance, and he tried to hear what one of the others in front of him was talking about on his communicator, but could not, and was happy to see the helicopter return and stop at a place ahead of them – where he saw it land on an empty region of ground in the trees.

Away in the distance they watched three of the police using their lights to search for something beside the helicopter, and the police around Bryson all tried to see what was happening, through all the trees, and they raced towards them.

The policeman with the communicator hollered to them to go faster – now with his communicator blaring out at full volume with the frantic voices of the police over at the helicopter.

Another policeman eventually grabbed it and started to use it to speak to one of the men there, that he knew, who told them to come over as fast as they could.

 

Chapter 20

 

The Death

 

Bryson rushed over to the helicopter, going in front of the rest of the police, determined to find out what happened, and was blinded by the helicopter’s bright light blasting through the blackness and he waited until he saw where the police from the helicopter were and moved over to them, standing away in the distance around something in the vegetation.

Bryson rushed over, sensing that it was needed for some reason, almost blinded by the mixture of intense lights and darkness, considering everything that he was up against and attempting to observe every place at the one time.

He listened and all he noticed was the wind blowing the trees about the police ahead, with snow blowing around wildly.

Then just before he reached them he darted over to them and one of them turned and shone his torch over him, and one of the other police there acknowledged that he knew Bryson and that he was with them.

In all the footsteps in the snow Bryson suddenly noticed the killer’s footprints and that they staggered around and he saw that he had collapsed where the police were standing around, and he saw a trail of blood to him, from him clearly being shot by them.

They had attempted to fix his wound with bandages, and when Bryson stood beside them he saw that he was close to death.

Yet the police still had their hands on their guns at their sides!

By their reactions he was sure that they did not have a clue what they were dealing with for some reason and he searched for the reason. It was dark, within the grounds of the castle, and they had chased a vicious killer and had shot him.

From the helicopter they had easily traced him out into the dark wood, blanketed in deep snow.

The clothing of the killer was thick and wrapped around him, almost entirely covering him, and Bryson froze trying to see his face – expecting him to pull out a gun and start a gun battle.

When he saw that he had been handcuffed Bryson moved to his side to see what the problem was, and saw his face, and watch heaps of snow falling about him from the pine trees.

Bryson’s heart exploded, beating faster than he had ever felt it beat, when he saw its facial features!

He watched the figure almost fall over sideways, barely able to stay alive, and he saw its blood and that it was different.

The other police that were with Bryson strolled there, not shining their lights there – as though not daring to – approaching in wonder as though they were going to meet the devil himself.

When one of the police standing around him shone his light there they all were dumbstruck, and wondering what it was?

Bryson stared down in horror at what he was positive was a genetic cross between a human and some sort of alien, crippled on the ground!

It resembled some form of ghost, with it giving weak splutters from its form of mouth!

“Do you know what it is?” one of the police muttered, slightly shivering and gritting his teeth with the cold.

And they waited for Bryson to say something!

“I want to talk to it first!” he pleaded, and they moved back as he knelt down beside it.

“A scientist!” its weak voice muttered, and Bryson nodded in agreement, knowing that it could speak his language.

“Where did you come from?” he asked confused.

“A gateway threw a few of my species here years ago! They were trapped here, unable to return. I’m one of their experiments, and crossed with them and your species! I am the last of them! They were unable to return after all! They also made me to handle your species, communicate with your species, your outside world, and I was to find a way for them to return home! They built those tunnels you used to find the castle! They were built to get about the wood safely!”

“Were you watching us?”

“I used their technology to detect you and follow where you were going …”

“Why did you kill the people here?” one of the police finally asked, amazed at what it was. “And where were you going to?”

“They could’ve killed me …! My species were killed here …!”

“There was a skeleton in a large dome cavity within the tunnel,” Bryson continued. “How did that happen?”

“Some of the people of my race still worshiped ancient gods! They gave the sacrifices to the gods, believing that they had been punishing them putting them here!”

Bryson saw it was weakening and decided to alter the subject!

“What were you looking for in the library that he found? You left all the books disrupted!”

“I have been trying to find a way back to my world to tell them what happened – and you found more information, which I had to check …”

“Did you discover anything?”

It pulled out a crumbled bit of paper and allowed it to fall at its side, unable to move any further.

Bryson instantly picked it up and examined it.

“It’s a page from a diary? There’s nothing really on it?”

“It’s more! It’s definite proof of the diary of your ancestor – William Randall! I’ve been searching for it for most of my life.”

He stared down at its body cringing onto life, with blood pouring from its mouth, and it fell over dead and Bryson strolled away watching the confused faces of the police, wondering what they really thought of it.

 

Chapter 21

 

Another Death

 

At a top floor room window Bryson observed most of the police leaving in helicopters and was amazed to see the body of the alien being put aboard a military helicopter and Mitchell shaking hands with a high-ranking officer and Mitchell handing him his report and being handed documents and his orders.

Bryson knew there was far more behind it and Mitchell, and the military being there, and he left it there as he knew he was going to get information about it! Mitchell was being far more open than he had been, and would be if he intended to be secretive, and he wondered what Mitchell would have put in his report for when he had gone into library tunnel and through the vortex.

He even considered searching his stuff to have a look at what he had put down! What had happened to him? Had it been just the same? He thought of ways to get him to reveal what he wanted, realizing that it might not be secretive any longer.

What was their story? Why was he there? Why did they not send in an entire military group to search the place? It would take them far longer for them to get results the way that they were working there!

He felt amazed at actually meeting an alien and one of the builders of the tunnels out there, and the killer that they had been hunting for, with the police everywhere and the story being covered by the media in such depth.

The problem now was he never thought the other death was the alien killer and that something else had completely drained the body of water and of something else that they could not recognize.

A glance into the corridor once again showed him that the archaeologists were scanning regions of the castle with their equipment as they had said they would.

Bryson was amazed at the destruction some had made and they had removed the lower ceiling to reveal the original ceiling, made of solid oak beams, and he considered what it would be like being upon the castle roof and wondered why they never searched there?

The wires from the lights had rot and webs over them and had been easily broken and were in bits scattered over the floor, and he eyed up the mess wondering why they had not left it and if someone intended to fix it as they would have no lights there if they were not repaired.

The place would have to be cleaned up anyway or left if the place remained with its disturbances, as many more deaths would follow, and he wondered how the hell they would handle the situation? Would the military make it a forbidden zone?

Bryson marched along the corridor occasionally looking into rooms, which the others had clearly rigorously searched through, and he made an occasional search of anything that looked interesting to see if he could spot anything that they had not.

Bryson decided to go and see William, and left the top floor, and was amazed to see the police rushing up the stairs on the next floor and going out to the scene of another death, and he decided to follow to discover what had happened.

At the door of a room, where the police had gone in, Bryson studied a crumpled up body of one of the police and gasped and realized that all the police would be returning there, and he realized that he recognized the policeman and had seen him a few times at the lounge and he tried to see if he had missed anything about the death and if there was anything different this time, and as he did he realized that the police there thought the alien was the culprit – and that they thought there was another there.

Again the body was completely drained of water and of something else that he could not recognize and he saw why they had blamed the alien, and he even considered if it had been. The alien in the wood had been a genetic cross with a human! What if the proper alien was far different? The genetic cross version was clearly adapted to meet and talk to humans.

According to the alien they had advanced technology – and had built the tunnels – and had made human sacrifices to their ancient gods. Yet it could have lied to cover up there being aliens there, or were there others that it had not known about?

 

Chapter 22

 

The Invasion

 

Only a few days had passed and six more deaths had occurred in the castle, and Bryson realized that there must be at least a hundred policemen there now.

The entire castle and media to Bryson seemed to be going crazy – mentioning and thinking of the occurrences at the castle!

The deaths were unbelievable and all done in the same hideous fashion leaving the victims drained of energy! The police could not realize anything new now! And it seemed something was killing people all about them, right under their noses, which was totally unbelievable, and it was like someone had come up with something to make a fool of them all and ruin their methods of detection and representation. All their leading people from all over the country were trying to solve the mystery! The most advanced surveillance methods and equipment were everywhere monitoring the place night and day.

Yet the problem with it was that they never put it in people’s rooms or in the rooms that the people were working in – but in the main places and corridors that any person would have to through to get someone, including the outer building.

Yet most of the people now had phones and were sharing rooms and could hear any sounds from the rooms next to them, as well as having the corridors monitored by the police and soldiers guarding them.

What annoyed Bryson was nothing indicated and gave any clues to what it was!

William seemed confused and to be in danger like the rest of them and Bryson and everyone else watched him everywhere, and he just gave confused remarks.

There were stories being put on television for days and mainly because it was the only real occurrence that was happening! Everyone seemed to be taking an interest in it and their safety! Most, Bryson believed, wondered what would happen if it started occurring everywhere – and they could not even control the region of the castle!

Everyone took it that it had been a human killer and not something else, which was only suggested, clearly because of the castle! Surely something so hideous, evil, and unearthly that they suggested could not exist? He tried to ignore how hideous it was, trying to look upon it as an artist observed a crazy exhibit, but it was no use! Something was now out to get them! The things in the wood, if they were not the culprits, were nothing compared to it and they now looked as if they had been playing with them and only scaring them away from their territory.

The thing, whatever it was, played with their imaginations and they were not allowed to get anything about it and if it had been something like the aliens that had built the tunnels in the wood. There still was no connection and anything in the castle!

He had thoughts that it could be what had caused all the deaths through the centuries and that the thing had been thrown out of one of the gateways, vortex in the tunnel, or from what had put the aliens there. It could have been trapped there, and perhaps not been such a killer, and it could either have gone mad or something had happened to it to make that way.

The only real evidence that existed was what had happened to the people killed by it! The complexion of the bodies showed it had drained them of blood and showed the deadliness of the place, and their chances of survival had vastly decreased and danger could now exist there in the castle and during the day.

They never knew what they were up against and how to survive against it! They were becoming defenseless and they could not do anything about it!

They were confused more than he could ever recall seeing the police and they had difficulty talking about what was occurring because they had so little!

Strange thoughts of him leaving the cold confines of the place and whole region gave him shivers of ecstatic pleasure once again!

Yet the pleasure they would get if they solved the case and showed it to the world was far greater, and it was clear in the things that they said, especially in the dinning room when they were not working. It was a classic new scenario and there seemed no way to solve it! Something had to happen? How could they stay there with more and more deaths occurring without what was behind it being caught?

Bryson kept thinking of it at two angles and that he could leave and go on holiday to some hot place next to a desert or when he realized what was happening that he quite definitely would have to be forced into leave there as he did not want to miss what happened there.

He worked out the exact time the deaths occurred and asked the police what their times for the deaths occurring were and they all closely matched, and he recorded all the times, and he tried to compare the times with each other to see what they all had in common. What had been happening there when the deaths had occurred? Were they at the same times of the day or were they at times something happened?

Yet after a great deal of investigation he only proved that they were random times! He also checked the people who had been killed and what they had in common, what they had been doing, and at the time of their deaths, and what locations they had been in and he established that there were no real connections other than that they had been on their own and mainly in places that people had not been near, which showed whatever it had been had deliberately hidden itself, which he considered might show that it might be destroyed.

Was the thing only being safe, preferring solitude, or did it have weaknesses and could be destroyed? The thing could be anything though? It surely was not of this world! It could have been a normal powerful alien life form turned into one of the most deadliest entities, still with reactions of its original self, and he considered how they could use that? Could they find a way to scare it from there? Could they persuade it to do something else?

The police still unsuccessfully tried to discover how the killer had drained the victims of water and energy, and there was a suggestion a scientist was thought be involved or the technology of one had been used. Yet Bryson never believed anything to do with any scientists was involved, and he knew that the thing doing it did not really need what it was taking from them – unless it was some form of vampire.

He believed it was using the best way it could to kill them, and silently and quickly!

The rooms that most of the victims had been found in left them wondering why they had been there working alone!

Most of them still felt safe in the inhabited regions of the castle!

He could not get why no sounds seemed to be heard from the attacks? Why the deaths had not been heard? And he knew that the castle and its thick stones and strange formation could alter sounds – making silent sounds travel further at some places and stop even the loudest sounds being heard at some nearby places!

The police seemed to have secrets concerning the alien killer that they had killed in the wood and many of them thought there were more – and that they clearly had the technology to carry out the deaths. They had built the tunnels there!

Why kill them though? The alien in the wood had done it to survive and not get caught! The only logical reason, other than it liked it, was that it was determined to destroy them or scare them away from the castle!

 

Chapter 23

 

The Military

 

Bryson was amazed when he entered the psychic researcher’s room, at the tunnel with the vortex, where the scientists were still setting up equipment around the wall where the vortex was behind, and that their equipment had gone beyond anything that he had seen, which was immense and powerful, and the power supply there had been increased immensely to it with large cables being fed into there from massive generators.

He had not even been able to get near Merton and Mortimer, who now were just advisors on things! They had so much work that they had not slept in a long time!

The military scientists there had full control of the situation, and they clearly knew the equipment far greater than any of them.

The military’s mission there seemed to be a death or glory scenario. He was sure that they really wanted answers to what was there – and not to free the castle from what was there – and get any new technology or advancements there were a far greater achievement. Their interest in the aliens there was tremendous and far more than he had thought! They were checking out all the tunnels there and the alien that the police had killed, and where he had been staying and everything about him.

They had seen the story all over the media and had decided in sending in more people to investigate. Yet there was still much confusion on what was happening there and what was there, and they could only really investigate things as far he was concerned.

Some high-ranking officers had arrived and were being escorted around places by Mitchell, which Bryson gave occasional gasps at, thinking of what was killing people there. There had been two more deaths, unseen and unsolved again, and three sightings of other things of paranormal that resembled ghosts. The disturbances were clearly increasing and Bryson and the other scientists were working away to solve the situation, and find a solution, and he had been surprised that the treasure there was being forgotten, for the moment anyway.

Bryson was amazed when Merton and Mortimer handed him a military report and other documents, which they insisted he saw, perhaps to give his opinion on.

Documents told of investigations there going back to the start of the last century, before Pendleton and his friends had arrived there, and of police investigations that had told of paranormal disturbances, and why they and the military had left the place, and gave major investigations in the sixties that had ended with all the scientists there being killed and their bodies being found later, and that they had fenced the entire region off, and not allowed anyone near there, and that it had been left for people of the future to investigate someday with proper technology and ways of investigating and handling what existed there.

Again Bryson realized that all the scientists there were in danger, and that he would be lucky to get away from there alive!

Bryson knew there was far more behind Mitchell and the military being there, and he left things there. He wondered again what Mitchell would have put in his report about his entering the tunnel and going through the vortex.

In the end the paranormal scientists had decided against going near or in the direct path of the alien if they were able to detect where it was, which was what they were attempting to do, and to locate the vortex and everything with it in other dimensions, and find out what was there and build up an illustration of it and what they were dealing with.

The problem was getting their equipment to work as their attempts had so far failed there, and the stuff had never been fully and properly tested as not very many things existed in other dimensions.

If anything attacked them they had a procedure to escape from there, which Bryson thought was all they could do at the moment!

He wondered if it would turn predictable, since it could beat their weapons and had killed large amounts of soldiers, and mainly intended to wipe everyone out and scare the living daylights out of them.

All the paranormal scientists had recently had consultations with all the other scientists and the military and they now entirely left their minds open to what was there and would happen.

Bryson was surprised that when one of the scientists started cheerfully calling them over to a computer screen and showed a blurred view of the vortex in the tunnel, which Bryson was sure was of the vortex in another dimension as it was normally invisible and he had only seen it when he had entered it in an altered state in another dimension.

“This is entirely new!” Mortimer stated, considering it from various perspectives, and he watched it as if he had been waiting all his life to see what was there, and gasped slightly.

“What do you make of it?” Mitchell asked, walking over to them. “We so far have had nothing properly put forward on what its identity is?”

“How about calling it a vortex?” Bryson stated, realizing that Mitchell had entered the vortex too.

“You’re right! It can be called some form of vortex!”

“Well, it’s a start!” Mortimer continued. “The visible part of the vortex has been detected in another dimension! We should be able search what else is there. For instance what is causing the vortex to exist, and what it really is? Maybe even places it leads to!”

They were there to investigate what other scientists had not and to do it to a greater degree every time and Bryson was positive by their reactions that they had never had their day yet and they now never considered that they might never come upon anything, and achieve their goal, and that it would not be left for the people who followed them someday to find and get marked in the history books for.

If only they could find something there that had gone undetected by everyone else, with their detection methods and equipment being improved!

He gasped when he considered what they could come up with if they had something that really worked – as they had advanced far further than he had even imagined, and the place was packed solid with ever form of equipment possible and it went beyond his imagination what they might do.

It was like an experiment to Merton and Mortimer to see what would happen if they pushed beyond the boundaries of natural science, and out into the supernatural.

The dark sky of the place through the room widow now showed him the abyss of billions of light years of space, and the dangers of their exploration, and he considered if they would find anything if they used the equipment at night.

 

Chapter 24

 

The Interdimensional Surveillance

 

Once they had moved all the equipment that they needed over to a room at the second tunnel the other scientists joined them, and Mitchell arrived, and stood wondering, looking slightly annoyed and watching the equipment.

The scientists decided to check the second tunnel at the same time as the other tunnel with their improved outer dimensional scan, to see if they were connected to each as the majority of the scientists believed, which Bryson also wanted to find out.

It was morning and the scientists had increased the power of the dimensional scan and had started exploring the other tunnel.

Bryson sensed that there was something that they were not saying, but he knew he would only needed to wait for them to tell what it was as they were in danger and needed to give all the information that they could, to survive there.

While he considered what could happen next the scientists started examining the information on their screens on the equipment, and he wondered if the stuff worked anything like the stuff for detecting neutrinos, and he considered what it did.

“It’s found something new!” Merton announced, updating Mitchell and the other scientists on what they had found. “I’ve not seen anything like it! It is unknown and looks like it has intelligence!”

“An entity/life form that exists in there,” Mitchell announced, examining the wall, where the tunnel was behind. “What’s it like? Is it that thing that’s killing everyone here?”

“We do not know if it is a life form – or what it is – but it exists in many other dimensions!”

Bryson was fascinated and realized that it was what had tried to make contact with him, and surely had made William appear.

All the scientists were fascinated and confused at what they were going to end up with – another incredible find or disaster!

“Well, what will we do now?” Mitchell enquired. “Do you make contact with it?”

“It might have made some form of contact with us already!” Bryson announced.

“When did that happen?”

“William! His appearance occurred after I entered this tunnel, where I was sure something was trying to make contact!”

“William does not know what he is or is doing? But according the other scientists document on him he had to have been put here to check us out …”

“But he would have to be doing it without knowing it … As he would have said or we would have noticed him checking things. He also ignored many things – and sources of information put near him that would have been of interest!”

“Perhaps it is both!” Merton replied. “It was put there to make contact and check you! It might have underestimated and thought we were something different and had not understood what William was and capable of! There are suggestions in the all the accounts of it in the past from its first appearance on this world that it never fully knew what it was doing. It is surely far different and not from this universe in other dimensions and is mentioned as arriving here to check out the other the thing at the other castle, which it’s mentioned in trying to make contact with. It could very well be designed to make contact, but damaged itself!”

“That’s the best and most explained solution that I’ve heard since I heard of this whole affair!” Mitchell replied, thanking him.

Bryson was surprised and decided to keep it as what Merton suggested until anything else appeared.

Like some phenomenon occurred the instruments scanning the alien showed it in outer dimensions with incredible levels of energy, and all the scientists studied the recordings that they gave them fascinated.

“So this thing really exists and is in other dimensions!” Mitchell announced, taking out his communicator to call the military control center of it and all the other findings.

Bryson noticed some form of powerful magnetic influence from it being registered on some of the equipment, and realized that it had confused them, and that he would get answers on it later.

“What could create such power?” Mitchell asked, observing them understanding the information more.

“This thing is tremendous!” Merton stated. “I can now see why they could not destroy it. The majority of it is in the other dimensions – and it is not made of normal matter. It is made of energy to us – but it is far more in its own dimensions.”

“What do think it wants?” Mitchell asked.

“That I am not sure of!”

“Could it just be evil?” Mitchell asked, trying to see if they thought of it as the paranormal entity that it looked like. “And if it’s not what is killing everyone here for?”

“I cannot fully answer that! But I think at one point when it arrived at the castle it had to defend itself and created things to defend it – and it did not fully know what it was creating or was up against – as with William, and it does not fully know what it or William is doing here – if it even knows about it at all – as I believe it is not fully conscious! There are mention of it and other things altering and going dormant. It must have been damaged or its energy source grows weak, or both? It surely has not seen anything like us! That can be proven by its original behavior and it trying to adapt itself to here. I think it still tries to learn and collect information though!”

“That’s very interesting” Mitchell answered firmly.

Mitchell began talking to someone on his communicator, and asked Merton, “What form does this multidimensional take in this dimension, and as a whole through dimensions? And what do you call it, if you had to give it some form of identification?”

“I am not sure I can answer all that yet – as it is through dimensions – and our equipment has not been adapted for that yet – and has different energy states in them all. It is more an entity! We have not fully realized what it is! It is in what is like the depths of space, at the most different region from our environment as it can get. So I doubt I can properly compare it at the moment! We have so little, and know so little about its identity …”

“And they may not fully believe you?” Mitchell moaned, as he listened to the response from the military control center. “And they want to know if we can properly back up the claims you made already?”

“Exactly! They will need to know everything that they can about it – as they will need to destroy it!”

“We need as much as possible in detecting it and capturing it – if we cannot destroy it! And they can throw it back out there in space or something, where it belongs!”

 

Chapter 25

 

The Treasure Expedition

 

Bryson and Pendleton arrived at a room at the virtually unexplored ground floor, without anyone seeing them going there. It was where the bottom of the second tunnel was, and came to an end, which Pendleton occasionally gasped at.

Bryson still could not believe that they were still coming across highly potential unexplored spots, where the treasure could be buried away.

After a great deal of thought and information from the scans of the tunnel Bryson started realizing that William Randall could have buried it at the bottom of the tunnel, with the thing in it to scare away anyone going there. Pendleton’s memory had returned and he insisted that the other two treasure hunters with him had insisted that it was there and that it was buried away at the bottom.

The room was an ordinary castle room, which had clearly not been entered by anyone for a long time by the webs covering it everywhere, and he also noticed that no footprints were on the dust on the carpet.

Bryson could not get why the others never thought the treasure had been there on the ground floor, and neither could Pendleton.

The tunnel had been there at the exact location they had traced it to, and Pendleton was sure that they would have found the treasure there and he was sure that they had only entered the tunnel at the top floor as it had looked the best place!

The wall grabbed their attention as its thickness was the same as the other rooms the tunnels were in.

The archaeologists had given up scanning walls and had found nothing with it. Their scans were not good and their scans of the other tunnel had shown little! Their equipment needed to be improved!

Bryson repeatedly thumped his hand hard against the wall, intensely listening for anything, while he slowly moved across it.

Bryson easily located the tunnel behind the wall but instead of finding the boulders at the spot he discovered something larger, and peeled away the wallpaper with Pendleton until they revealed what looked like a solid block of stone, the size of a doorway, surrounded by castle boulders.

Bryson stood amazed at how he and so many others could have missed such a thing! How could they have found the tunnel in the library and not even bothered going to the bottom of it? It even made him gasp as he wondered if they had avoided going there for a reason? The thing up there was hideous, even if they were now thinking of it as a normal life form trying to escape from its confines, and having advanced intelligence.

He was sure the ancient historical castle had many hidden secrets and treasures buried away and wondered if they might find anything else there.

At first he thought that he would have to force the slab in or destroy it completely but when he pushed it he saw it was a door, made of stone, and he carefully shifted the awkward mass of stone in, in stages, into the wall, as Pendleton stayed ready to help.

They were both obsessed and Bryson had to push it further with all his weight and strength, as it became stuck with dirt and stone around its edges, and his clambering resumed until he had it out of the way and they could enter the tunnel.

His eyes occasionally fell on the mess under him with little interest! The thick layer of stone and dust fragments were scattered across the ground and he started brushing it away with his shoe to see what was below, and found more castle stones!

He turned on his light and looked further, and he wondered if the scientists working above would detect their presence there, with amusement.

Bryson was sure that the thing above only reacted to things at certain distances, but he was unsure about them being below it!

Yet why did it not work through the walls? He had been in the rooms behind the wall with the other scientists and nothing occurred there!

He turned the light upwards and examined the tunnel going upwards. What was it? What was there? He had put together everything that they had found and he now could barely believe most of it! Was there something else there hiding itself?

He shone the powerful light straight up the tunnel, where he saw the tunnel going up to the castle roof, and as his sight adjusted to it he saw nothing and started to wonder what it was built for?

Yet it seemed too large to be a chimney and there was no trace of soot or anything that would surely be there, even if they had it cleaned. Although there was the chance that nobody had really used it and that any marks were hidden now.

His breathing echoed into it, and its coldness made clouds of steam come out of his mouth going up into it.

Suddenly sounds started emerging above and he wondered if he had activated it!

They started sounding mind-bending and started screaming through the shaft until they had a fury that stunned him, with some sounding like screams and others like wailing spirits, and he wondered if there were other dangers there at the bottom that were not at the top? Could the thing come down and escape? And get them outside the tunnel?

Clouds of powdered dirt and stone fell about at different points around boulders above as though the tunnel were being shaken by an earthquake. Dust swirled through his beam of light as he wondered where the treasure would be buried away? And he sheltered it going into his eyes.

He imagined Pendleton and the other two treasure hunters there years before, during the Second World War, hanging on their ropes, just over the disturbance, which he tried to locate.

He watched what was happening carefully, which he had not been able to do when he had been in the other tunnel on the steps, surrounded in darkness, or when he was above sticking his head in the tunnel, and he wondered how dangerous it really was and if he was going to be killed by it.

He lost his balance and grabbed hold of part of a castle boulder he was resting against behind him and it came away in his hand, and he glimpsed its dark shape and felt it wondering what it was, and he finally shined the light over it and saw something that resembled a piece of wood from the building of the castle.

He then realized some sounds were now not emerging from lower down than they had been and he saw that something was coming downwards, and he thought that he heard one emerge just above him and he listened intensely with confusion.

Sounds were manifesting everywhere as though there were invisible unidentifiable things surrounding there, and strange glowing and swirling forces seemed to form in the blackness.

While he tried to see what was going on at an area he noticed that light was moving downwards and he fixed his eyes onto a strange orb of light floating down, and it all swiftly vanished, and he stood wondering what had happened to it all?

Bryson turned sensing something was in the room and saw William standing blankly staring at him, beside Pendleton, and Bryson walked into the room and shut the stone doorway, blocking the entrance to the tunnel, and saw William and Pendleton staring at the thing that he had in his hand, which he had thought had been a discarded piece wood from the building of the castle, and he realized that it was an ancient book.

 

Chapter 26

 

The Diary

 

The page that the alien had given Bryson, when it had died in the wood, fitted into the diary and confirmed it was authentic!

When he started reading it William’s appearance at the tunnel haunted his thoughts, making him wonder why he was there? What had the entity put him there for?

It was as though he should not be there! He could not tell them or explain how he knew they had been there at the tunnel. Only that he had to go there, and Bryson was amazed at the way the thing in the tunnel had vanished when he had appeared.

What was the connection? If the thing there had made him, what did it want him to do? It clearly took control of him at times and used him to do things!

The ancient book was incredible and he had known it was something by the way William had reacted and had waited for him to read it, and Bryson had been more than fascinated when he had read it and found it was William Randall’s diary! He had actually found William Randall’s diary! It had been left upright in a gap in the wall, where it had resembled part of the wall, with a withered cover that resembled a dirt covered stone.

It felt like he had been waiting all his life to find it and that everything else had been the build up to it. What it contained he could not even guess, and he guarded it greatly, and he did not want to show it to anyone until he had ruthlessly checked it.

He soon realized that it was not a normal diary and that it had strange things scribbled through it, with a quill pen, and he conjured up images of his ancestor wearing ancient clothes at a desk writing it.

The more he read it the more important it became and the less he thought of his ancestor writing it, and it even gave him details of the hidden treasure.

There was no doubt about it the book explained occurrences at the castle, and he wondered what his thoughts of the castle had been at that time in history.

At times it was like the whole castle was something else – created for some function that he could not even imagine – which went beyond his understanding.

As he read it he repeatedly wondered what the people in the past would have given for the book that he had in front of him, and what the aliens, who had built the tunnels in the wood, would have given for it?

He recalled all the accounts and things that he had heard!

What had been the truth about the stories that had said something had happened that had killed them all? So if it had been true what had happened and how had the entity ended up in the tunnel and in the other tunnel? Why had it not moved away into the other dimensions? What was keeping it there? Surely there had to be something there that they were missing? Perhaps it was disguised as something or was hidden away? Such advanced technology could achieve virtually anything and it could be something that he had not even considered possible?

He had always wanted to explore and discover something new of value and greatness, and even be remembered in history!

What interested and alarmed them was why it was hidden in such a place and had created such occurrences? What was it they were dealing with anyway? Why was it in such a far out place?

Something of unfathomable unidentifiable supernatural nature sounded as though it were there trapped in some form of magnetic or energy field, trapped and trying to free itself from something, ultimately escaping to another location of liberty, and he imagining some form of spirit trapped there for centuries.

Bryson again started to realize the implications of the find and that they might check what was there someday, and that he better start finding information about it.

The book started by stating facts that were given in the accounts that Bryson had read and that the origins of the entity had occurred in 1620 when fishermen at a fishing village had witnessed its materialization, and that it had appeared over the morning mist over the sea as a bright light of immense magnitude, and that everybody that had witnessed it had realized that it had been something of great power and intelligence, and that they had seen it landing and that they had followed it to where it had crashed.

William Randall had thought he had seen everything until he had been shown it by the fishermen and it had fascinated him, and though he had been a scientist of that time he believed in forms of magic and witchcraft, especially after his encounter with the first transcendent and its artifact at the first castle, and the entity had powers going beyond anything he had seen.

Something had damaged it before it had crashed and it had continually altered, and had been made of energy, and altered from something and had been trying to adapt to something and had been trapped in something invisible to them.

At one point they had believed it would vanish completely from existence but it had been later perceived that it had entered some form of damaged or dormant state, surely exhausted of energy from either its extraordinary manifestation, impact with the world, or it not having existed in their form of existence.

The original transcendent at the first castle had died before he had taken it to the castle, where it had slowly altered into something that they could not understand, and they had tried to use its magic.

They had found some ways of communicating with it when it had created the second William Randall and they had used it to build the second castle with its powers.

Through the second William Randall they had learned that it had traced the original transcendent and artifact there into this universe, and it had occasionally attempted to mimic it and make contact with it and analyze it. It had been unable to repair itself and had been trapped and could not fully achieve its objective and fully understand.

At the second castle they had tried to use it for magical purposes, and it had foreseen some future occurrences, but had unsuccessfully tried to accumulate its powers to use themselves.

They had used it to create castle defenses when they had been threatened with annihilation by an army, which they had not been able to do properly, and had improvised and as a result of it had turned the castle into what it was, which had killed all of the people there, except William Randall who had been at the other castle when it had happened, and he had found out about it later when he had gone there, and it had entered a dormant state.

The second William Randall had been killed there and they had put him in the tomb at the second castle.

They had not been able to deactivate it and had split it into two parts to weaken its powers and they had put them into the two ventilation shafts.

Bryson finished the diary realizing that it had left the deadliest menace in the world at the castle and he tried to work out how they could possibly approach it without being killed, to return it to where it had originated!

 

Chapter 27

 

The Voyage Beyond the Cosmos

 

For a moment Bryson sensed a weird sensation as though something had happened and something else was going to happen!

The scientists were calibrating their equipment in the room at the second tunnel and Bryson watched them gasp, and even Mitchell stood dazed, as they realized what was going to happen. It was absurdly dangerous beyond anything that Bryson could realize and he had not heard of anything like it being done before.

William had been found to be able to communicate properly with the entity in the second tunnel at a close distance, and they had used it locate the two parts of the entity in the ventilation shafts, which had been discovered to be solid matter.

They had used William to stop it from attacking or throwing them into gateways going beyond the universe and they found that they were small black slabs like shiny black stone, measuring three feet by three feet with a thickness of half a foot, which were fitted above the entrances into the tunnels, disguised as the castle stones there.

It had surprised Bryson that William Randall had persuaded the entity to make itself into solid matter! Bryson had been able to touch them without being killed or thrown out of space and time into some other world, and the scientists found a way of joining them together by using the entity and William and it had formed into a rectangle black alien artifact identical to the rectangle transparent black shape that he had visualized in the second tunnel, when it had tried to make contact with him.

They had found ways to increase the communications between William and the entity by using specially designed equipment, connected to the alien artifact.

William was in a seat where he had objects covering his head connected to equipment that monitored him and his thoughts and transmitted his thoughts to the alien artifact.

Bryson realized that they had been correct in informing the entity that the other transcendent and its alien artifact at the other castle no longer existed, which it had been stuck there trying to make contact with, and it had told them that it had detected it was. It had been designed to meet it and destroy it if it was a danger to it or its creators – and it had been unable to do it as it had been damaged by having its energy source damaged, which had happened so fast that it had not realized what had happened.

They had all watched it activating their equipment – which they had taught William how to use and how it worked.

All the scientists had stood back as it burst into life – using massive amounts of energy fed to it through attached cables – with the sheer energy making the castle about them vibrate and lurch!

Even though it was a great deal of energy to them it was little to the entity – but enough to allow it to do what they had told it to do – and to open a gateway through time to itself before it had entered this universe, just before it had made its appearance on this world where it had failed to get enough energy.

All the scientists there realized immediately that it was working and that it had achieved its mission – and that it could use the energy supply from itself in past!

Bryson realized that they had actually found out from their questioning of it that it was partly programmed, but nothing like their computers, or from this universe, and that it mainly functioned carrying out what it had been created for and that it had been a form of time probe – which they had not been properly able to deduce – as vast amounts of information that it had could not be translated or understood, and had no equivalent.

For a moment Bryson wondered if it could change history and do something like stop itself from entering the universe in 1620, when the fishermen at the fishing village had witnessed its materialization and bright light exploding out of the early morning mist over the sea, like a crazy shooting star.

Suddenly William and the alien artifact vanished and Bryson realized the hideous reality of the situation and that they had let it loose on the universe and on the whole of time!

In the first place it had been virtual mad when it had been split in half! It surely had been altered by William Randall and his men’s experiments – and them altering it to believe in tales of witchcraft, magic, demons, and hell – and the other transcendent haunting the other castle that it had mimicked – and there was no proper proof that it was undamaged by its entrance into the universe, and it crashing into the world!

Though they all soon sensed that it had not and felt its power and intelligence, and how sane it was, and that it was far more than anything that he had ever thought existed!

Light from it exploded everywhere all over the world showing them its new existence – and entities in the form of large bright globes appeared around them and slowly vanished.

When it finished Bryson felt vaguely confused but knew that it had left the universe and that they had done everything that they could for it, and the world.

He then wondered if William had told him the truth earlier that day when he had told him that William Randall had got his treasure from the entity, which had collected it from many sources, and that he had only removed part of the treasure to the other castle – which had been what Bryson had found at the other castle – and that the remains of the treasure had been buried away in a secret chamber under floor of the second tunnel.

When Bryson investigated it he was staggered to find Pendleton there already, digging up the ground under the second tunnel and that he had just uncovered the secret chamber, and both of them climbed into it and found an entire room full of treasure.

 

Epilogue

 

The Transcendent Voyager

 

For billions of years the transcendent voyager had existed never wholly knowing what had created it or where it had originated, carrying out its mission of searching through time and space in its universe for abnormalities, unknown civilizations and species, and transcendent entities with colossal powers and capabilities and to destroy them if they were dangerous to reality and what its programming considered dangerous.

It had been designed and given technology beyond anything else that it had encountered and had the abilities to search its universe in a degree and with abilities that would not have been believed to exist by the most advanced transcendences and civilizations, and would have been thought of as magical powers, and it had the ability to search its universe throughout time.

Its form had been an invisible complex mass of energy, stored in many dimensions, that had been built to last forever, and it directly entered stars to energize itself and store its vast powers for extensive amounts of time.

Its stores of information had been vast and it had the ability to collect as much information on what it had been programmed for eternally and improve its defenses and other abilities, and it had become the ultimate weapon of destruction against the destruction of its universe.

It had stored the technology and abilities of zillions of species and had the ability to recognize and handle what it had been searching for within a range of its universe.

At one point it had unintentionally left the universe and had entered an outer universe that it had not known the existence of, where colossal amounts of universes had existed, and on its entrance there its programming had accepted it as the real universe and that it had to accept it as the universe that it had to carry out its mission in.

At first it had been unable to enter the universes and properly detect anything in them and it used all its information and studied how it had entered the outer universe and found a way to enter them and locate particular things in them, but infinite amounts of things of unknown origins existed in them.

In supernatural universes it had learned to open and use gateways that shifted it accurately to destinations. It discovered far more than it had ever realized could exist and it gave itself colossal magical abilities and energies and it had analyzed everything in a greater degree.

On its first entrances to the universes it had been left staggered when it had encountered something of unknown origins that had drained its energy from it!

Something had virtually absorbed all its power instantly on its entrance of the Earth’s atmosphere, only leaving it with some of its energy in other dimensions, which it had not considered possible as it had not been possible in its own universe, and it could not get proper amounts of power in other dimensions and had to fight to survive and had continuously tried to alter and adapt to something that it could survive as, and it had to create dormant states and ways of collecting energy from small sources and storing it until it had enough to reactivate itself, and work on finding a source powerful enough for it to use to leave there.

Even though it had not done much in its damaged condition, with its vast abilities virtually unusable, it had been able to explore things through supernatural gateways into universes, going out into the strangest places, and it had even considered if there had been others such as it in the endless universes and if they had created it, and if it could contact them to help it, and it had gained abilities to explore inconceivable dimensions and powers in the universes, far beyond its original knowledge and powers.

The humans had helped it and it had used its powers to help them and it had created things for them, including defenses and entities to protect them, and it had created things to hide itself away, even though it had almost damaged itself by splitting itself into two halves.

The humans had become far more advanced and it had been surprised that they had actually found a way for it to restore itself!

On entering the outer universes it had repaired itself and immediately made sure nothing could drain it of energy again and gave itself abilities to create energy in new ways anywhere, and it altered most of its programming to adapt.

It created colossal supernatural powers, going beyond anything known, and used its magical powers to transform it into something beyond anything that it had ever encountered and it gained powers to build universes, and others, and found far more than it had ever realized could exist and another universe beyond there.

 


From Beyond Space and Time 2016

A high quality action-packed thriller of explorers encountering mind-bending deadly voyagers from beyond the universe! In the abyss of deep space something from somewhere with no known origins enters space through a celestial gateway! From an alternative reality! Somewhere beyond our comprehension! Something beyond comprehension rests deep beneath London in a cavity, waiting for thousands of years to be revived! Will mankind survive if it is fully revived, with all its powers and original state restored? Workmen constructing a new section of the London underground near London Bridge during the Second World War uncover something of unknown origins in a large underground cavity and leading scientists and archeologists are brought in to discover what is buried away, so deep beneath the ground! Scientists unsuccessfully scan below the ground, searching for what is below, but while using a new form of the scanning technology they uncover things that never showed up on the original scans, and realize something below is stopping them from seeing what is there! Something strange is buried deep below, hundreds of feet below, at least thousands of years old, and a blurred image of it is detected, and after examinations of it they grasp its colossal size! A newly invented voyager explores the deepest depths of the universe, and leaves space and time when it encounters one of the deadliest menaces of all creation, hidden away in a colossal void since the dawn of time, after it starts killing them all, and on a world in the depths of a new minding-bending universe encounter another of the deadliest menaces in existence, which travels through time and has supernatural origins! After exploring a legendary desolate haunted region (where there are accounts of supernatural activity, hideous deaths, and vast amounts of treasure) explorers reveal something with advanced celestial intelligence of unknown deadly origins! They find unknown and strange occurrences everywhere they turn as they explore the remains of the place, trying to determine what is there and occurring, and uncover a mind-bending ultimate time and space voyager probe buried away there, with hideous supernatural intelligence, waiting to be properly revived, with powers capable of destroying reality!

  • ISBN: 9781311676191
  • Author: CosmicBlueCB
  • Published: 2016-07-15 20:20:29
  • Words: 107908
From Beyond Space and Time 2016 From Beyond Space and Time 2016